New as of: 10.

2017

Sinius / Sinius CS / Sinius TS

Operating Instructions

English
Table of contents Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Table of contents

1 General information ................................................................................................ 11

1.1 Dear Customer,............................................................................................ 11
1.2 Contact information...................................................................................... 11
1.3 Notes on these Operating Instructions......................................................... 12
1.3.1 General information on the operating Instructions ......................... 12
1.3.2 Scope of these Operating Instructions........................................... 12
1.4 Other valid documents ................................................................................. 13
1.5 Warranty and liability.................................................................................... 13
1.6 Intended use ................................................................................................ 13
1.7 Formats and symbols used.......................................................................... 14

2 Safety instructions .................................................................................................. 15

2.1 Identification of the danger levels ................................................................ 15
2.2 Information on the unit ................................................................................. 15
2.3 On-site installation ....................................................................................... 16
2.4 Installation of the treatment center............................................................... 16
2.5 Media quality................................................................................................ 16
2.6 Connection to the public drinking water system........................................... 17
2.7 Maintenance and repair ............................................................................... 17
2.8 Trouble-free operation ................................................................................. 18
2.9 Vacuum system ........................................................................................... 18
2.10 Patient chair ................................................................................................. 18
2.11 Intermittent operation ................................................................................... 18
2.12 Ventilation slots............................................................................................ 19
2.13 Touchscreen ................................................................................................ 19
2.14 Care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents ....................................................... 19
2.15 Care and cleaning instructions for the practice team................................... 19
2.16 Modifications and extensions of the system ................................................ 19
2.17 Electromagnetic compatibility ...................................................................... 20
2.18 Electrostatic discharge................................................................................. 21
2.19 Dismantling/Installation ................................................................................ 22

3 Unit description ....................................................................................................... 23

3.1 Standards/Approvals.................................................................................... 23
3.2 Technical data.............................................................................................. 25
3.3 System overview.......................................................................................... 28
3.4 Patient chair ................................................................................................. 31

63 22 726 D3561
2 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona Table of contents
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.5 Headrest ...................................................................................................... 32

3.5.1 Motor-driven headrest.................................................................... 32
3.5.2 Double-jointed head support.......................................................... 33
3.6 Foot control .................................................................................................. 34
3.7 Dentist element ............................................................................................ 35
3.7.1 Instrument positions....................................................................... 39
3.7.2 EasyTouch user interface .............................................................. 40
3.7.3 Touchscreen .................................................................................. 41
3.7.4 Fixed keys on the dentist element ................................................. 42
3.8 Assistant element......................................................................................... 44
3.8.1 Instrument positions....................................................................... 45
3.8.2 User interface................................................................................. 45
3.8.3 Fixed keys on the assistant element.............................................. 45
3.9 Water unit..................................................................................................... 47
3.10 External device connection ......................................................................... 49

4 Operation ................................................................................................................ 51
4.1 Starting up the treatment center .................................................................. 51
4.1.1 Initial startup................................................................................... 51
4.1.2 Switching the treatment center on/off ............................................ 51
4.1.2.1 Power switch ................................................................ 51
4.1.2.2 Main switch................................................................... 52
4.1.3 Selecting a user profile .................................................................. 53
4.2 Control concept of touchscreen ................................................................... 54
4.2.1 Virtual function keys....................................................................... 54
4.2.2 Start program operating modes ..................................................... 55
4.2.3 Sub-screens and settings screens................................................. 58
4.2.4 Status bar....................................................................................... 59
4.3 Foot control .................................................................................................. 60
4.3.1 Wireless foot control ...................................................................... 60
4.3.1.1 Setting the wireless foot control on the treatment
center............................................................................ 60
4.3.1.2 Battery voltage message .............................................. 60
4.3.2 Operating the foot control .............................................................. 61
4.3.3 Using the cursor control ................................................................. 62
4.3.3.1 Functionality ................................................................. 62
4.3.3.2 Operating the cursor control ......................................... 63
4.4 Patient chair ................................................................................................. 65
4.4.1 Safety instructions.......................................................................... 65
4.4.2 Safety stop ..................................................................................... 66

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 3
Table of contents Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.3 Triggering an immediate movement stop....................................... 67

4.4.4 Armrests......................................................................................... 68
4.4.5 Vario footrest.................................................................................. 68
4.4.6 Adjusting the motor-driven headrest .............................................. 69
4.4.6.1 Moving the headrest in/out ........................................... 69
4.4.6.2 Inclining the headrest ................................................... 70
4.4.7 Adjusting the double articulating headrest ..................................... 71
4.4.8 Moving the patient chair via chair programs .................................. 72
4.4.8.1 Moving the patient chair to the entry/exit position ........ 72
4.4.8.2 Moving the patient chair to the mouth rinsing position . 73
4.4.8.3 Using the last position memory function....................... 73
4.4.8.4 Activating other chair programs.................................... 74
4.4.9 Moving the chair manually ............................................................. 75
4.4.9.1 Open manual chair setting screen................................ 75
4.4.9.2 Tilting the patient couch................................................ 76
4.4.9.3 Adjusting the chair height ............................................. 76
4.4.10 Creating chair and shock positioning programs............................. 77
4.4.11 Setting the active lumbar support .................................................. 78
4.5 Dentist element ............................................................................................ 79
4.5.1 Maximum load capacity ................................................................. 79
4.5.2 Height adjustment .......................................................................... 80
4.5.3 Positioning the dentist element ...................................................... 80
4.5.4 Fixed keys on the dentist element ................................................. 84
4.5.4.1 Main switch................................................................... 84
4.5.4.2 Program change keys................................................... 84
4.5.4.3 Timer function............................................................... 85
4.5.4.4 Shock positioning ......................................................... 86
4.5.4.5 Operating light .............................................................. 86
4.5.4.6 Composite function....................................................... 86
4.5.4.7 Tumbler filling ............................................................... 86
4.5.4.8 Flushing of the cuspidor bowl ....................................... 87
4.5.4.9 Freely selectable function............................................. 88
4.5.4.10 Clean ............................................................................ 88
4.5.4.11 Setup ............................................................................ 88
4.5.5 Quick setting keys and function levels ........................................... 89
4.5.6 Saving instrument settings............................................................. 91
4.5.7 Placing the instruments in their holders ......................................... 93

63 22 726 D3561
4 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona Table of contents
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.8 General instrument functions ......................................................... 95

4.5.8.1 Opening the sub-screen ............................................... 95
4.5.8.2 Selecting a coolant ....................................................... 95
4.5.8.3 Switching the preselected coolant on/off ...................... 95
4.5.8.4 Setting the ApexLocator ............................................... 96
4.5.8.5 Switch instrument light on/off........................................ 96
4.5.8.6 Setting the foot control as a direct starter or speed
foot control.................................................................... 96
4.5.8.7 Setting the spray amount.............................................. 97
4.5.8.8 Preparing for use of NaCl saline solution ..................... 98
4.5.8.9 Setting the NaCl flow rate............................................. 101
4.5.9 ApexLocator................................................................................... 102
4.5.9.1 Preparing to use the ApexLocator ................................ 103
4.5.9.2 Distance display ........................................................... 105
4.5.9.3 Beeps ........................................................................... 108
4.5.9.4 Performing manual measurements with the file clamp. 109
4.5.10 Electric motor ................................................................................. 110
4.5.10.1 Motor and coupling versions......................................... 110
4.5.10.2 Setting the speed.......................................................... 112
4.5.10.3 Setting the direction of rotation..................................... 114
4.5.10.4 Implantology/endodontics treatments with motor ......... 116
4.5.11 Highspeed handpiece .................................................................... 119
4.5.11.1 Using the highspeed handpiece ................................... 119
4.5.11.2 Setting the light of the highspeed handpiece................ 119
4.5.12 Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe ................................................. 121
4.5.12.1 Safety instructions ........................................................ 121
4.5.12.2 Using the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe................ 122
4.5.12.3 Instrument light on/off and water temperature
adjustment .................................................................... 122
4.5.13 SiroSonic TL scaler........................................................................ 124
4.5.13.1 Safety instructions ........................................................ 124
4.5.13.2 Setting the intensity ...................................................... 124
4.5.14 Implantology and endodontic treatment......................................... 128
4.5.14.1 Treatment selection ...................................................... 128
4.5.14.2 Implantology ................................................................. 131
4.5.14.3 Endodontics.................................................................. 137
4.6 Assistant element......................................................................................... 148
4.6.1 Maximum load capacity ................................................................. 148
4.6.2 Positioning ..................................................................................... 148

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 5
Table of contents Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.6.3 Fixed keys on the assistant element.............................................. 148

4.6.3.1 Tumbler filling ............................................................... 149
4.6.3.2 Flushing of the cuspidor bowl ....................................... 149
4.6.3.3 Operating light .............................................................. 149
4.6.3.4 Chair programs S and 0 ............................................... 149
4.6.3.5 Hash key....................................................................... 150
4.6.4 Suction handpieces........................................................................ 151
4.6.5 Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe ................................................. 153
4.6.6 Mini LED curing light ...................................................................... 154
4.6.6.1 Safety instructions ........................................................ 154
4.6.6.2 Symbols on the mini LED ............................................. 154
4.6.6.3 Connecting the Mini L.E.D............................................ 155
4.6.6.4 Functional description................................................... 155
4.6.6.5 Operating the Mini LED ................................................ 156
4.6.6.6 Technical data .............................................................. 157
4.7 Water unit..................................................................................................... 158
4.7.1 Swiveling the cuspidor bowl........................................................... 158
4.7.2 Tumbler filling with automatic sensor control ................................. 158
4.7.3 Adjusting the water amount for flushing......................................... 159
4.7.4 Self-sufficient water supply ............................................................ 160
4.8 Tray.............................................................................................................. 163
4.8.1 Tray on the support arm (for Sinius) .............................................. 163
4.8.2 Tray on the Sinius CS dentist element........................................... 164
4.8.3 Tray on the Sinius TS dentist element ........................................... 165
4.8.4 Cup holder ..................................................................................... 166
4.9 Panoramic X-ray image viewer .................................................................... 167
4.9.1 Switching on/off the X-ray viewer or white screen on the Sivision
monitor ........................................................................................... 167
4.9.2 Attaching the anti-glare film ........................................................... 168
4.10 Operating light.............................................................................................. 169
4.10.1 Switching the operating light on/off ................................................ 169
4.10.2 Setting the brightness and sensor control of the LEDview ............ 170
4.10.3 Setting the brightness, color temperature, and sensor control of
the LEDview Plus........................................................................... 170
4.10.4 Switching the dentist element composite function on/off ............... 171
4.10.5 Activating operating light on the assistant element........................ 171
4.11 X-ray tube unit.............................................................................................. 172

63 22 726 D3561
6 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona Table of contents
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.12 Sivision Digital video system........................................................................ 173

4.12.1 Sivision monitor.............................................................................. 174
4.12.2 SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera............................................... 175
4.12.2.1 Safety instructions ........................................................ 175
4.12.2.2 Functional description................................................... 175
4.12.2.3 Connecting the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera .... 176
4.12.2.4 Operating the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera ...... 177
4.12.2.5 Technical camera data ................................................. 182
4.13 Operation with a PC..................................................................................... 183
4.13.1 Sivision program ............................................................................ 184
4.13.1.1 Starting PC communication .......................................... 184
4.13.1.2 Communication with the media player.......................... 185
4.13.1.3 Communication with Microsoft PowerPoint .................. 185
4.13.1.4 Communication with Sidexis......................................... 186
4.13.1.5 Communication with video plugin ................................. 188
4.13.2 USB port ........................................................................................ 189
4.14 Configuration of the treatment center (setup) .............................................. 190
4.14.1 Opening the setup programs ......................................................... 190
4.14.2 Configuring the EasyTouch user interface..................................... 191
4.14.2.1 Switching the key sound on/off..................................... 191
4.14.2.2 Calibrating the touchscreen.......................................... 191
4.14.2.3 Adjusting the touchscreen brightness........................... 191
4.14.3 Setting the date and time ............................................................... 192
4.14.4 Configuring control options ............................................................ 193
4.14.4.1 Preselecting the number of user profiles ...................... 193
4.14.4.2 Setting the cursor control.............................................. 193
4.14.4.3 Select the operating mode of the Start program........... 193
4.14.4.4 Switching on/off the foot control function for intraoral
camera focus ................................................................ 194
4.14.4.5 Linking the spray aspirator to the 4-way foot switch..... 194
4.14.4.6 Linking the headrest tilt to the 4-way foot switch .......... 195
4.14.4.7 Setting the hash key function on the assistant element 195
4.14.4.8 Setting the bell/hash fixed key as a pushbutton or as
a switch......................................................................... 195
4.14.4.9 Key for showing/hiding white screen on the Sivision
monitor.......................................................................... 196
4.14.4.10 Adjust cleaning agent mixture for chemical suction
hose cleaning ............................................................... 196
4.14.4.11 Switching the central supply for chemical suction hose
cleaning off and on ....................................................... 196

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 7
Table of contents Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.14.4.12 Adjusting the temperature of the tumbler heater .......... 197

4.14.4.13 Linking the tumbler heater to the chair program........... 197
4.14.5 Configure instruments.................................................................... 198
4.14.5.1 Preselecting how instrument settings are to be saved . 198
4.14.5.2 Switching afterblow on/off............................................. 198
4.14.5.3 Showing/hiding the key for the external HF surgical
unit................................................................................ 199
4.14.5.4 Setting the spray temperature ...................................... 199
4.14.6 Configuring the network connection............................................... 200
4.14.7 Opening the service function ......................................................... 200

5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team........................................... 201

5.1 Basics .......................................................................................................... 201
5.1.1 Intervals ......................................................................................... 201
5.1.2 Care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents ......................................... 203
5.1.3 Microbiological water test............................................................... 203
5.1.4 General handling instructions ........................................................ 204
5.1.5 Inspection, maintenance and testing ............................................. 205
5.2 Surfaces....................................................................................................... 206
5.2.1 Clean/disinfect surfaces................................................................. 206
5.2.2 Disinfect the EasyTouch ................................................................ 207
5.2.3 Disinfecting handles....................................................................... 208
5.2.4 Disinfecting the tray ....................................................................... 209
5.2.5 Disinfecting the cup holder............................................................. 210
5.2.6 Care for, clean, and disinfect upholstery........................................ 211
5.2.7 Cleaning the bottom surface of the mount for the backrest
component. .................................................................................... 211
5.2.8 Thermally disinfecting the instrument holder of the dentist
element and sterilizing the silicone mat ......................................... 212
5.2.9 Thermally disinfecting the instrument holder of the assistant
element and sterilizing the silicone mat ......................................... 214
5.2.10 Clean the foot switch...................................................................... 214
5.3 Instruments and instrument hoses............................................................... 215
5.3.1 Rinse water lines............................................................................ 215
5.3.2 Purge water lines (purge function) ................................................. 215
5.3.3 Automatically purge water lines (autopurge function) .................... 218
5.3.4 Care for, disinfect and sterilize the treatment instruments............. 224
5.3.4.1 Treatment instruments.................................................. 224
5.3.4.2 Clean and disinfect/sterilize the components of the
ApexLocator ................................................................. 224
5.3.4.3 Disinfecting/sterilizing Mini L.E.D. curing light .............. 225

63 22 726 D3561
8 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona Table of contents
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.3.4.4 Cleaning/disinfecting the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral

camera.......................................................................... 226
5.3.4.5 Check the flow rate on the Sprayvit M multifunctional
syringe .......................................................................... 226
5.3.5 Changing the cotton wool roll on the high-speed handpiece hose
and oil collector .............................................................................. 227
5.4 Vacuum system ........................................................................................... 229
5.4.1 Cleaning the suction hoses............................................................ 229
5.4.2 Cleaning vacuum system using cleaning adapter in the cuspidor
or via external container................................................................. 231
5.4.2.1 Cleaning vacuum system using cleaning adapter in
the cuspidor .................................................................. 231
5.4.2.2 Cleaning the suction system via external container ..... 232
5.4.3 Sterilize and disinfect the suction handpieces ............................... 233
5.4.4 Cleaning and disinfecting the suction hoses.................................. 234
5.4.5 Thermodisinfecting suction hoses.................................................. 235
5.5 Components of the water unit ...................................................................... 236
5.5.1 Clean the gold trap......................................................................... 236
5.5.2 Clean/disinfect the cuspidor........................................................... 237
5.5.3 Cleaning the outlet lines of the cuspidor ........................................ 238
5.5.4 Refill disinfectant for the water lines .............................................. 239
5.5.5 Change the water and air filters ..................................................... 240
5.5.6 Changing the amalgam rotor ......................................................... 241
5.5.7 Check the message system of the amalgam separator................. 244
5.5.8 Emptying the sediment container................................................... 245
5.5.9 Cleaning the filter insert of the standard wet suction ..................... 247
5.6 Sanitation ..................................................................................................... 249
5.6.1 Interactively guided sanitation of the treatment center .................. 249
5.6.2 Display sanitation report ................................................................ 256
5.6.3 Sanitizing the treatment center manually....................................... 257
5.6.4 Biofilm removal by the service technician ...................................... 261
5.7 Foot control and connection box.................................................................. 262
5.7.1 Changing the battery of the wireless foot control........................... 262
5.7.2 Changing the fuse of the external device connection .................... 264

6 Maintenance by the service engineer ..................................................................... 265

6.1 Inspection and maintenance ........................................................................ 265
6.2 Safety checks............................................................................................... 265
6.3 Maintenance Manual.................................................................................... 266

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 9
Table of contents Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

7 Malfunctions............................................................................................................ 267
7.1 Error messages............................................................................................ 267
7.2 Remote diagnosis ........................................................................................ 269

8 Spare parts and consumables ................................................................................ 270

9 Disposal .................................................................................................................. 272

10 Overview of all function keys .................................................................................. 274

Index ....................................................................................................................... 292

63 22 726 D3561
10 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 1 General information
Operating Instructions Sinius

1 General information

1.1 Dear Customer,

We are pleased that you have equipped your practice with the Dentsply
Sirona Sinius treatment center.
Our aim is to identify our customers' needs early and create innovative
solutions. Together with your trade partner, you have configured the
treatment center most suitable for you. The new hub of your treatment
room has been tailored to your personal needs.
You have chosen a Sinius treatment center that features easy
operation, innovative comfort, and high-quality design. With Sinius, we
have enhanced proven functions and turned customer requirements into
innovations. The EasyTouch user interface makes treatment even more
pleasant and efficient.
These operating instructions are designed to assist you prior to initial
use and whenever you require information later on.
We wish you a great deal of success and pleasure with Sinius.
Your Sinius team

1.2 Contact information

Customer service center For technical questions, use the contact form on the internet at the
following address:
http://srvcontact.sirona.com
Manufacturer's address Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Fabrikstrasse 31
64625 Bensheim
Germany
Tel.: +49 (0) 6251/16-0
Fax: +49 (0) 6251/16-2591
e-Mail: [email protected]
www.dentsplysirona.com

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 11
1 General information Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

1.3 Notes on these Operating Instructions

1.3.1 General information on the operating Instructions
Observe the Operating Instructions Please familiarize yourself with the unit by reading through these
Operating Instructions before putting it into operation. It is essential that
you comply with the specified warning and safety information.
Tip: A quick guide containing brief operating instructions has been
provided to help you look up functions quickly.
Always keep the operating instructions handy in case you or another
user require(s) information at a later point in time. Save the operating
instructions on the PC or print them out.
If you sell the unit, make sure that the operating instructions are
included with it either as a hard copy or on an electronic storage device
so that the new owner can familiarize himself with its functions and the
specified warning and safety information.
Online portal for technical documents We have set up an online portal for the Technical Documents at http://
www.dentsplysirona.com/manuals. There, you can download these
operating instructions and further documents. Please complete the
online form if you would like a hard copy of a particular document. We
will then be happy to send you a printed copy free of charge.
Help If you require additional help despite having thoroughly studied the
Operating Instructions, please contact your dental depot.

1.3.2 Scope of these Operating Instructions

System versions These operating instructions apply to the following treatment centers:
● Sinius (Dentist element with sliding track)
● Sinius CS (Dentist element with swivel arms)
● Sinius TS (Dentist element as OTP system)
Equipment options This document describes the full version of your system. It may
therefore cover components that are not included in the system you
purchased.
Firmware This document is valid for systems with software versions from:
Version 2.2
The current software version is displayed in the setup, see "Opening
Setup programs" [→ 190].

63 22 726 D3561
12 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 1 General information
Operating Instructions Sinius

1.4 Other valid documents

Your treatment center can be equipped with additional components that
are described in separate operating instructions. The instructions as
well as all warning and safety information they contain must also be
followed.
There are separate operating instructions for each of the following
Dentsply Sirona products:
● Treatment instruments and accessories
● LEDview or LEDview Plus operating light
● 22" monitor DC model 2017
● Heliodent Plus X-ray tube assembly
● Hugo, Carl, and Paul dental working stools
The document “Installation Requirements” is also available. It contains
detailed technical specifications, dimension sheets, and information
about operating the treatment center with regard to electromagnetic
compatibility.

1.5 Warranty and liability

Maintenance Maintenance must be performed at scheduled intervals to ensure the
operational and functional reliability of your product and to protect the
safety and health of patients, users and other persons. For more
information, please refer to "Maintenance by the service
engineer" [→ 265].
The owner is responsible for making sure that all maintenance activities
are performed.
As manufacturers of medical electrical equipment, we can assume
responsibility for the safety properties of the unit only if maintenance
and repairs on the unit are performed either by us or by agencies which
we have expressly authorized and if components of the unit are
replaced by original spare parts in case of failure.
Exclusion of liability In the event that the system owner fails to fulfill its obligation to perform
maintenance activities or ignores error messages, Dentsply Sirona or
your authorized dealer cannot assume any liability for any damage thus
incurred.

1.6 Intended use

This dental treatment center is intended for use on humans in the area
of dentistry and may only be used by trained dental professionals.
Contraindications for the use of the treatment center, if any, are listed in
the individual chapters, e.g. Treatment instruments.
This unit is not intended for operation in areas subject to explosion
hazards.
This unit is permanently installed. Operation is not permitted in mobile
vehicles.
Intended use also includes compliance with these operating
instructions.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 13
1 General information Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

1.7 Formats and symbols used

The formats and symbols used in this document have the following
meaning:

Prerequisite Prompts you to do something.

1. First action step
2. Second action step
or
➢ Alternative action
Result
➢ Individual action step
See “Formats and symbols Identifies a reference to another text
used [→ 14]” passage and specifies its page num-
ber.
● List Designates a list.
“Command / menu item” Indicates commands, menu items or
quotations.

63 22 726 D3561
14 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 2 Safety instructions
Operating Instructions Sinius

2 Safety instructions

2.1 Identification of the danger levels

To prevent personal injury and material damage, please observe the
warning and safety information provided in these operating instructions.
Such information is highlighted as follows:

DANGER
An imminent danger that could result in serious bodily injury or death.

WARNING
A possibly dangerous situation that could result in serious bodily
injury or death.

CAUTION
A possibly dangerous situation that could result in slight bodily injury.

NOTICE
A possibly harmful situation which could lead to damage of the
product or an object in its environment.

IMPORTANT
Application instructions and other important information.

Tip: Information for simplifying work.

2.2 Information on the unit

Accompanying documents This symbol can be found next to the rating plate on the unit.
Meaning: Observe the Operating Instructions when operating the unit.

This symbol can be found on the rating plate on the unit.

Meaning: The accompanying documents are available on the
manufacturer's homepage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Connector pins or sockets bearing ESD warning labels must not be
touched or interconnected without ESD protective measures. See also
"Electrostatic discharge" [→ 21] and "Electromagnetic
compatibility" [→ 20].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 15
2 Safety instructions Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

2.3 On-site installation

The on-site installation must have been performed according to our
requirements. The details are described in the document "Installation
Requirements".

2.4 Installation of the treatment center

Installation must be carried out by authorized personnel according to
the installation instructions.

2.5 Media quality

The air and water supplies must meet the requirements specified in the
installation requirements.
To ensure compliance with the medical and national legal requirements
for water from treatment centers, Dental Sirona recommends equipping
the treatment center with a disinfection system. If you decide to operate
the treatment center without a disinfection system, you must make
alternative arrangements to ensure good water quality.
As the owner of the treatment center, you are generally responsible for
the water quality.
The bacterial count must comply with the national regulations for
drinking water and must not exceed 500 CFU/ml under any
circumstances (CFU: colony forming unit).
If the bacterial count is too high, the building water system must be
checked and the cause of contamination eliminated. Alternatively, a
self-sufficient water supply can also be installed. In addition, if the
treatment center is equipped with a disinfection system, the empty
disinfectant tank can be used as a water container.
Before installation of the treatment center, an acceptable
microbiological water quality for the domestic water supply must be
ensured and documented in the form of the bacterial count. Sampling
and the bacterial count must be performed by a competent laboratory.
Test the water quality from the treatment center at regular intervals and
after it has not been used for >1 week, see "Microbiological water
test" [→ 203]. Please contact your specialized dealer or your dental
association for the respective national requirements and measures.
Where necessary, you must make alternative arrangements to ensure
good water quality if you decide to operate the treatment center without
a disinfection system.

WARNING
Highly immunosuppressed patients or patients with specific
pulmonary diseases should not come in contact with the water of the
treatment unit . The use of sterile solutions is recommended.

63 22 726 D3561
16 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 2 Safety instructions
Operating Instructions Sinius

2.6 Connection to the public drinking water system

Treatment center isolated from the public drinking water supply
The treatment center, if it is equipped with a disinfection system,
complies with the requirements of EN 1717 (free discharge with an
isolation distance ≥ 20 mm) and the DVGW German Gas and Water
Association). It is intrinsically safe according to the W540 worksheet
and thus also complies with W270 and KTW (Guideline on the use of
plastics in contact with drinking water). It can be connected directly to
the public drinking water system.
The treatment center then has the "DVGW" label next to the rating
plate.

Treatment center not isolated from the public drinking water supply
If compliance with EN 1717 is required in the country, the respective
measures for the protection of public drinking water must be taken
outside the treatment center.
This applies to models without a disinfection system.
The treatment center then does not have the "DVGW" label.

Please comply with the national requirements with regard to connecting

treatment centers to the public drinking water system.

2.7 Maintenance and repair

Authorized technical personnel and spare As manufacturers of dental medical units and in the interest of the
parts operational safety of your system, we stress the importance of having
maintenance and repair of this unit performed only by ourselves or by
agencies expressly authorized by us. Furthermore, faulty components
must always be replaced with original spare parts.
We suggest that you request a certificate showing the nature and extent
of the work performed from those who carry out such work; it must
contain any changes in rated parameters or working ranges (if
applicable), as well as the date, the name of the company and a
signature.
Maintenance intervals Despite the outstanding quality of your treatment center and regular
care by the practice team, in the interest of operational safety, it is
essential to have preventive maintenance performed at scheduled
intervals.
In order to ensure the operational safety and reliability of your treatment
center and to avoid damage due to natural wear, as the system owner
you must have your system checked regularly by an authorized service
technician from your dental depot. Furthermore, safety checks must be
performed. Please contact your dental depot to obtain a maintenance
offer. For more information, please refer to "Maintenance by the service
engineer" [→ 265].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 17
2 Safety instructions Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

2.8 Trouble-free operation

Use of this unit is permissible only if it works properly without
malfunctions. If trouble-free operation cannot be ensured, the unit must
be taken out of service, checked by authorized technicians for
malfunctions and, if necessary, repaired or replaced.

2.9 Vacuum system

The suction removal of aluminum and other metal oxides from blasting
devices via the amalgam separator and the automatic separator
installed in the treatment center is prohibited! This would result in
extreme wear and clogging of the vacuum and drain lines.
A separate vacuum system must be used in connection with metal
oxide blasting devices. Treatment centers equipped with a central
standard wet suction are generally suitable for suction removal of the
above material. However, make sure to observe the instructions
provided by the manufacturer of your vacuum system.
No restrictions apply when using salt blasting devices in connection with
Dentsply Sirona treatment centers. However, in such cases, make sure
that the system is subsequently flushed with an adequate amount of
water.

2.10 Patient chair

max. load of chair Please observe the maximum load capacity of 165 kg (363.8 lbs) for the
165 kg
patient chair.
Intermittent operation
of chair motors:
The permissible maximum load capacity is indicated on a plate next to
2 min ON/18 min OFF the rating plate of the treatment center.
The weight distribution complies with ISO 6875. The mechanical
stability is tested with a multiple safety factor acc. to IEC 60601-1.
The maximum permissible weight of accessories mounted on the
patient chair is 5 kg (11 lbs)
The patient’s arms and legs must be resting on the upholstery of the
ü û chair.

2.11 Intermittent operation

max. load of chair The motors of the treatment center and of the treatment instruments are
165 kg
designed for intermittent operation corresponding to the dental mode of
treatment.
Intermittent operation
of chair motors:
2 min ON/18 min OFF Drive motors for patient chair and backrest: max. 10% duty cycle, (max.
2 min "ON" / 18 min "OFF")

63 22 726 D3561
18 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 2 Safety instructions
Operating Instructions Sinius

2.12 Ventilation slots

Under no circumstances may the ventilation slots on the unit be
covered, since otherwise the air circulation will be obstructed. This can
cause the unit to overheat.
Do not spray liquids such as disinfectants into the ventilation slots. This
may lead to malfunctions. Only wipe to disinfect these areas.

2.13 Touchscreen
The monitor of the dentist element is equipped with touch-sensitive
control technology.
The touchscreen must not be operated with pointed objects such as
ball-point pens, pencils, etc. Such objects could damage or scratch its
surface. Always operate the touchscreen by pressing it gently with your
fingertip.

2.14 Care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents

Unsuitable care and cleaning agents or disinfectants may corrode the
surface of the unit or impair its functioning.
Therefore, use only care and cleaning agents and disinfectants which
have been approved by the manufacturer. For more information, see
the chapter "Care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents" [→ 203].

2.15 Care and cleaning instructions for the practice

team
Inappropriate care and cleaning of the device can result in failure or
damage. Technical personnel must be trained in the handling of medical
devices.

2.16 Modifications and extensions of the system

Modifications to this device which might affect the safety of the operator,
patient, or other persons are prohibited by law.
For reasons of product safety, this product may be operated only with
original Dentsply Sirona accessories or third-party accessories
approved by Dentsply Sirona. The user assumes the risk of using non-
approved accessories.
If any devices not approved by Dentsply Sirona are connected, they
must comply with the applicable standards, e.g.:
● IEC 60950-1 or IEC 62368-1 for information technology equipment,
(e.g. PC, Ethernet switch, Ethernet hub, Ethernet convertor, USB

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 19
2 Safety instructions Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

repeater, Ethernet router, USB switch, HDMI repeater/extender,

audio input, display port repeater/extender, etc.), and
● IEC 60601-1 for medical electrical equipment.
The treatment center monitor must comply with the requirements of
IEC 60950-1 or IEC 62368-1.
The loudspeaker port of the monitor may be connected only to a device
that complies with IEC 60950-1, IEC 62368-1 (e.g., PC) or IEC
60601-1.Under no circumstances should it be connected e.g., to a
stereo system.
If a system is created during the installation process, the requirements
of IEC 60601-1, 3rd edition, must be complied with. The person
assembling the system assumes responsibility for ensuring conformity,
e.g. acc. to Directive 93/42/EEC.

2.17 Electromagnetic compatibility

Medical electrical equipment is subject to special precautionary
measures with regard to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). They
must be installed and operated as specified in the document
“Installation Requirements”.
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment may interfere with
medical electrical equipment. Therefore, use of such devices (e.g.
cellular phones) in the practice or hospital environments must be
prohibited.

Operating an HF surgical device

Treatment with HF surgical devices creates strong electromagnetic
fields, which may affect other electronic devices. Do not place external
HF surgical devices on the work surfaces of the treatment center and do
not guide the HF handpiece cable over it. Electromagnetic interference
can often be reduced by operating the external HF surgical device with
a neutral electrode.

Sivision Digital and USB interface

The presence of electromagnetic interference in the vicinity of the
treatment center may cause image degradation and interruptions in the
data transmission via the USB interface to the PC. In such cases,
repeat the image recording or other operations.
In the event of strong interference, it may be necessary to restart the
PC and treatment center. Do not use the PC for controlling other
devices that perform essential tasks.

Wireless foot control

The wireless foot control may interfere with other devices in the same
frequency band (2.4 GHz) or receive interfering signals from them. The
safe condition of the treatment center is guaranteed even if the wireless
transmission is compromised.

63 22 726 D3561
20 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 2 Safety instructions
Operating Instructions Sinius

2.18 Electrostatic discharge

Protective measures
Electrostatic discharge (abbreviated: ESD – ElectroStatic Discharge)
Electrostatic discharge from people can damage electronic components
when the components are touched. Damaged components usually have
to be replaced. Repairs must be performed by qualified personnel.
Measures to protect against ESD include:
● Procedures to avoid electrostatic charging via
– air conditioning
– air humidification
– conductive floor coverings
– non-synthetic clothing
● discharging the electrostatic charges from your own body through
contact with
– a metallic unit casing
– a larger metallic object
– any other metal part grounded with the protective earth
Endangered regions are indicated on the unit by the ESD warning label:
We recommend that all persons working with this system are made
aware of the significance of the ESD warning label. A training course
should also be held to inform users about the physics of electrostatic
charges.

Physics of electrostatic charges

An electrostatic discharge requires prior electrostatic charging.
There is a danger of electrostatic charges building up whenever two
bodies rub against each other, e.g. when:
● walking (soles of shoes against the floor) or
● moving (chair casters against floor).
The amount of charge depends on several factors: The charge is:
● higher at low air humidity than at high air humidity, and
● higher with synthetic materials than with natural materials (clothing,
floor coverings).
The following rule of thumb can be applied to assess the transient
voltages resulting from an electrostatic discharge.
An electrostatic discharge is:
● perceptible at 3,000 V or higher
● audible at 5,000 V or higher (cracking, crackling)
● visible at 10,000 V or higher (arc-over)
The transient currents resulting from these discharges have a
magnitude of over 10 amps. They are not hazardous for humans
because they last for only several nanoseconds.
Tip: 1 nanosecond = 1/1,000,000,000 second = 1 billionth of a second
Voltage differentials exceeding 30,000 volts per centimeter may lead to
a charge transfer (electrostatic discharge, lightning, arc-over).

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 21
2 Safety instructions Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Integrated circuits (logical circuits and microprocessors) are used in

order to implement a wide variety of functions in a device. The circuits
must be miniaturized to a very high degree in order to include as many
functions as possible on these chips. This leads to structure thicknesses
as low as a few ten thousandths of a millimeter. Integrated circuits that
are connected to wires leading externally are therefore particularly at
risk from electrostatic discharge.
Even voltages that are imperceptible to the user can cause breakdown
of the structures, thus leading to a discharge current that melts the chip
in the affected areas. Damage to individual integrated circuits may
cause malfunction or failure of the unit.

2.19 Dismantling/Installation
When dismantling and reinstalling the unit, proceed according to the
installation instructions for new installation in order to guarantee its
proper functioning and stability.

63 22 726 D3561
22 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

3 Unit description

3.1 Standards/Approvals
The Sinius treatment center complies with the following standards,
among others:
● IEC 60601-1 (electrical and mechanical safety plus software
reliability)
● IEC 60601-1-2 (electromagnetic compatibility)
● IEC 60601-1-6 / IEC 62366 (usability)
● IEC 62304 (software process)
● ISO 6875 (patient chair)
● ISO 7494-1 (dental treatment devices)
● ISO 7494-2 (dental treatment devices, water and air supply)
● ISO 9680 (operating light)
● ISO 11143 (amalgam separator), see also below
(provided amalgam separator option is available)
● EN 1717 (connection to the drinking water system), see also below
and chapter "Connection to the public drinking water supply" [→ 17]

Original language of this document: German

This product bears the CE marking in accordance with the provisions of

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of June 14, 1993 concerning medical
devices.
0123
The treatment center complies with the requirements of the RoHS
Directive 2011/65/EU.

The treatment center meets the requirements of CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.

60601-1 And AAMI/ANSI ES 60601-1.

SIRONA
Dental Systems The amalgam separator achieves a separation efficiency of >95%. The
GmbH
64625 Bensheim
Fabrikstrasse 31 unit thus fulfills the requirements of ISO 11143.
Z-64.1-14
Separating procedure type 1: Centrifuge system
The amalgam separator is approved by the German institute for building
technology (DIBt) and AFNOR (France).

When equipped with a disinfection system, the treatment center

complies with the technical rules and requirements on safety and
hygiene for connection to the public drinking water supply. The unit is
certified according to the requirements of the German Technical and
Scientific Association for Gas and Water (DVGW). It is intrinsically safe
in accordance with worksheet W540. The unit thus also meets the

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 23
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

requirements of standard EN 1717; see also the chapter entitled

"Connection to the public drinking water system" [→ 17].

This unit meets the requirements of BELGAQUA and may therefore be

connected to the public drinking water supply in Belgium.

TM
This unit meets the requirements of ATS and may therefore be
connected to the public drinking water supply in Australia.

WaterMark
ATS 5200.104
Certificate No. 21208

The wireless modules in the wireless foot control and in the treatment
center meet the requirements of the R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC.
Standards:
until April 2017 since April 2017 ● EN 60950-1
● EN 301489-1, EN 301489-17, EN 300328

The modules meet the requirements of the Federal Communications

Commission (Part 15 of the FCC Rules).
FCC ID: SIFNANOLOCAVR0108 (until April 2017) or
FCC ID: RFRMS (starting April 2017)

Industry Canada The modules meet the requirements of Industry Canada (RSS210).
IC: 7654A-nanoLOCAVR (until April 2017) or
IC: 4957A-MS (starting April 2017)

The current approvals of the wireless foot control are listed on the rating
label on the underside of the wireless foot control.

63 22 726 D3561
24 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.2 Technical data

Model designation: Sinius / Sinius CS / Sinius TS
Power connection: 100 – 240 V AC ± 10%
50/60 Hz
Rated current: 2.2 A at 240 V
4.35 A at 115 V
5.0 A at 100 V
also max. 6 A for external devices
Type of ground connection: TN-C-S system or TN-S system (acc.
to IEC 60364-1)
Overvoltage category: 2 acc. to IEC 60664-1
Average power consump- 0.25 kW
tion (for dimensioning an air
conditioning system):
Power consumption in the 3 W (without internal mini PC)
Standby mode:
Main building fuse: Type B automatic circuit breaker
100 - 115 VAC: 20 A medium-blow
220 – 240 V AC: 16 A medium-blow

Protection class: Class Idevice

Device class in accordance Class IIa equipment
with Directive 93/42/EEC:
Degree of protection
against electrical shock:
Type B applied parts
External intraoral camera SiroCam AF /
AF+. These are:

Applied part type BF

Degree of protection Ordinary equipment (without protection
against ingress of water: against ingress of water)
The foot switch has an IPX1 degree of
protection against liquids (drip-proof).

Mode of operation Continuous operation with intermittent

loading corresponding to the dental
mode of working. [→ 18]
Drive motors for chair operation:
intermittent use, max. 2 minutes on and
18 minutes off
Permanently connected unit. Operation
is not permitted in mobile vehicles.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 25
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

+70 95 1060
Transport and storage con- Temperature: -40°C – +70°C
ditions: (-40°F – 158°F)
-40 10 500
Relative humidity: 10% – 95%
Air pressure: 500 hPa – 1060 hPa
+40 85 1060
Operating conditions: Ambient temperature: 10°C – 40°C
(50°F – 104°F)
+10 30 700
Relative humidity: 30% – 85%
without condensation
Air pressure: 700 hPa – 1060 hPa
Installation location: ≤ 3000 m above sea level
This treatment center is not suitable for
operation in areas subject to explosion
hazards.
Pollution degree: 2 acc. to IEC 60664-1

Tests/Approvals: See "Standards/Approvals“ [→ 23].

Date of manufacture:

(on the rating plate)

USB port: corresponds to USB 2.0 standard

63 22 726 D3561
26 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

Foot switch wireless interface

The wireless foot control can be equipped with various wireless
modules. A label with the name of the wireless module used is on the
underside of the foot control.
Wireless module until April 2017:

Model designation: nanoLOC AVR

Frequency: 2.4 GHz – 2.4835 GHz (ISM band)
Transmitting power: < 2 mW (short-range device)
Modulation type: MDMA
Range: approx. 10 m
Approval: See "Standards/Approvals“ [→ 23].

Wireless module starting April 2017

Model designation: BlueMod+S

Frequency: 2.4 GHz – 2.480 GHz
Transmitting power: < 2 mW (short-range device)
Modulation type: GFSK
Range: approx. 10 m
Approval: See "Standards/Approvals“ [→ 23].

IMPORTANT
Minimum requirements for the PC
See document "Installation instructions and system requirements for
PC configuration," (REF 61 94 075) Sivision Digital.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 27
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.3 System overview

The Sinius, Sinius CS and Sinius TS treatment centers comprise the
following main components:

Sinius treatment center (sliding track device)

A Patient chair [→ 31]

B Motor-driven headrest [→ 32] (shown here) or Double articu-
lating headrest [→ 33]
C Foot control [→ 34] (with cable or wireless link)
D Sinius dentist element on the sliding track [→ 35]
E Assistant element [→ 44]
F Water unit [→ 47]
G External device connection [→ 49] and power switch

63 22 726 D3561
28 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

Sinius CS treatment center (swivel arm unit)

A Patient chair [→ 31]

B Motor-driven headrest [→ 32] (shown here) or Double articu-
lating headrest [→ 33]
C Foot control [→ 34] (with cable or wireless link)
D Sinius CS dentist elementwith swivel arms [→ 35]
E Assistant element [→ 44]
F Water unit [→ 47]
G External device connection [→ 49] and power switch

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 29
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Sinius TS treatment center (OTP unit)

A Patient chair [→ 31]

B Motor-driven headrest [→ 32] (shown here) or Double articu-
lating headrest [→ 33]
C Foot control [→ 34] (with cable or wireless link)
D Sinius TS dentist element as OTP system [→ 35]
E Assistant element [→ 44]
F Water unit [→ 47]
G External device connection [→ 49] and power switch

63 22 726 D3561
30 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.4 Patient chair

The patient chair features a variety of adjustment options to optimally
adapt the patient's position for the given treatment.

A Motor-driven headrest (shown here) or articulating headrest

B Backrest
C Seat
D Armrest
E Footrest
F Chair base
G Flange on the Sinius dentist element sliding track
H 4-way foot switch
I Foot control cable port
J Rotary joint for assistant element

The patient chair can come with lounge upholstery featuring enhanced
comfort and double seams. The lounge upholstery has no footrest; the
surface is padded throughout.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 31
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.5 Headrest
3.5.1 Motor-driven headrest
The headrest allows for the following adjustment options:
● Motor-driven extension/retraction to adapt to the patient's stature
● Motor-driven tilting for maxillary/mandibular treatment
● Manual tilting via quick mechanical adjustment
● Shifting/rotation of the head support via the magnetic holder

A Removable head pad with magnetic holder

B Quick mechanical adjustment of headrest tilt
C Upper 4-way switch for headrest functions
D Lower 4-way switch for chair functions

For details, see "Adjusting the motor-driven headrest" [→ 69].

63 22 726 D3561
32 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.5.2 Double-jointed head support

The double articulating headrest is equipped with two rotary joints. They
allow the head inclination to be manually adjusted over a wide range for
maxillary/mandibular treatment. The headrest extension can be pushed
in or pulled out to manually adjust it to the height of the patient.

A Head pad
B Rotary joints
C Unlock button (one-sided)
D Support bar for adjustment to patient height

For details, see "Adjusting the double articulating headrest." [→ 71]

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 33
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.6 Foot control

The foot control enables hand-free control of the treatment instruments.
Via the integrated cursor control, virtually all functions of the treatment
center can be controlled via the foot control as an alternative to hand
control.

A B C D E F

A Foot pedal as speed foot control or direct starter

B Left button (program key S or spray)
C 4-way foot control plate for cursor control
D Right button (program key 0 or chip blower)
E Positioning bar
F Connecting cable

The foot control is also available with wireless transmission. The

connecting cable has been omitted for the wireless foot control. The
power supply is provided by a battery, see "Changing the battery of the
wireless foot control" [→ 262].

63 22 726 D3561
34 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.7 Dentist element

All functions of the treatment center can be controlled via the
EasyTouch control panel on the dentist element. The treatment center
can be fitted with following dentist elements:
System versions These operating instructions apply to the following treatment centers:
● Sinius (Dentist element with sliding track)
● Sinius CS (Dentist element with swivel arms)
● Sinius TS (Dentist element as OTP system)

Sinius dentist element

The dentist element can be moved the entire length of the patient chair
along the sliding track. In combination with the rotary joints on the
support arm, the dentist element can be perfectly adjusted to suit any
treatment.
With this dentist element, instruments are placed in the instrument
holders in an upright position. The instrument hoses hang freely under
the dentist element.

A Removable instrument holder (max. 5 instruments)

B Removable handles (left/right)
C Program change keys
D Touchscreen for display and operation
E Fixed keys
F Main switch
G Skid-proof silicone mat
H Removable NaCI bottle holder

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 35
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

I Additional holder for intraoral camera

J Support arm, height adjustable by service engineer
K Slide of sliding track

63 22 726 D3561
36 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

Sinius CS dentist element

The Sinius CS dentist element is attached to the water unit with a
flexible support arm. The dentist element is held in place at the adjusted
height with a pneumatic locking brake in the support arm. To release
the brake simply touch one of the two handles.
With this dentist element, instruments are placed in the instrument
holders horizontally and facing downwards. The instrument hoses are
placed above the dentist element over the swivel arm.

A Removable instrument holder (max. 5 instruments)

B Tray on the dentist element
C Handles (left/right) with integrated switch for releasing the
support arm brake
D Main switch
E Fixed keys
F Program change keys
G Touchscreen for display and operation
H Removable NaCI bottle holder
I Swivel arms
J Support arm

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 37
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Sinius TS dentist element

The Sinius TS dentist element is attached to the water unit with a
flexible support arm. The dentist element is held in place at the adjusted
height with a pneumatic locking brake in the support arm. To release
the brake simply touch one of the two handles in the upper area.
With this dentist element, instruments are placed in the instrument
holders in an upright position. The instrument hoses hang freely under
the dentist element.

A Removable instrument holder (max. 5 instruments)

B Handles (left/right) with integrated switch for releasing the
support arm brake
C Tray on the dentist element
D Locknut for setting tray height
E Program change keys
F Touchscreen for display and operation

63 22 726 D3561
38 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

G Fixed keys
H Main switch
I Skid-proof silicone mat
J Removable NaCI bottle holder
K Additional holder for intraoral camera
L Support arm

3.7.1 Instrument positions

The following instrument positions are available:
2
Holder 1 Holder 2 Holder 3 Holder 4 Holder 5 Additional holder
1
Sprayvit M Motor: Motor: Motor: SiroSonic TL scaler SiroCam AF or
multifunctional • BL • BL • BL SiroCam AF+intraoral
syringe • BL ISO E • BL ISO E • BL ISO E camera
• BL ISO C • BL ISO C • BL ISO C
• BL Implant • BL Implant • BL Implant
highspeed highspeed highspeed SiroCam AF or
handpiece handpiece handpiece SiroCam AF+intraoral
camera
1
SiroSonic TL
scaler
1
A maximum of one SiroSonic TL scaler can be connected.
2
Only the Sinius and Sinius TS dentist elements can be equipped with
an additional holder.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 39
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.7.2 EasyTouch user interface

User interface of the Sinius TS and Sinius dentist element

User interface of the Sinius CS dentist element

A Fixed keys for opening the Start, Instrument or Sivision

screen (membrane keyboard)
B Touchscreen (pressure-sensitive user interface)
C Fixed keys (membrane keyboard)
D Main switch

63 22 726 D3561
40 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.7.3 Touchscreen
The touchscreen displays virtual function keys according to the program
selected. A list of all function keys is provided in the Appendix of this
document, see "Overview of all function keys" [→ 274]..
Some programs are divided into main programs and sub-screens. The
main programs are briefly introduced below:
Start program The Start program can be displayed in the Standard Start program or
EasyMode Start program operating mode. For further details on both
operating modes, see "Start program operating modes" [→ 55].

Standard Start program (left) and EasyMode Start program (right)

Instrument program The Standard Start program operating mode displays the instrument
program for the removed instrument. The instrument programs can be
displayed either with the fixed quick adjustment keys, programmable
quick adjustment keys, or via the function levels. For details, see "Quick
setting keys and function levels." [→ 89]

Motor screen with fixed quick setting keys (left), programmable quick setting
keys (center) and function levels (right)
Sivision program The Sivision program enables certain computer programs running on
the PC to be controlled directly from the treatment center. For details,
see "Operation with a PC" [→ 183].

Sivision program for Sidexis 4 (left) and Sidexis XG (right)

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 41
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.7.4 Fixed keys on the dentist element

For a more detailed description of the fixed key functions, see "Fixed
keys on the dentist element" [→ 84].
Main switch
Switches the treatment center on/off.
To switch off the treatment center, press and hold the key until an
acoustic signal sounds. Then release the key.

IMPORTANT
Power switch
The treatment center also features a power switch on the base of the
chair that separates the treatment center from the power supply, see
"Switching the treatment center on/off" [→ 51].

Program change keys

The program change keys allow the user to switch between the main
programs Start program, Instrument program and Sivision program in
the Standard Start program operating mode.
In the EasyMode Start program operating mode, the program change
keys Chair and Instrument can be used to switch to the relevant sub-
screens.

Timer function
Opens the Timer function screen where any of four preset timers can be
activated. The elapsed time is displayed in the status bar of the
touchscreen.
If the Timer function key is pressed (> 2 s), the settings dialog appears.
Shock positioning
Immediately moves the patient chair to a position for shock positioning
of the patient.
Operating light
Switches the operating light on/off.
If the Operating light key is pressed for > 2 s, the settings screen
appears.
Composite function
Switches the composite function for the operating light on/off.
This function is used to prevent premature curing of composite
materials.
Tumbler filling
Starts or stops the tumbler filling function.
When the Tumbler filling key is pressed (> 2 s), the filling time and
water heating settings screen appears.

63 22 726 D3561
42 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

Flushing
Starts or stops cuspidor flushing.
When the Flushing key is pressed (> 2 s), the Flushing Time settings
screen appears.
Freely selectable function
e.g., call key
Freely available relay 230 VAC, 6 A
(connected by the service engineer).
This function can be preset as a button or as a switch in the Setup
program.
Freely selectable function
Freely available relay 230 VAC, 6 A
(connected by the service engineer).
This function can be preset as a button or as a switch in the Setup
program.
Clean key
Pressing this key deactivates the complete user interface of the dentist
element with the exception of the main switch. Pressing it again > 3 s
reactivates the user interface.
This is used to make sure that no unwanted functions can be
accidentally triggered while cleaning the surface.
Setup key
Used for individual configuration of the treatment center by the user and
for reading out messages by the service engineer, see "Configuration of
the treatment center (Setup)" [→ 190].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 43
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.8 Assistant element

The functional scope of the assistant element is adapted to the dental
assistant's field of activity. It can, however, also be positioned so as to
enable unassisted treatment by the dentist.

A Holders 1 to 4 (from left to right) for instruments

B User interfaces (left/right)
C Removable handle
D Removable instrument holder
E Skid-proof silicone mat
F 3 rotary joints for flexible positioning
G Support arm

63 22 726 D3561
44 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.8.1 Instrument positions

The following instrument positions are available:

Holder 1 Holder 2 Holder 3 Holder 4

Mini LED curing light Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe Spray aspirator Saliva ejector
1
SiroCam AF or SiroCam AF+in-
traoral camera
Second spray aspirator or saliva
ejector for surgical suction
1
Only the Sinius CS and Sinius TS treatment centers can be equipped
with an intraoral camera on the assistant element.

3.8.2 User interface

There are three fixed keys located on each side, to the left and right of
the assistant element.

3.8.3 Fixed keys on the assistant element

For a more detailed description of the fixed key functions, see "Fixed
keys on the assistant element" [→ 148].
Tumbler filling
on/off

Flushing the cuspidor

on/off

Operating light / Composite function

Switches the operating light on, to the composite function, or off.
The composite function is used to prevent premature curing of
composite materials.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 45
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Chair program S
Mouth rinsing position with last-position memory function
(programmable)
Chair program 0
Entry/exit position (programmable)

Freely selectable function

The Hash key on the assistant element can be configured in the setup
program. The key allows the user to switch the X-ray viewer or the white
screen function on the Sivision monitor on or off or alternatively to
activate the bell or hash relay.
Freely available relay 230 VAC, 6 A
(connected by the service engineer)

63 22 726 D3561
46 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.9 Water unit

The water unit can be optionally equipped with a disinfection system. In
normal operation, this will automatically inoculate the water that comes
into contact with the patient (also called treatment water) with an agent
to disinfect the water lines. This leads to a decrease in bacterial growth
and to the reduction of the bacteria in the water. Furthermore, the
disinfection system can also be used to disinfect the water lines, see
"Interactive sanitization of the treatment center" [→ 249]. If you operate
the treatment center without the disinfection system, please refer to the
information in chapters "Media quality" [→ 16] and "Standards/
Approvals" [→ 23].

WARNING
Microorganisms can multiply in the water.
These microorganisms could increase the risk of damage to one’s
health.
➢ If the treatment center is equipped with a disinfection system,
never operate this to disinfect the water lines without disinfectant.

If the water unit is equipped with a disinfection system, it can be

switched to operation with a self-sufficient water supply. After switching,
distilled water must be mixed with the disinfectant for the water lines in
a ration of 100:1 (1 liter of water, 10 ml of disinfectant) and filled into the
storage tank of the water unit, see "Self-sufficient water supply" [→ 160].
The water unit can be optionally equipped with an automatic separator
(separation of suction air and waste water) combined with an amalgam
separator/sediment container or with a standard wet suction.
The top cover of the water unit has integrated cleaning adapters for
water-carrying instruments and suction hoses. The dentist element and
assistant element instruments can be inserted on both sides of the
water unit using these adapters. The openings are covered with flaps.
The adapters are needed for sanitizing the treatment center,
automatically purging the water lines (AutoPurge), and cleaning the
suction hoses.
The suction system can be cleaned by pumping water into a tank
behind the receptacle of the suction hoses and extracting it from there.
A cleaning agent is automatically added to the water if the dental
treatment center is equipped with the chemical suction hose cleaning
option. For more information, see "Cleaning the suction hoses" [→ 229].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 47
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

A Suction hose connection for assistant element

B Manually swiveling cuspidor
C Tumbler filler (depicted) or tumbler filler with automatic sensor
control for automatic filling of the tumbler
D Cover of the storage tank for the disinfectant used to disinfect
the water lines or for the stand-alone water supply
E Mount for support arm of operating light and monitor
F Mount for Sinius CS and Sinius TS dentist elements or tray
support arm
G Mount for water-carrying instruments of the dentist element
for conducting sanitization and autopurge
H Holder for the Sprayvit M of the assistant element and suction
hoses used for suction hose cleaning
I Maintenance flap for accessing the cleaning agent tank for
chemical suction hose cleaning, the flushing valve, the poten-
tiometer of the automatic sensor control, the amalgam sepa-
rator or sediment container, or filter insert for standard wet
suction

63 22 726 D3561
48 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 3 Unit description
Operating Instructions Sinius

3.10 External device connection

External medical accessories can be connected to the external device
connection. They must comply with the requirements of the 93/42/EEC
Medical Devices Directive.

NOTICE
If the treatment center is equipped with a disinfection system,
additional devices are exposed to a hydrogen peroxide concentration
((H2O2) of 0.1‰-0.2‰ at the external device connection.
If the additional devices are not suitable for the specified hydrogen
peroxide concentration, they may be damaged.
➢ Before connecting any additional devices, check to make sure
that they can be exposed to the above hydrogen peroxide
concentration. Contact the manufacturer of the relevant additional
device, if necessary.
➢ Prior to sanitation, additional devices must be unplugged from the
external device connection (water connection), see
"Sanitation" [→ 249].

IMPORTANT
DVGW approval
As the treatment center is designed according to EN 1717/DIN 1988
(DVGW requirements), the connected additional devices also fulfill
the requirements of the above standards when a disinfection system
is integrated, see "Standards and approvals" [→ 23].

IMPORTANT
Self-contained power supply
The IEC socket remains live when the power switch is turned off. The
connected external devices therefore must have their own power
switch.
However, the air and water connections are switched off.

A IEC outlet socket with power supply (max. 6 A)

B Fuse for IEC outlet socket (6.3 A slow-blow)
C Quick coupling for air
D Quick coupling for water

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 49
3 Unit description Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Pressure Flow rate

Water 2.2 ± 0.2 bar max. 300 ml/min
Air 4.4 ± 0.5 bar max. 70 Nl/min

IMPORTANT
The removal of media at the external device connection can reduce
the performance of integrated consumers, e.g., the filling quantity of
the tumbler or the highspeed handpiece.

63 22 726 D3561
50 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4 Operation

4.1 Starting up the treatment center

4.1.1 Initial startup
Sanitization must be performed prior to initial startup of your treatment
center.
For sanitizing, the water-carrying lines are filled with the undiluted
disinfectant to disinfect the water lines in order to reduce the bacterial
load in the water lines.
If the service engineer skipped the sanitation procedure after installing
your treatment center based on an agreement with you or sanitation has
not been performed for more than one week, please perform the
sanitation yourself. Refer to "Interactively guided sanitation of the
treatment center" [→ 249] for more information.
Sanitization takes at least 24 hours.

4.1.2 Switching the treatment center on/off

The treatment center is equipped with a standby system for enhanced
convenience when switching it on and off at the dentist element.
The treatment center thus features a power switch at the base of the
chair and a main switch on the dentist element.

4.1.2.1 Power switch

The power switch connects the treatment center to the power supply.
During longer periods of disuse, the treatment center should be
disconnected from the power supply. It then no longer consumes any
energy.
The power switch contains an automatic device fuse.

Connecting the treatment center to the power supply

ü The treatment center is installed by authorized technical personnel
according to the "Installation Instructions".
➢ Turn on power switch A.
Ä The treatment center is connected to the power supply.
A

Disconnecting the treatment center from the power supply

ü The treatment center is shut down, see "Switching the treatment
center off" (below).
➢ Turn power switch A off.
Ä The treatment center is disconnected from the power supply.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 51
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.1.2.2 Main switch

Switching the treatment center on

The main switch switches the treatment center from Standby mode to
operational readiness.
Following switch-on, the operating system is booted and an automatic
self-test is performed.
ü The power switch is turned on.
➢ Press the main switch on the dentist element.
Ä The LED of the main switch lights up on the dentist element.
Ä The treatment center powers up and establishes operational
readiness.
If the next maintenance call is due in less than 42 days or the
maintenance deadline has already been exceeded, a message appears
on the touchscreen. For more information, please refer to "Inspection
and maintenance" [→ 265].

Switching the treatment center to the Standby mode

On completing your work, you should switch the treatment center off
with the main switch on the dentist element both for safety reasons and
to reduce its power consumption. Pressing the main switch turns the air
and water supply as well as all electronic components off. Only the
Standby circuit is still supplied with voltage. If no other devices are
operating using the external device connection and the treatment center
is not equipped with an internal PC, the power consumption in Standby
mode is approximately 3 W.
➢ Press and hold the main switch on the dentist element until an
acoustic signal sounds. Then release the key.
Ä The treatment center then shuts down and switches itself to the
Standby mode.
Ä The LED of the main switch goes out on the dentist element.

63 22 726 D3561
52 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.1.3 Selecting a user profile

The treatment center allows up to six user profiles to be managed. This
allows multiple users to operate the treatment center without losing their
own individual settings for treatment and operation.
The following is stored in the user profiles:
● Programming of chair programs, see "Programming chair programs
and shock positioning" [→ 77]
● Configurations in the Setup programs, see "Configuration of the
treatment center (Setup)" [→ 190]
● Settings in the Instrument programs, see "Saving the instrument
settings"
● Configuration of the Sivision screen for PC control. The
configuration is saved in the PC application Siucom Plus installed
on the PC.
When the user profile is selected, the preset configurations and settings
become available.
If any of the user profiles are not required, their number can be limited,
see "Preselect the number of user profiles." [→ 193]
The user profiles A are distinguished with the letters A to F. The active
user profile, in this case B, is displayed in the status bar on the
touchscreen. If only one user profile is preselected, no display is shown.
The user profile used last is automatically loaded when the treatment
center is switched on.
ü The Start program is displayed on the touchscreen in the Standard
Start program (shown) or EasyMode Start program operating mode.
See "Start program operating modes" [→ 55].

➢ Select the desired user profile. Touch the User profile key as often
as necessary.
Ä The user profile that is displayed in the status bar is active.
Tip: The individual user settings can be read out by the service engineer
and transferred to other Sinius treatment centers. In this case, the user
profiles only have to be set once.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 53
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.2 Control concept of touchscreen

4.2.1 Virtual function keys
The touchscreen displays virtual function keys according to the program
selected. Required functions can be activated either by touching the
function keys with your finger or via the cursor with the foot switch.

Missing function keys

The adjacent illustration shows the touchscreen of a treatment center as
supplied to the customer and maximally equipped.
Function keys for functions which the treatment center does not include
are not displayed on the touchscreen. Moreover, the touchscreen user
interface may vary due to individual setup settings, see "Configuration
of the treatment center (Setup)" [→ 190].

In the Start program this includes function keys for the following
equipment options:
● Motor-driven headrest *
● X-ray viewer
● Endodontic treatment *
The keys marked with an asterisk (*) are not displayed in the EasyMode
Start program. However, the equipment options may be available, see
"Start program operating modes" [→ 55].
Furthermore, the screens may vary due to individual setup settings. The
following configurations may influence the Start program, see:
● "Preselecting the number of user profiles" [→ 193]
● "Setting the X-ray viewer key to white screen on Sivision
monitor" [→ 196]

Key background color

General functions are represented by gray keys. If the corresponding
function is switched on or active, the key is displayed in orange.

Keys that initiate a dialog change or lead to sub-screens and settings

dialogs are displayed blue.

As long as a key remains activated, its active state is marked by a bold

black border.

63 22 726 D3561
54 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.2.2 Start program operating modes

After the treatment center is switched on, the Start program
automatically appears.
The start program can run in two operating modes. In the Standard
Start program operating mode, the functions of the patient chair and
instruments are each shown on separate screens. In the EasyMode
Start program operating mode, the patient chair and instrument
functions that are most important for the treatment are shown together
on the same screen.
You can set the operating mode that you want to work with in the
treatment center setup, see "Select Start program operating
mode" [→ 193]. The operating modes are described in detail below:

Standard Start program

In the Standard Start program, only the chair program function keys
and, in the case of a motor-driven headrest, the Move headrest in/out
function keys are displayed on the screen. The full range of functions of
the treatment center can be used in this operating mode.

All other chair functions are listed separately on the Manual Chair
Adjustment screen. This can be accessed via the Manual Chair
Adjustment key.

Other general functions of the treatment center are listed in the Start
sub-screen. This can be accessed via the Sub-screen key.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 55
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

In the Standard Start program operating mode, the touchscreen will

automatically display the instrument program of the removed instrument
instead of the Start program. The toggles keys can be used to switch
between the main programs Start program and Instrument program. All
chair and instrument functions can be controlled via the touchscreen.
The speed and intensity can be set using static quick setting keys (with
the key values 0.09 or 0.2, 20, 40), the programmable quick setting
keys (with changeable key values) or via the function levels (E1, E2).
When the static quick setting keys are used, keys with three predefined
motor speed values (0.09 or 2, 20, 40 x 1000 rpm) or intensity values
(1%, 50%, 100 %) are displayed on the touchscreen.

Motor screen with fixed quick setting keys (left), programmable quick setting
keys (center) and function levels (right)

EasyMode Start program

The EasyMode Start program displays the function keys for the patient
chair programs and manual chair adjustment, as well as the quick
setting keys for adjusting the intensity of the instruments on the same
screen. The most important function keys for the treatment are therefore
always displayed on the touchscreen. There is no switching between
the Start and Instrument program. The operation of the Sinius dental
treatment center is thus similar to other Dentsply Sirona treatment
centers that are operated without a touchscreen.

63 22 726 D3561
56 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

When an instrument is removed, the EasyMode Start programdisplays

the chosen speed and intensity settings on the upper left of the
touchscreen. The value can be set using the quick setting keys (1%,
50%, 100%). The quick setting keys with the values for intensity are
also displayed on the motor screen and on the ultrasonic screen when
the endodontics function is activated. The relevant information is
displayed during the activation of a preselected coolant and for an
activated counterclockwise rotation.

In the EasyMode Start program operating mode, the Chair and

Instrument program change keys can be used to display the relevant
sub-screen. Other general functions of the treatment center are listed in
the Start sub-screen; other instrument functions are listed in the sub-
screen of the removed instrument.

The functional scope of the treatment center in the EasyMode Start

program operating mode has the following limitations:
● The motor-driven headrest can only be operated via the 4-way
switch
● The speed and intensity values of the instruments can be set only
using the quick setting keys (1%, 50%, 100%); programmable quick
setting keys and the function levels are not available
● the switch coolant on/off function, clockwise/counterclockwise
rotation function and the boost function for the ultrasonic handpiece
must be operated via foot control
● The instrument settings can only be saved with the SaveMode; the
Memory key is shown in the sub-screen of the instrument taken
● the hands-free touchscreen and fixed key operation via the 4-way
foot control plate of the foot control (cursor control) is not available
● the ApexLocator can only be used for manual measurements using
the file clamp in the Start sub-screen
● The treatment functions for implantology and endodontic treatments
are not available.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 57
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

The EasyMode Start program is intended for users who would like to
retain the familiar operating concept of other Dentsply Sirona treatment
centers and who can do without the functions listed above.

Program change keys

The LED of the relevant program change key lights up in the Standard
Start program according to the program selected.
In the EasyMode Start program, the LED lights up in the Start sub-
screen, in the sub-screen of the removed instrument and in the Sivision
program.
It is not possible:
● to switch to the Instrument program or the sub-screen of an
instrument when no instrument has been removed
● to switch to the Sivision program when the PC connection has not
been configured
You can change from sub-screens and settings screens to a main
program by touching one of the three program change keys in the
Standard Start program.

4.2.3 Sub-screens and settings screens

Sub-screens
Some programs are divided into a main program and sub-screens.
The function keys for the basic functions are displayed in the main
programs. The Sub-screen key (two rectangles) leads to further setting
possibilities.
Sub-screens usually are automatically hidden after a certain period has
elapsed. The Return key (return arrow) closes the opened sub-screen
immediately.

Settings screens
In many cases, functions not only can be switched on or off, but also
can be set. If a function key is pressed and held (> 2 s), the
corresponding settings screen appears. This screen superimposes the
current screen. The screen located in the background has a
semitransparent appearance and is temporarily disabled for inputs.

Settings screens usually are automatically hidden after a certain period

has elapsed. The Return key (return arrow) closes the opened settings
screen immediately.

63 22 726 D3561
58 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.2.4 Status bar

The status bar is located at the bottom edge of the screen. If multiple
user profiles A are preselected, the active user profile A to F is
displayed along with the current time, including a display with seconds.

In addition, status messages are displayed to indicate, for example,

change the amalgam separator, add water sanitizing agent, charge the
battery of the wireless foot control, error messages, refill the cleaning
agent for chemical treatment of the suction hoses, or number of days
left until the next maintenance call or sanitization run.
If the treatment function is switched on, the selected treatment and the
assigned bur drive are also displayed here.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 59
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.3 Foot control

The treatment center can be operated using a wireless foot control or a
foot control with a cable connection.

4.3.1 Wireless foot control

Technical data of the wireless module, see Foot control radio
interface" [→ 27].

4.3.1.1 Setting the wireless foot control on the treatment center

The wireless foot control must be assigned to the treatment center via a
registration. This prevents malfunctions caused by neighboring wireless
foot controls.
ü The treatment center and wireless foot control are ready for
operation.
ü All instruments are in place.
1. Simultaneously press and hold the left and right buttons of the foot
control (> 2 s).
S S
0
0 Ä An acoustic signal sounds. The following message appears on
the touch screen:
Ä If no key is touched, the screen will automatically close after a
specific time. The wireless foot control will not be registered.
2. Confirm that this wireless foot control is to be used on the treatment
center by pressing the OK button. The registration process can be
interrupted with the Esc key.
Ä The message is hidden. The wireless foot control is assigned to
the treatment center.

4.3.1.2 Battery voltage message

The wireless foot control is powered by a battery. An almost empty
battery is detected by the system and displayed in the status bar. In this
case, the battery should be replaced within a week.
When the battery is completely empty, an error code is output, see
"Error messages" [→ 267]. The symbol of the wireless foot control is
now displayed flashing. Replace the battery as soon as possible to
prevent system failure.
The battery can be changed by the user, see "Changing the battery of
the wireless foot control" [→ 262].

63 22 726 D3561
60 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.3.2 Operating the foot control

The foot control operating elements are assigned different functions,
depending on whether the instruments are all in place or an instrument
is removed from its holder.

Foot pedal
ü An instrument is removed.
S
➢ Step on the foot pedal.
0
Ä The instrument is activated. The intensity is regulated according
to the pedal movement if necessary (if the speed foot control is
set, see "General instrument functions" [→ 95]). When the
intraoral camera is removed from the holder, the camera image
is focused and switches to the still or live image.

4-way foot control plate

If the cursor control is switched on, it is operated via the 4-way foot
control plate, see "Using the cursor control" [→ 62].
If the cursor control is switched off, then:
ü An electric motor is removed from the holder.
S
➢ Slide the 4-way foot control plate to the right or left.
0
Ä The clockwise/counterclockwise rotation of the electric motor is
activated.

IMPORTANT
Allocation of functions during active treatment
The allocation of functions may differ when the Treatment function is
active.
➢ Note the position of the orange and blue cursor, see "Using the
cursor control" [→ 62].

Left button
ü All instruments are in their holders.
S S
➢ Press the left button.
0
Ä The chair moves to mouth rinsing position S.
ü An instrument (motor, high-speed handpiece, SiroSonic TL) is
removed from its holder.
➢ Press the left button.
Ä The cooling system (spray, air, or NaCl) is switched on/off. If the
intraoral camera is removed, the video still image is saved in
Sidexis; the live image is displayed in the next quadrant in SI
Video.

Right button
ü All instruments are in their holders.
S 0 ➢ Press the right button.
0
Ä The chair moves to entry/exit position 0.
ü An instrument (motor, high-speed handpiece) is removed.
➢ Press the right button.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 61
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Ä The chip blower remains switched on as long as the button is

pressed. The boost function can be selected in ultrasound
mode. When the intraoral camera is removed, it is possible to
toggle between single image and quad image in SI Video.

4.3.3 Using the cursor control

The cursor control cannot be used in the EasyMode Start program
operating mode.

4.3.3.1 Functionality

Cursor control as an alternative mode of operation

The touchscreen and the fixed keys of the dentist element can also be
operated hands-free via the foot control. This method of operation
optimally supports hygiene, especially in connection with sterile
treatment work.
For cursor control, the foot control features a 4-way foot control plate
that can be moved in four directions.
S

0
The cursor position is optically displayed on the touchscreen or on the
fixed keys.
The cursor control is reserved for the Start and Instrument programs.
The Sivision programs cannot be controlled via the cursor.

Cursor control setting options

Note that different settings can be made for the cursor control in the
Setup program. The functions assigned to the 4-way foot control plate
vary according to its setting. The adjacent symbols for setting the cursor
are used in the Setup program.
● Cursor control switched off:
Counterclockwise or clockwise instrument motor rotation can be
selected by sliding the 4-way foot control plate to the left or right.

● Cursor control switched on, without program change:

The cursor can be moved along the cursor path by holding or
repeating upward or downward actuation of the 4-way foot control
plate.
● Cursor control switched on, with program change:
The cursor can be moved along the cursor path by holding or
repeating upward or downward actuation of the 4-way foot control
plate. If the cursor is located at the end of the cursor path, it can be
toggled between the Start program and the Instrument program.
Please also note the information on "orange and blue bars," see below.
To set the cursor control to the mode you prefer, refer to "Setting the
cursor control" [→ 193].

Current cursor position

If the cursor control is activated, the current position of the cursor is
displayed by an orange bar located between the pairs of keys on the
touchscreen or between the fixed keys on the EasyTouch control panel.

63 22 726 D3561
62 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Cursor path
The cursor path runs between the pairs of keys, moving from top to
bottom and from left to right, usually in multiple loops. The cursor path
can be traversed between the starting and end points either in a forward
or a reverse direction.
If no further cursor position is available on the touchscreen, the cursor
jumps out of the touchscreen. The cursor path is then continued
between the fixed keys on the EasyTouch control panel.
In Instrument programs, all quick setting keys are selected
simultaneously. This is indicated by a horizontal orange bar located
behind the quick setting keys. The speed or intensity is then set by
actuating the 4-way foot control plate to the left or right briefly (values
on quick setting keys) or for a longer time (intermediate values), see
"Operating the cursor control" [→ 63].
The Clean and Setup keys and the ON/OFF switch cannot be reached
by the cursor control.
This adjacent image shows an example of the control panel of the
Sinius and Sinius TS dentist element. The cursor path of the Sinius CS
dentist element also follows this principle.

Orange and blue bars

A blue bar indicates which functions are assigned to the left or right
button of the foot switch. For example, in the start program, the chair
S S
0
0
program "rinsing position" (S) and entry/exit position (0) are assigned to
the buttons, but in the instrument program spray or chip blower.
If the cursor control without program change is activated, the blue bars
also can be selected with the cursor. If the cursor control with program
change is activated, the blue bars are skipped for faster navigation.

Cursor return
Once a function is activated with the cursor control, the orange cursor
typically returns to the starting position of the program, for instance after
switching on the X-ray viewer, the operating light, or cuspidor flushing.
The cursor position does not change for functions that are operated by
permanent shifting of the 4-way foot control plate, e.g., manual chair
adjustment.

Chip blower key in the Instrument program

When the cursor control is activated, the motor and high-speed
handpiece program will display the Chip blower key.

4.3.3.2 Operating the cursor control

Moving the cursor

➢ Briefly slide the 4-way foot control plate upward or downward.
S
Ä The orange cursor moves forward or back one cursor position.
0

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 63
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

➢ Slide and hold the 4-way foot control plate up or down (auto cursor).
S
Ä The orange cursor slowly moves from one cursor position to the
0 next.

Activating a function or fixed key

➢ Activate the left key: Slide the 4-way foot control plate to the left.
Activate the right key: Slide the 4-way foot control plate to the right.
S

0 Ä The selected key is highlighted orange on the touchscreen (if

switched on) or is displayed in gray or blue (if switched off). The
LED of the selected fixed key lights up or goes out on the
control panel of the dentist element.
Ä The orange cursor usually returns to the starting position of the
program after activation.

Activating a quick setting key and setting intermediate values

Operation of the cursor control for screens with quick setting keys is
illustrated based on the example of the Motor program.
ü The cursor control is switched on.
1. Move the cursor to the quick setting keys.
Ä The quick setting keys are highlighted with an orange bar.

2. Setting the values of the quick setting keys: Move the 4-way foot
control plate briefly to the left or right.
S

0
Setting intermediate values: Move the 4-way foot control plate to the
left or right and hold this position.
Ä The motor speed is displayed in the first line. If the motor is set
to a value corresponding to one of the quick setting keys, it is
highlighted orange.

Changing programs
ü Cursor control with program change is switched on.
S
ü An instrument is removed from its holder.
0
1. Position the cursor at the starting point of the cursor path.
2. Move the cursor past the start position. Hold the 4-way foot control
plate in the upward position.
Ä The touchscreen display changes to the Start or Instrument
program.

63 22 726 D3561
64 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4 Patient chair

4.4.1 Safety instructions

CAUTION
ü û The free space under the patient couch and up to the water unit can
be decreased due to chair movements.
Parts of the patient's or user's body may be pinched or crushed.
➢ Do not allow any limbs to stick out in the space between the chair
upholstery, armrests and chair base. Please make sure that the
patient’s arms and legs rest on the upholstery of the chair.
➢ Do not place any objects on the base of the chair.

max. load of chair CAUTION

165 kg
The maximum load capacity of the patient chair is 165 kg (363.8 lbs)
Intermittent operation
of chair motors: defined in ISO 6875 (tested with multiple safety according to IEC
2 min ON/18 min OFF
60601-1).
If the maximum load capacity is exceeded, there is a risk of damage
to the treatment chair and injury to the patient.
➢ Never allow any persons who weigh more than 160 kg (352.7 lbs)
to sit on the patient chair. The maximum permitted load capacity
is indicated on a label next to the rating plate of the treatment
center.
➢ The maximum additional weight of accessories mounted on the
patient chair is 5 kg (11 lbs).

CAUTION
Objects may protrude into the movement range of the chair.
There is a risk of crushing the patient and damaging the objects.
➢ Make sure that no objects such as e.g. windows, drawers or other
devices protrude into the movement range of the treatment chair.

IMPORTANT
Chair interlock
As long as a treatment instrument is activated, all functions for
moving the patient chair are disabled for safety reasons.

If chair movement is permanently blocked, please contact your service

technician.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 65
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.2 Safety stop

The treatment center is equipped with various safety stops to prevent
crushing and damages. The cutoff trigger points are shown in the
following illustration:

Display of triggered safety switches (all shown on one illustration)

2 Cuspidor bowl
3 Lift frame
4 Assistant element support arm
5 Rear facing, right/left
6 Footrest
7 Backrest

! Motor for height adjustment or backrest of the chair overheats

The following occurs when one or more safety switches is triggered:

● all safety switches cause an acoustic signal to be played twice each
time a movement stops or starts. Exception for cuspidor: here only
when movement starts
● All chair movements stop immediately
● The triggered safety switches are displayed on the touchscreen.
● when the patient chair moves (this does not apply to the assistant
element or swiveling cuspidor), a corrective movement is carried out
in the opposite direction for approx. 2 seconds. Exception for lift
frame: here the corrective movement is always upward
As long as a safety switch is activated, the operation of the treatment
center is restricted.
If a safety switch is permanently blocked, please contact your service
engineer.

63 22 726 D3561
66 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.3 Triggering an immediate movement stop

You can stop the movement of the chair to a programmed position as
follows:
➢ Press the main switch or the Shock positioning fixed key on the
dentist element.

➢ Press a button relating to the patient chair on the touchscreen or a

button to tilt the motor-driven headrest.

➢ Press one of the patient chair keys on the control panel of the
assistant element.

➢ With all instruments are in place press the pedal or the left or right
S
button of the foot control.
S
0
0 ➢ With an instrument removed, press the pedal of the foot control.

➢ With the cursor control switched off, actuate the 4-way foot control
plate on the foot control in any direction.
S

0 ➢ With the cursor control switched on, move the cursor to any of the
keys relating to the patient chair.

➢ Move the 4-way foot switch in any direction.

➢ Actuate one of the 4-way switches on the motor-driven headrest in

any direction. Exception: The upper 4-way switch up/down, see
note below.
Ä All movements of the treatment center are stopped immediately.

IMPORTANT
The function keys and switches for adjusting the headrest to the
height of the patient can be used during the program run. This does
not trigger a movement stop.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 67
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.4 Armrests
Armrests are available for the patient chair.
The right armrest can be swiveled forward to make it easier for patients
to get in and out of the chair.

CAUTION
Always swivel the armrest completely to one of the stops. Do not
leave the armrest in a middle position to prevent injuries.

4.4.5 Vario footrest

The footrest can be folded forward by approximately 10 cm to adjust it
to the patient's height.

➢ Lift the foot end and pivot the footrest forward or backwards.

CAUTION
Make sure while adjusting that the footrest is locked securely in place
of the corresponding end position.
Make sure to avoid trapping fingers while adjusting.

If the patient chair features lounge upholstery, there is no footrest. The

entire reclining surface is upholstered.

63 22 726 D3561
68 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.6 Adjusting the motor-driven headrest

The motor-driven headrest can be adjusted via the touchscreen or
directly on the headrest.

CAUTION
Fine objects can enter the mechanism of the motor-driven headrest
through the gap.
Long hair, dangling jewelry or loosely fitting clothing can be pulled in.
➢ Position the patient in such a way that his/her hair and any
objects he/she is wearing cannot be pulled in.

WARNING
The head pad contains a strong magnet on its bottom side.
The magnet could affect any active implant located nearby.
Furthermore, direct contact of the head pad with magnetic cards can
delete data stored on the cards.
➢ Therefore, make sure that the magnet is never located in the
immediate vicinity of any patients, users or technical personnel
with an active implant. If necessary remove the head pad from the
headrest.
➢ Make sure that no magnetic cards or any other data storage
media are located in the immediate vicinity of the head pad.

4.4.6.1 Moving the headrest in/out

The treatment chair is adjusted to the patient's stature by moving the
headrest in or out.

Via touchscreen
ü The Standard Start program or the Manual Chair Adjustment
program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Touch the Headrest in/out keys.

Via the 4-way switch

➢ Slide the upper 4-way switch upward or downward.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 69
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.6.2 Inclining the headrest

The headrest can be tilted either via motor drive or manually (quick
mechanical adjustment).

Via touchscreen
ü The Standard Start program or the Manual Chair Adjustment
program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Touch the Tilt headrest keys.

Via the 4-way switch

➢ Slide the upper 4-way switch to the left or right.

Via quick mechanical adjustment

1. Hold the headrest securely in place before unlocking it.
A A 2. Press buttons A together.
Ä The headrest is thus disconnected from the motor drive and can
be tilted manually.

Via the 4-way foot control

It can be set so that the tilt of the headrest can be adjusted using the 4-
way foot control at the base of the chair; see"Linking headrest tilt to the
4-way foot control" [→ 195].
➢ Actuate the 4-way foot control to the left or right.

63 22 726 D3561
70 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.7 Adjusting the double articulating headrest

The double articulating headrest is equipped with two rotary joints. They
facilitate manual adjustment of head inclination for maxillary/mandibular
treatments. The headrest extension can be pushed in or pulled out
manually to adjust it to the height of the patient.

CAUTION
When the lock on the double articulating headrest is released, the
both rotary joints lose their holding power.
If the headrest is not supported when the lock is released, the
patient’s head might suddenly fall backward.
➢ Always support the headrest and thus the patient’s head prior to
releasing the locking mechanism on the double articulating
headrest!
➢ Place your hands so your fingers will not be pinched.
➢ Tell the patient that you are going to adjust the headrest.
➢ Before releasing the headrest, always ensure that both joints are
securely locked.

1. Place one hand under the headrest to support the patient’s head.
2. Use the other hand to press the release button A.
Ä Both rotary joints are now freely movable.
3. Adjust the headrest to the desired treatment position. Then let go of
the release button A.
Ä Both rotary joints lock into place. Ensure that the joints are
securely positioned! The headrest is secure again.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 71
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.8 Moving the patient chair via chair programs

The chair programs can be selected via the touchscreen. The entry/exit
and mouth rinsing positions can also be selected via the assistant
element fixed keys and the foot control.
You can individually re-program the factory preset chair programs to
suit your own requirements, see "Creating chair programs and shock
positioning" [→ 77].

WARNING
The Sinius CS and Sinius TS dentist elements could be positioned
within the movement range of the patient chair.
During an automatic program run, such as moving toward the entry/
exit or mouth rinsing positions, the patient may collide with the Sinius
CS and Sinius TS dentist elements or the support arms. The patient is
at risk of being crushed.
➢ Before moving the patient chair, position the Sinius CS and Sinius
TS dentist elements so that collision with the patient or the patient
chair is impossible.

IMPORTANT
Chair movements with cuspidor swiveled in
With the cuspidor bowl swiveled in, the chair cannot be moved. This
prevents the patient from colliding with the cuspidor. Swing the
cuspidor outward before initiating chair movement.

4.4.8.1 Moving the patient chair to the entry/exit position

The following functions are triggered for simple patient entry and exit in
the entry/exit position:
● The patient chair moves to an upright position
● The operating light switches off
The tumbler heater can be set so that it automatically switches off when
the entry/exit position (0) chair program is activated; see "Linking the
tumbler heater to the entry/exit position" [→ 197].

WARNING
The patient's feet may get caught in the instrument hoses of the
Sinius dentist element when he enters or leaves the patient chair.
The patient may trip or fall.
➢ Turn the Sinius dentist element outward before the patient enters
or leaves it.

Via touchscreen
ü The Start dialogis displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Touch the 0 key briefly (< 2 s).

63 22 726 D3561
72 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Via foot control

ü All instruments are in place.
S 0 ➢ Press the right button of the foot control.
0

Via the assistant element

➢ Press the 0 key on the assistant element briefly (< 2 s).

4.4.8.2 Moving the patient chair to the mouth rinsing position

The following functions are triggered in the mouth rinsing position:
● The operating light switches off
● The chair moves the patient to an upright position

Via touchscreen
ü The Start program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Touch the S key briefly (< 2 s).

Via foot control

ü All instruments are in place.
S S
➢ Press the left button of the foot control.
0

Via the assistant element

➢ Press the S key on the assistant element briefly (< 2 s).

4.4.8.3 Using the last position memory function

The last chair position is stored before the patient chair moves to mouth
rinsing position S. When mouth rinsing position key S is pressed again,
the treatment center returns to the previously set treatment position.
ü The patient chair can be in any treatment position.
1. Press the S key on the touchscreen, or press the S key on the user
interface of the assistant element, or press the left button of the foot
control (with all instruments in place in their holders).
Ä The treatment center moves to the mouth rinsing position.
2. Press the button S again.
Ä The treatment center automatically returns to the position where
the patient chair was located prior to the mouth rinsing position.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 73
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.8.4 Activating other chair programs

ü The Start program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Touch the 1 key or the 2 key briefly (< 2 s).

63 22 726 D3561
74 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.9 Moving the chair manually

WARNING
The Sinius CS and Sinius TS dentist elements could be positioned
within the movement range of the patient chair.
Moving the patient chair may cause the patient to collide with the
Sinius CS and Sinius TS dentist elements or the support arms. The
patient is at risk of being crushed.
➢ Before moving the patient chair, position the Sinius CS and Sinius
TS dentist elements so that collision with the patient or the patient
chair is impossible.

IMPORTANT
Chair movements with cuspidor swiveled in
With the cuspidor bowl swiveled in, the chair cannot be moved. This
prevents the patient from colliding with the cuspidor. Swing the
cuspidor outward before initiating chair movement.

4.4.9.1 Open manual chair setting screen

The Manual Chair Adjustment program can only be accessed in the
Standard Start program operating mode. In the EasyMode Start
program, the manual chair adjustment keys are displayed permanently,
see adjacent illustration.

ü The Standard Start program is displayed on the touchscreen.

1. Touch the Manual Chair Adjustment key.

Ä The Manual Chair Adjustment screen is displayed.

2. Perform the settings described in the following sections.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 75
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.9.2 Tilting the patient couch

Movement of the seat and backrest without any compression or
stretching effects for the patient

Via touchscreen
ü The EasyMode Start program or Manual Chair Adjustment program
is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Touch the Tilt patient couch keys.

Via the 4-way switch

➢ Slide the 4-way switch to the left or right.

Via the 4-way foot switch

ü In the Setup program, control of the Tilt patient couch function via
the 4-way foot switch cannot be replaced by the Headrest tilt
function, see "Linking the headrest tilt to the 4-way foot
switch" [→ 195].
ü The spray aspirator must be in place when the 4-way foot switch is
allocated to the aspirator in the Setup program. See "Linking the
spray aspirator to the 4-way foot switch" [→ 194].
➢ Slide the 4-way foot switch to the left or right.

4.4.9.3 Adjusting the chair height

Via touchscreen
ü The Manual Chair Adjustment program or the EasyMode Start
program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Touch the Chair Height Adjustment keys.

Via the 4-way foot switch

ü The 4-way foot switch is not assigned to the suction system of the
assistant element via the Setup program.
➢ Slide the 4-way foot switch upward or downward.

Via the 4-way switch

➢ Slide the lower 4-way switch upward or downward.

63 22 726 D3561
76 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.10 Creating chair and shock positioning programs

Chair programs
The four chair programs preset in the factory:
● Mouth rinsing position S
● Entry/exit position 0
● 1 and 2
can be individually reprogrammed for each of the six user profiles (A to F).
ü The Start dialog is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. Move the patient chair to the desired treatment position; see
"Moving the chair manually" [→ 75].
2. For motor-driven headrest: Tilt the headrest to the desired treatment
position; see "Inclining the headrest" [→ 70].
3. Switch the operating light on or off (this will be included in the
program), see “Operating light” [→ 169].
4. Press and hold the desired program key (S, 0, 1, 2) (> 2 s).
Ä An acoustic signal sounds. Your settings are now stored under
the desired program key.
Note: Chair programs S and 0 can also be programmed on the assistant
element side.

Shock positioning
When the Shock positioning key is pressed, the patient chair
immediately moves to a position suitable for shock positioning of the
patient.
The shock positioning position preset at the factory can be
reprogrammed.
1. Move the patient chair to the desired position.
2. Press and hold the Shock positioning key (> 2 s).

WARNING
Program this key exclusively for shock positioning the patient, never
use as a treatment position.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 77
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.4.11 Setting the active lumbar support

The patient chair has the option of lumbar support.

Opening Start sub-screen

ü The Start program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ In the Standard Start program: Touch the Sub-screen key.
In the EasyMode Start program: Press the Chair program change
key.

Ä The Start sub-screen is displayed.

Setting the active lumbar support

➢ Adapt the active lumbar support to the patient's spinal curvature.
Touch the Decrease active lumbar support/Increase active lumbar
support keys.
The active lumbar support functions switch off automatically when the
chair approaches the entry/exit position 0 or the mouth rinsing position
S.

63 22 726 D3561
78 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5 Dentist element

4.5.1 Maximum load capacity
The maximum load of the Sinius (sliding track unit) dentist element is 2
kg (4.4 lb). A sterilizable silicone mat can be placed over the dentist
element.

The maximum load on the Sinius CS dentist element tray is 1 kg (2.2

lb).

The maximum load of the Sinius TS dentist element with a tray holder is
2 kg (4.4 lb). A sterilizable silicone mat can be placed over the dentist
element.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 79
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

The total maximum load of the Sinius TS dentist element with a tray
holder is 2 kg (4.4 lb). In this case the maximum load of the tray is 1 kg
(2.2 lbs). A sterilizable silicone mat can be placed over the dentist
element.

For each version, an NaCl bottle with the corresponding accessories

(weighing approx. 1 kg or 2.2 lb) can also be attached to the dentist
element. See "Preparing for use of NaCl saline solution." [→ 98]

4.5.2 Height adjustment

The height of the Sinius (sliding track unit) dentist element can be
adjusted to achieve an ergonomic instrument height.
Please contact your service engineer.

4.5.3 Positioning the dentist element

NOTICE
Sudden movements can cause instruments to fall out of the holder in
the dentist element.
➢ Try to avoid sudden movements of the dentist element.

Sinius dentist element

The sliding track version allows you to move the dentist element along
the entire length of the patient chair. Combined with the rotary joints on
the support arm, the dentist element can be perfectly positioned for any
procedure.
1. Hold the dentist element by the two handles and move it along the
chair base.
2. Move the support arm and the dentist element to the desired
treatment position.

WARNING
The patient's feet may get caught in the instrument hoses of the
Sinius dentist element when he enters or leaves the patient chair.
The patient may trip or fall.
➢ Turn the Sinius dentist element outward before the patient enters
or leaves it.

63 22 726 D3561
80 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Sinius CS dentist element

In the swivel arm version, the dentist element is attached to the water
unit with a flexible support arm. The dentist element is held in place at
the adjusted height with a pneumatic locking brake in the support arm.
A capacitive sensor is integrated into both handles to release the brake.
The sensor responds when the handles are touched.
1. Grip a handle with your hand.
Ä The locking brake is released with the sound of pressurized air.
2. Move the dentist element to the required position and release the
handle.
Ä The dentist element is now positioned securely.
Please note that you must wait for at least two seconds before releasing
the brake in the support arm again.

WARNING
The Sinius CS dentist element could be positioned within the
movement range of the patient chair.
Moving the patient chair may cause the patient to collide with the
Sinius CS dentist element or its support arm. The patient is at risk of
being crushed.
➢ Before moving the patient chair, position the Sinius CS dentist
element so as to make collision with the patient or the patient
chair impossible.

CAUTION
Folding they tray arm in the area of the middle hinge may cause
crushing injuries.

In the standard position, the Sinius CS dentist element is attached to

the rear of the water unit.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 81
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Alternatively, the Sinius CS dentist element can be attached to the front

of the water unit (special position). This type of mounting minimizes the
travel distance of the dentist element and makes it easier for the patient
to get in and out of the chair.
The operating light is then mounted at the rear.
When the Sinius CS dentist element is mounted in the special position
at the water unit, the treatment center cannot be equipped with an X-ray
tube unit on the light post. For information about the Heliodent Plus
model, please see the chapter "X-ray tube unit" [→ 172].

NOTICE
In the special position, there is an increased danger of collision with
the following components:
• Between the support arm and tumbler filler
• Between the support arm and tumbler
• Between the support arm and cuspidor
• Between the support arm and the instruments of the assistant
element
Always move the dentist element carefully to avoid collision.
Do not position the support arm behind the tumbler filler.

Sinius TS dentist element

In the OTP version, the dentist element is attached to the water unit with
a flexible support arm. The dentist element is held in place at the
adjusted height with a pneumatic locking brake in the support arm. A
capacitive sensor is integrated into both handles in the upper area to
release the brake. The sensor responds when the handles are touched.
Touching the lower area of the handle does not release the locking
brake. The dentist element can then only be positioned in a horizontal
direction. The height of the dentist element is maintained.

63 22 726 D3561
82 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Positioning the dentist element vertically and horizontally

1. Grip a handle in the upper area.
Ä The locking brake is released with the sound of pressurized air.
The dentist element can be raised and lowered, as well as
moved horizontally.
2. Position the dentist element and release the handle again.
Ä The dentist element is secured at the height set.
Please note that you must wait for at least two seconds before releasing
the brake in the support arm again.

Only move the dentist element horizontally

➢ Take hold of a handle in the lower area and move the dentist
element in a horizontal direction.
Ä The locking brake in the support arm remains locked. The
height of the dentist element is maintained.

WARNING
The Sinius TS dentist element could be positioned within the
movement range of the patient chair.
Moving the patient chair may cause the patient to collide with the
Sinius TS dentist element or its support arm. The patient is at risk of
being crushed.
➢ Before moving the patient chair, position the Sinius TS dentist
element so as to make collision with the patient or the patient
chair impossible.

CAUTION
Folding they tray arm in the area of the middle hinge may cause
crushing injuries.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 83
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.4 Fixed keys on the dentist element

Arrangement of fixed keys on the Sinius and Sinius TS dentist elements

Arrangement of fixed keys on the Sinius CS dentist element

4.5.4.1 Main switch

The treatment center is switched on/off with the main switch.
To switch off, press and hold the key until an acoustic signal sounds.
Then release the key.

IMPORTANT
Power switch
The treatment center also features a power switch on the base of the
chair that separates the treatment center from the power supply, see
"Switching the treatment center on/off" [→ 51].

4.5.4.2 Program change keys

The program change keys allow the user to switch between the main
programs Start program, Instrument program, and Sivision program in
the Standard Start program operating mode.
In the EasyMode Start program operating mode, the program change
keys Chair and Instrument can be used to switch to the relevant sub-
screens.
Depending on which main screen or sub-screen is displayed, the LED
of the corresponding program change key will light up.

63 22 726 D3561
84 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

It is not possible:
● to switch to the Instrument program or the sub-screen of an
instrument when no instrument has been removed
● To switch to the Sivision program when the PC connection is turned
off or has not been configured
You can change from sub-screens and settings screens to a main
program by touching one of the three program change keys in the
EasyMode Start program.

4.5.4.3 Timer function

A set time can be counted down to zero with the timer function. Four
timers can be preset. A time loop (automatic restart of the countdown)
and an acoustic signal (after the set time has elapsed) can be added to
each timer.

Presetting the timer

The maximum time setting is 9 minutes and 30 seconds.
1. Press and hold the Timer fixed key on the dentist element (> 2 s).

Ä The Timer function program is displayed on the touchscreen.

2. Select one of the four timers to change its presetting. To do this,

touch one of the selection keys at the lower edge of the setting
program.
Ä The selected timer is highlighted orange.
3. Use the – and + keys to set the required time.
Increments:
From 00:05 to 1:00 = 5 s steps
From 1:00 to 3:00 = 10 s steps
From 3:00 to 9:30 = 30 s steps
4. Select whether the time loop and the acoustic signal should be
activated/deactivated for the selected timer. Touch the Time Loop
and/orAcoustic Signal key.
Ä If a function is switched on, the corresponding key is highlighted
orange.
5. Select another timer for adjustment or close the settings screen with
the Return key.
Ä All settings are automatically saved when the screen is closed.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 85
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Starting the timer

1. Press the Timer fixed key briefly.

Ä The most recently set timer is started immediately. The set and
elapsed time are displayed in the status bar. The Timer function
program is also displayed.
2. If you wish to use a different timer, touch one of the timers at the
lower edge of the screen.
Ä If the already elapsed time is less than the new time set, the
new time will be shown in the status bar. The started timer will
not be reset to zero.
3. Optional: You can switch the time loop and/or acoustic signal on/off
while the timer is counting down. Touch the Time Loop and/or the
Acoustic Signal key.
Ä If a function is switched on, the corresponding key is highlighted
orange.

Stopping/resetting the timer

When the Timer function program is hidden, the timer can also be
stopped by pressing the Timer fixed key. When the program is shown,
the timer will be reset to zero.

4.5.4.4 Shock positioning

Immediately moves the patient chair to a position for shock positioning
of the patient.
To program the position of the shock positioning function, see "Creating
chair programs and shock positioning" [→ 77]

4.5.4.5 Operating light

Switching the operating light on/off

➢ Briefly press the Operating light fixed key on the dentist or assistant
element.
Ä When the operating light is switched on, the LED of the fixed
key lights up on the dentist and assistant elements.
For details, see section "Operating light" [→ 169].

4.5.4.6 Composite function

The composite function is used to prevent premature curing of
composite materials.
➢ Press the Composite Function fixed key.
Ä If the composite function is switched on, the LED of the fixed
key lights up on the dentist and assistant elements. On the
assistant element, the Operating light key lights up.

4.5.4.7 Tumbler filling

If the tumbler filling system of your treatment center is equipped with
automatic sensor control, see “Tumbler filling with automatic sensor
control” [→ 158].

63 22 726 D3561
86 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Filling the tumbler

1. Place the tumbler under the tumbler filler.

2. Press the Tumbler Filling fixed key.

Ä The tumbler is filled with water for the preset time.
Pressing the Tumbler Filling fixed key again stops the filling function
immediately.

Opening the settings screen

➢ Press and hold the Tumbler Filling fixed key (> 2 s).

Ä The Tumbler Filling settings screen is displayed.

Linking tumbler filling to the mouth rinsing position and setting the
filling time
1. Touch the Link tumbler filling to mouth rinsing position key.
Ä If the key is marked orange, the tumbler filling function will
automatically be switched on for the duration of the preset filling
time when the mouth rinsing position chair program (S) is
activated.
2. Use the – and + keys to set the filling time.
Since the setting Tumbler filling with automatic sensor control regulates
the water volume via the filling level, systems with this option do not
allow for setting thefilling time, see "Tumbler filling with automatic
sensor control“" [→ 158].

Water tempering on/off

➢ Switch the tumbler tempering function on/off. Touch the Water
Tempering key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the tumbler tempering function
is activated.

4.5.4.8 Flushing of the cuspidor bowl

The flushing function can be used for rough cleaning of the cuspidor
during treatment.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 87
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Switching the flushing on/off

➢ Press the Flushing fixed key.
Ä The LED in the key lights up during the flushing function. The
flushing function is activated for the preset flushing time.

Setting the flushing time

1. Press and hold the Flushing key on the dentist element (> 2 s).
Ä The Flushing settings screen appears on the touchscreen.
2. Set the flushing time with the + and – keys.

Link flushing to mouth rinsing position S

➢ Touch the Link flushing to mouth rinsing position S key.
Ä If the key is marked orange, flushing is automatically activated
for the duration of the flushing time set when approaching the
mouth rinsing position S.

4.5.4.9 Freely selectable function

Bell
e.g. call key
Freely available relay 230 V, 6 A
(connected by service engineer).
This function can be preset as a pushbutton or as a switch in the Setup
program, see "Setting the bell/hash key as a pushbutton or as a
switch" [→ 195].

Hash
Freely available relay 230 V, 6 A
(connected by service engineer).
This function can be preset as a pushbutton or as a switch in the Setup
program, see "Setting the bell/hash key as a pushbutton or as a
switch" [→ 195].

4.5.4.10 Clean
Pressing this key deactivates the complete user interface of the dentist
element with the exception of the main switch. Pressing the key again >
3 s or stepping on the foot switch reactivates the user interface.
This is used to make sure that no unwanted functions can be
accidentally triggered while cleaning the surface, see "Disinfecting the
EasyTouch" [→ 207].

4.5.4.11 Setup
Used for individual configuration of the treatment center by the user and
for reading out messages by the service engineer, see "Configuration of
the treatment center (Setup)" [→ 190].

63 22 726 D3561
88 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.5 Quick setting keys and function levels

Depending on which instrument is taken from the holder, the
corresponding instrument program or respective functions appear in the
EasyMode Start program.

Instrument programs in the Standard Start program operating mode

In the Standard Start program operating mode, the instrument settings
can be made with static quick setting keys, programmable quick setting
keys, or function levels.
Static quick setting keys The values shown on the quick setting keys can be selected by
touching them briefly (< 1 s).

Motor program (speed) and ultrasonic program (intensity) with static quick
setting keys
Intermediate values can be set as follows: If you press and hold (> 1 s)
a quick setting key whose value is greater than or equal to the speed or
intensity value displayed in the first line, the value increases. If you
press and hold (> 1 s) a quick setting key whose value is less than the
speed or intensity value displayed in the first line, the value decreases.
The quick setting keys are shaded gray for intermediate values.
Static quick setting keys are displayed in the motor program with speed
values (0.09 or 2, 20, 40 x 1000 rpm); in the ultrasonic program with
intensity values (1%, 50%, 100%).
Programmable quick setting keys The key values can be changed individually with the programmable
quick setting keys.

Motor program (speed) and ultrasonic program (intensity) with

programmable quick setting keys
The speed/intensity shown in the first line can be increased or
decreased by pressing and holding (>1 s) the left or right - or + quick
setting key.
The programming mode is activated by holding down the middle quick
setting key Set (> 2 s). The speed/intensity flashes on the touchscreen
and a flashing bar appears behind the quick setting keys. Now press the
quick setting key to which the set value is to be saved. A signal sounds
as confirmation. Further settings such as activation of the coolant or
Endo mode are also saved on the quick setting key.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 89
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

The settings can be recalled by touching the respective quick setting

key.
Function levels When using function levels, you have two "storage locations" (E1/E2) at
your disposal for saving settings or recalling them at the push of a
button. These settings can nevertheless be changed during treatment.
A distinction is made between a coarse and fine adjustment of the
settings for speed and intensity. If the – or + key is touched briefly
(< 1 s), the increments correspond to the quick setting keys (speed:
0.09 or 2, 20, 40; intensity: 1, 50, 100). If the – or + key is held (> 1 s),
intermediate values can also be set.
The key is displayed in gray if the values saved in the function level
have been changed ("Function level no longer valid").

Motor screen with function levels

Using quick setting keys or function You can decide whether you wish to work with static quick setting keys
levels or the function levels in the setup program, see "Preselecting how
instrument settings are to be saved". The setting applies for each user
profile A-F.

EasyMode Start program

In the EasyMode Start program, only the quick setting keys are used to
adjust the values for the speed and intensity (1%, 50%, 100%). The
quick setting keys with the values for intensity are also displayed in the
motor and ultrasonic programs when the endodontics function is
activated. The operating concept corresponds with other Dentsply
Sirona treatment centers that have membrane keys.

Start program in EasyMode with instrument functions for motor and

ultrasonic (active endodontics function)
Intermediate values are set in the same way as in the Standard Start
program operating mode, see above.

63 22 726 D3561
90 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.6 Saving instrument settings

With static quick setting keys
You can determine whether the Memory key should be displayed in the
instrument programs with the quick setting keys, see "Preselecting how
instrument settings are to be saved" [→ 198].
SaveMode ● SaveMode – The Memory key is displayed in the instrument
programs:
The settings made in the Instrument program will be saved after the
instrument is placed in its holder only if the Memory key was
pressed and held beforehand (> 2 s).
After an instrument is removed, the previously saved settings are preset
again.
ü An instrument is removed from its holder.
ü The instrument program is displayed with static quick setting keys
and the Memory key.
ü The desired settings are made; see also "General instrument
functions" [→ 95].
1. Only in the EasyMode Start program operating mode: Touch the
Sub-screen key.
2. Press and hold down the Memory key.
Ä An acoustic signal sounds. The settings in the Instrument
program and its sub-screen are saved.
DropMode ● DropMode – Memory key hidden in Instrument programs:
When the instrument is deposited, the settings made in the
Instrument program are automatically saved.
The DropMode is not available in the EasyMode Start program
operating mode.

With programmable quick setting keys

With programmable quick setting keys, the set speed and intensity
values can be saved to and called up from one of the quick setting keys.
The settings for selecting and activating the coolant are saved at the
same time.
ü An instrument is removed from its holder.
ü The instrument program is displayed on the touchscreen with quick
setting keys.
ü The coolant is preselected and, if relevant, activated, see
"Preselecting coolant" [→ 95] and "Switching preselected coolant
on/off" [→ 95].
1. Keep the middle quick setting key Set held down (> 2 s) to save the
setting.
Ä The programming mode is activated. The speed flashes on the
touchscreen and a flashing bar appears behind the quick
setting keys.
2. Press one of the quick setting keys. This must be done within 5
seconds otherwise the programming mode is closed.
Ä An acoustic signal sounds. The set speed and preselection and
activation of the coolant are saved on the quick setting key.
3. Repeat this process for other quick setting keys if necessary.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 91
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Ä The settings can be recalled by touching the respective quick

setting key.

With function levels

The settings which have been made can be saved to and recalled from
two function levels (E1, E2). These settings can nevertheless be
changed during treatment.
ü An instrument is removed from its holder.
ü The Instrument program with function levels is displayed on the
touchscreen.
ü All settings are made; see also "General instrument
functions" [→ 95].
1. Press and hold key E1 or E2 (> 2 s).
Ä An acoustic signal sounds. The settings in the Instrument
program and its sub-screen are saved to the corresponding
function level.
2. Repeat this procedure for the second function level.
Ä The settings can be recalled by briefly touching the key (< 2 s).

63 22 726 D3561
92 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.7 Placing the instruments in their holders

Automatic opening of instrument dialogs
In the Standard Start program operating mode, the touchscreen will
automatically display the Instrument program of the removed
instrument. In the EasyMode Start program, the touchscreen will display
the speed or intensity values of the removed instrument.
If more than one instrument is removed, the Instrument program or the
speed or intensity values of the instrument removed first are displayed.
When using the Sinius or Sinius TS dentist element, make sure that the
instruments are always placed in the correct instrument holders. If any
instruments are placed in the wrong holders, the wrong instrument
dialog will be opened when they are removed from the holders.

Sinius CS dentist element

Springs in the dentist element pull the swivel arm back into its original
position to prevent the instrument hoses from hanging down.
➢ Remove the required instrument from its holder and pull it toward
you.
Ä The swivel arm is pulled forward along the instrument hose.
The touchscreen displays the Instrument program or the speed
or intensity values corresponding to the instrument. The
instrument can be activated via the foot control.

The positions of the instruments on the holder can be optimized by

moving the guide rollers A on the swivel arms.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 93
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Ball stopper for the Sinius and Sinius TS dentist element

A ball stopper can be ordered as an accessory for a free instrument
holder.
Insert the ball stopper in an unassigned instrument holder. This
prevents accidental deposit of an instrument in this holder.
To reorder the ball stopper, see "Spare parts and
consumables" [→ 270].

Instrument hoses

NOTICE
The instrument hoses contain electrical cables and media pipes.
Over-tensioning or pinching the hoses may cause the electrical
cables to break and the media pipes to leak.
➢ Ensure that you do not pull or bend the instrument hoses too
much.

63 22 726 D3561
94 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.8 General instrument functions

Settings for the coolant, instrument light, and foot switch can be made in
the sub-screen of the instrument removed from the holder.
The sub-screens vary according to the instrument removed. Functions
not available for the respective instrument are not displayed in the sub-
screen.

4.5.8.1 Opening the sub-screen

ü An instrument is removed from the holder.
ü In the Standard Start program operating mode, the touchscreen will
display the Instrument program of the instrument in use. In the
EasyMode Start program, the values for the speed and intensity of
the removed instrument are shown.
➢ Standard Start program: Touch the Sub-screen key.
EasyMode Start program: Press the Instrument program change
key.

Ä The sub-screen is displayed.

4.5.8.2 Selecting a coolant

Air, spray or NaCl can be preselected as the instrument coolant in the
sub-screen. The preselected coolant can then be switched on or off in
the Instrument program.
ü The Sub-screen of the removed instrument is displayed on the
touchscreen.
➢ Select the coolant required for the instrument removed from the
holder. Touch the Spray, Air or NaCl key.
Ä The key of the preselected coolant is highlighted orange. The
key of the preselected coolant is displayed in the Instrument
program or EasyMode Start program.

4.5.8.3 Switching the preselected coolant on/off

CAUTION
Instrument can be operated without coolant.
Tooth substance can be damaged by frictional heat.
➢ Always make sure that the treatment area does not overheat
whenever you switch the coolant off.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 95
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Via touchscreen
The preselected coolant in the EasyMode Start program operating
mode can only be turned on/off with the foot control buttons, see below.
ü An instrument is taken from the holder and the Instrument program
is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Touch the key of the preselected coolant (Spray, Air or NaCl).
Ä If the key of the preselected coolant is highlighted orange, it will
be switched on together with the instrument when the foot pedal
is activated. If the key is highlighted gray, the coolant is
switched off.

Via foot control

ü An instrument is removed from its holder.
S S
➢ Press the left button of the foot control.
0
Ä If the key of the preselected coolant (Spray, Air or NaCl) is
highlighted orange on the touchscreen, it will be switched on
together with the instrument when the foot pedal is activated.

4.5.8.4 Setting the ApexLocator

If your treatment center is equipped with the ApexLocator option, you
can adjust this in the Motor sub-screen.For more information, refer to
the chapter "ApexLocator" [→ 102], section “Endodontic treatments with
motor".
The ApexLocator can only be used in the Standard Start program
operating mode.

4.5.8.5 Switch instrument light on/off

ü The sub-screen of the removed turbine of a motor or scaler is
displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Switch the instrument light on or off with the Instrument light key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the instrument light can be
activated using the foot control.
For highspeed handpieces, the brightness and operating voltage of the
instrument light can be set, see "Setting the handpiece light" [→ 119].
The instrument light of the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe can also
be adjusted, see "Switching the instrument light on/off and setting the
water temperature" [→ 122].

4.5.8.6 Setting the foot control as a direct starter or speed foot control
The foot control can be set as a direct starter or as a speed foot control
in a motor or SiroSonic TL scaler sub-screen:
● Direct starter
When the foot control is actuated, the instrument is switched on with
the set speed and intensity.
● Control foot control
Depending on the setting of the foot control, the instrument controls
the speed and intensity continuously up to the maximum value set.

63 22 726 D3561
96 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

ü The sub-dialog of the removed instrument is displayed on the

touchscreen.
➢ Touch the Direct starter/control foot control key.
Ä If the key is highlighted gray, the direct starter function is
switched on. If the key is highlighted orange, the speed foot
control function is switched on.

4.5.8.7 Setting the spray amount

The spray amount is preset at the factory. However, it can be adjusted
using the regulating screw on the dentist element. This setting is then
valid for all burr drives.

Sinius and Sinius TS dentist elements

1. Set the spray amount by turning the screw at the bottom of the
dentist element.
2. Check the set spray amount with a burr drive. Correct the setting if
necessary.

Sinius CS dentist element

The regulating screw for setting the spray amount is located below the
instrument holder. The holder is fixed on the front edge with two internal
clamps on the dentist element.
1. The instruments must be removed from the instrument holder. To
do this, remove all instruments one after the other and allow these
to hang down facing forward.
2. Lift the instrument holder by the front edge until the clamps are
released and the holder can be removed.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 97
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

3. Set the spray amount by turning the screw.

4. Check the set spray amount with a burr drive. Correct the setting if
necessary.
5. First insert the rear edge of the instrument holder into the groove on
the dentist element. Then push the holder forward and down until it
clicks into place.
6. Place the instruments in their holders. Make sure that the
instrument hoses are located in the guide rollers of the swivel arm.

4.5.8.8 Preparing for use of NaCl saline solution

The peristaltic pump prepares a sterile saline solution instead of spray
water for cooling.
The peristaltic pump hose is a disposable item. To reorder it, see
"Spare parts and consumables" [→ 270].
Two symbols are on the NaCl pump.
Meaning: When operating the unit, observe the operating instructions.

Meaning: Caution, risk for fingers in contact with moving parts

Close cover A before operating the NaCl pump.

ü The drive of the peristaltic pump and a receptacle for the NaCl
bottle holder are attached to the dentist element. Please contact
your local distributor if necessary.
ü A new peristaltic pump hose is available.

63 22 726 D3561
98 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

1. Attach the NaCl bottle holder to the dentist element.

2. Hang the NaCl bottle (max. 1 liter) onto the bottle holder.

3. Open cover A. Lay the silicone hose B without prestress, with the
thickened part wrapped around the pump wheel. See the adjacent
drawing. Close cover A.

IMPORTANT
Direction of flow of the peristaltic pump
The shorter end of the hose with the cannula must be located at the
top of the pump; the longer end of the hose leading to the handpiece
must be located at the bottom. See the adjacent drawing.

4. Push the short end of the hose with the cannula through the stopper
and into the NaCl bottle. The regulator in the hose clip C must be
completely open (regulating wheel in top position).
5. Run the long end of the hose alongside the corresponding motor
hose up to the contra-angle handpiece. Fasten the hose with clips
D.
6. Attach the coupling E to the hose. Connect the thin silicone hose F
to the coupling E.
7. Connect the thin silicone hose E to the connectors on the contra-
angle handpiece. For details, see the operating instructions of the
contra-angle handpiece.
8. Place the contra-angle handpiece on the separate motor holder G.
See also the descriptions in section "Preparing the treatment center for
sterile operation" [→ 136].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 99
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

The NaCl pump has two setting for peristaltic pump hoses of different
diameters. For the Dentsply Sirona peristaltic hoses, the wide setting
must be selected. This ensures an optimal supply rate. The NaCl pump
is therefore delivered with the wide default factory setting.
The hose setting can be changed when needed by pressing on it with a
pen. The setting must always be adjusted on both sides.

63 22 726 D3561
100 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.8.9 Setting the NaCl flow rate

ü An instrument is removed from its holder.
ü In the Standard Start program operating mode, the Instrument
program of the removed instrument is displayed on the touchscreen
and NaCI is preselected as the coolant, see "Preselect
coolant" [→ 95].
In theEasyMode Start program, the sub-screen of the removed
instrument is displayed.
1. In the Standard Start program, keep the NaCl key pressed (> 2 s).
In the EasyMode Start program, keep the Preselect NaCl key
pressed (> 2 s).

Ä The NaCl settings screen is displayed.

2. Use the – and + keys to set the flow rate of the NaCl pump.

3. Touch the Return key.

Ä The NaCl settings screen is hidden immediately. The settings
are saved. If the NaCl key is highlighted orange, the function is
activated.

NOTICE
Ultrasonic tips of third-party manufacturers in some cases do not
have a sufficient flow rate in conjunction with the NaCl function.
➢ Use only ultrasonic tips from Dentsply Sirona.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 101
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.9 ApexLocator
The ApexLocator can be used to measure the working length of the root
canal file in endodontic treatments using electrical impedance.
The ApexLocator can be used as follows:
● For manual measurement using a file clamp [→ 109]
● For measurement during treatment with the motor, without
electronic torque limitation [→ 116]
● For measurement during treatment with the motor and using the
"Endodontic Treatment" option with electronic torque
limitation [→ 139]
With the EasyMode Start program operating mode, the ApexLocator
can only be used for manual measurements with a file clamp.

CAUTION
The ApexLocator can be influenced by electromagnetic fields.
This may lead to measurement errors. Strong interference is indicated
by a flashing red bar in the distance display. A warning signal sounds.
➢ Ensure that there are no sources of electromagnetic interference
close to the treatment center.

If the ApexLocator detects a defect, the distance display and apex

operating keys are not shown on the touchscreen, and an error
message appears in the status bar, see "Error Messages." [→ 267]
For more information about the distance display, see "Distance
display." [→ 105]

63 22 726 D3561
102 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.9.1 Preparing to use the ApexLocator

Apex adapter, mucosal electrode, and file clamp

The mucosal electrode and the file clamp are connected to the socket of
the dentist element using the apex adapter. The socket on the Sinius
and Sinius TS dentist elements is located underneath the dentist
element; on the Sinius CS it is located at the rear.
1. Insert the apex adapter into the dentist element.
The apex adapter can be placed in the apex holder during
treatment.
2. Insert the connector of the mucosal electrode into the large socket
of the apex adapter.
3. For manual measurement: Insert the connector of the file clamp into
the small socket of the apex adapter.

CAUTION
Following treatment with the ApexLocator, the Apex adapter must be
disconnected from the dentist element.
If the apex adapter is placed in the holder during treatment, the file
clamp and mucosal electrode must be removed or placed under
sterile conditions.

Care and cleaning of the ApexLocator components is described in the

chapter “Care and cleaning instructions for the practice team”, see
“Cleaning and disinfecting/sterilizing the components of the
ApexLocator” [→ 224].

Apex measurement via the instrument

The apex is measured by means of an impedance measurement
between the root canal file and mucosal electrode. The Apex
measurement signal is as follows:
● Apex cable in the instrument hose
● Metal housing of the motor
● Metal housing of the ISO adapter, if applicable
● Endodontic handpiece
● Root canal file
● Mucosal electrode
● Apex adapter

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 103
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

D
A

0123
E

.
sirona
C
BL ISO
B

For endodontic treatments with the ApexLocator, the Dentsply Sirona

Endo 6:1 (SN 6407 or higher / July 2010) or Endo 6 L handpiece is
required when using the treatment function and the Dentsply Sirona
SiroNiTi Apex handpiece is required for use in the motor program
(without electronic torque limitation).
For each of the motors BL A and BL ISO B, one apex instrument hose
is available, which carries the apex cable. The connecting threads of
these motors C have gold-plated contact surfaces (in BL motors with
serial number 6,000 or higher). The gold plating ensures electrical
conductivity.
When using the BL motor, the (Apex) basic adapter (D) must be used.
This also has a gold-plated contact.
The motor end of the Apex instrument hoses is identified by a blue
connecting nut.
Pull the silicone insulation sleeve E over the handpiece and wear
insulating gloves to avoid faulty measurements due to leakage current.
During the measurement, the instrument must not come into contact
with the patient's mucosa or the mucosal electrode. We recommend the
use of a cofferdam for treatment.

WARNING
The silicone isolation sleeve is a disposable item and must be
sterilized before use.
Details can be found in the section “Cleaning and disinfecting/
sterilizing the components of the ApexLocator” [→ 224].

Standardizing the measuring system

Before starting the apex measurement, a functional check or
standardization of the measuring system can be performed by shorting
the electrodes. This cancels out any inaccuracies caused by skips in
impedance in the measurement setup.
➢ Short the electrical measurement system. Plug in the files and hold
them directly against the mucosal electrode.
Ä If a short signal is heard and the distance display appears with
no bars, standardization was successful. If not, check the
electrical connections for signs of damage.

63 22 726 D3561
104 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.9.2 Distance display

The measured root canal depth is shown in the distance display on the
touchscreen. A bar with 11 display levels shows the distance from the
root canal file to the physiological apex (apical constriction). The root
canal is divided into four colored sections in the distance display.

CAUTION
The distance display is not a metric specification of length.
The ApexLocator should be used as an additional aid to supplement
the usual root canal treatment measures. It is not intended to replace
the radiological determination of the working length.
➢ To determine the exact length, also prepare the relevant X-ray
images.

Automatically show and hide the distance display

For measurement during the treatment using the instrument, the
distance display is automatically displayed on the touchscreen in the
motor screen and in the Advanced Endodontics Program. This appears
as soon as the measurement begins, i.e. when electric current flows
between the root canal file and the mucosal electrode. After the
measurement, the distance display disappears again after a certain
time, so that any hidden setting values are visible again. The distance
display can be displayed again by standardizing the measuring system.
For manual measurements using the file clamp in the Start subscreen,
the distance display can be shown/hidden by pressing the Apex
measurement with file clamp button.

Colored regions of the distance display

Gray region
The tip of the root canal file is in the middle region of the root canal.

Blue region
The tip of the root canal file is near the apex.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 105
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Green region
The tip of the root canal file has reached the physiological apex.

Red region
The tip of the root canal file has pierced the physiological apex. The
instrument overshoot is displayed.
In the event of electromagnetic interference, the red bar flashes.

Maximum root canal depth reached

The maximum root canal depth reached is displayed as a black triangle
to the left of the distance display under the text "Max". The triangle is
displayed as soon as the gray region is exceeded.
After standardization of the measuring system by shorting the mucosal
electrode and root canal file, the position of the triangle is automatically
reset. In the Endodontics program, this also occurs after you have
selected a new file.

Automatic motor stop for a preset apex distance

You can make a setting to ensure that the motor stops automatically at
a preset distance from the apex. The preset distance is displayed as a
black triangle to the right of the distance display under the text “Stop”.
The motor stop can be combined with the AutoReverse function.
Following the motor stop, the next time the foot control is operated, the
motor switches to counterclockwise rotation. When the root canal file is
withdrawn, the burr drive automatically switches back to clockwise
rotation.
The automatic motor stop can be switched off or set to four different
levels, for more information see the section "Implantology/endodontics
treatments with motor" [→ 116] and the section in the "Endodontics"
chapter "Setting the automatic motor stop of the ApexLocator" [→ 143].
If the distance is 0, the motor does not stop until it reaches the
physiological apex. Please note that the distance values are not a
metric length measurement!

63 22 726 D3561
106 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Dental unit plugin "ApexLocator distance display"

The distance display on the touchscreen can be additionally shown on
the Sivision monitor. This requires that the Sidexis 4 and dental unit
plugins are installed on the PC. In Sidexis 4, the distance is displayed/
hidden on the touchscreen by touching the distance display.
For more details, refer to the “Dental unit plugins” user manual.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 107
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.9.3 Beeps
In addition to the graphical distance display on the touchscreen, the
position of the file in the root canal can also be indicated as an acoustic
signal.

Apex acoustic signals

The ApexLocator always plays the following acoustic signals:
● One beep sounds when the physiological apex is reached and the
motor stops automatically once it has reached the preset motor stop
position.
● Three beeps sound if the motor is switched to counterclockwise
rotation when the auto-reverse function is activated and the foot
pedal is pressed again.
For manual measurements using the file clamp in the Start sub-screen,
Apex signal tones are not output.

Apex distance acoustic signals

If the Apex distance signal tones key is highlighted in orange, the
following signal tones are issued in addition to the Apex signal tones:
● No acoustic signal is played if the file is at least five display levels
(on the distance display) away from the apex.
● Beeps with long intervals are played if the file is three or four display
levels away from the apex.
● Beeps with short intervals are played if the file is one or two display
levels away from the apex.
● A constant signal is played when the file has reached or passed the
apex.

If both types of acoustic signal are switched on simultaneously, the

continuous signal sounds when the motor automatically stops after it
reaches the apex and the motor stop function is switched on. The three
beeps continue to sound if auto-reverse is switched on.

63 22 726 D3561
108 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.9.4 Performing manual measurements with the file clamp

For endodontic examination, a manual measurement can be performed
using the file clamp and a root canal file.
ü The treatment center is prepared for manual measurements using
the file clamp, see section "Preparing to use the ApexLocator".
ü The Start sub-screen is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. Touch the Manual Measurement with File Clamp key.
Ä If this function is activated, the Manual measurement with file
clamp key is highlighted in orange.
Ä The distance display is shown on the touchscreen.

2. If the distance to the apex is to be indicated with an acoustic signal,

press the Apex distance signal tones button.
Ä If the button is colored orange, acoustic signals will be played in
addition to the distance display diagram. The intervals between
the acoustic signals vary according to the measured distance to
the apex.

CAUTION
Preventing incorrect measurements
When performing the apex measurement, wear non-conductive
gloves to avoid measurement errors caused by unwanted leakage
current.
During the measurement, the root canal file must not come into
contact with the patient's mucosa, metallic tooth restorations, or the
mucosal electrode. It is recommended to use a cofferdam when
measuring.

3. Attach a root canal file to the file clamp.

4. Short the electrical measurement system. Hold the clamped files
directly against the mucosal electrode. This cancels out any
inaccuracies caused by skips in impedance in the measurement
setup (standardization).
Ä If a short signal is heard and the distance display appears with
no bars, the standardization was successful. If not, check the
electrical connections for signs of damage.
5. Place the mucosal electrode in the patient's mouth and perform the
measurement.
Ä The measured root canal depth is displayed by a colored bar in
the distance display. For more information, please refer to
"Distance display" [→ 105].
The manual measurement in the Start sub-screen is ended
automatically if you exit the program or display another program.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 109
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.10 Electric motor

IMPORTANT
Also observe the operating instructions for the different motors.

4.5.10.1 Motor and coupling versions

Different brushless motors are available depending on the type of use
and the coupling of the handpiece.
Brushless motors are designed as three-phase motors (without carbon
brushes). They feature precise controllability and longevity. The motors
can be sterilized.
Hose coding The motors feature a special instrument hose with electrical coding. The
treatment center uses these codes to detect which motor is connected
and configures the control accordingly. The confusion of different
variations is ruled out due to the mechanical coding at the hose and
motor. Additionally, the motor couplings are color-coded at the motor
and hose.
BL motor The blue coded instrument hose (BU) must be used for the BL motor.

BU
The BL motor is designed for direct operation of T1 Classic handpieces.
For example, in order to use the handpieces of the T1 Line, either the
basic adapter (apex measurement, no spray) or ISO adapter (no apex
measurement, spray) have to be used as a connector.

Their speed range lies between 90 and 40,000 rpm (revolutions per minute).
For information on performing apex measurement using the instrument,
refer to the section "Preparing to use the ApexLocator" [→ 103].
BL ISO E/C motors The green coded instrument hose (GN) must be used for the BL ISO E/
C motors.
BL ISO E BL ISO C
3

3
012

012
a.

a.
C
S
siron

siron
O

O
BL IS

BL IS

GN GN
The BL ISO E/C motors are directly equipped with an ISO coupling. T1
Line handpieces, for example, can thus be used without an adapter.
The motor housing and the ISO interface of the motors are shortened.
The speed of the BL ISO C motor ranges between 90 and 40,000 rpm;
the speed of the BL ISO E motor ranges between 2,000 and 40,000 rpm.
The BL ISO C motor can be used for endodontic treatment.

63 22 726 D3561
110 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

BL Implant motor The yellow (YE) coded instrument hose must be used for the BL Implant
motor.

3
012

BL Im na.
plant
siro
YE
The BL Implant motor is designed especially for surgical use. The air/
water ducts (spray) and instrument light have therefore been omitted. It
features a very high torque.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 111
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.10.2 Setting the speed

In the Standard Start program operating mode, settings can be made
using the static quick setting keys (with the key values 0.09 or 0.2, 20,
40), with programmable quick setting keys (with changeable key
values), or via function levels (E1, E2).
In the EasyMode Start program, the speed can only be set using the
static quick setting keys. They are displayed with intensity values (1%,
50%, 100%).

Selecting the speed with the quick setting keys

ü The electric motor is removed from the holder.
ü Either the Motor program with static or programmable quick setting
keys is displayed on the touchscreen or the EasyMode Start
program.
➢ Touch one of the quick setting keys in the bottom line briefly (< 1 s).
Ä The quick setting key is highlighted orange. The selected speed
is displayed in the first line in rpm (revolutions per minute).

IMPORTANT
Rpm values of quick setting keys
In the Standard Start program operating mode, the motor speed
corresponds to the speed value of the key times 1000.
The 0.09 key = 90 rpm (for BL, BL ISO C, and BL Implant motors)
The 0.20 key = 200 rpm (for BL ISO S motors)
The 20 key = 20,000 rpm
The 40 key = 40,000 rpm
In the EasyMode Start program operating mode, the motor speed
corresponds to the intensity of the key in percent.
Key 1 = 90 rpm (for BL, BL ISO C, and BL Implant motors)
Key 1 = 200 rpm (for BL ISO E motor)
Key 50 = 20,000 rpm
Key 100 = 40,000 rpm
Please note that the speed of the burr depends on the selected
straight or contra-angle handpiece.

63 22 726 D3561
112 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Setting intermediate speed values with static quick setting keys

ü The electric motor is removed from the holder.
ü The Motor program with static quick setting keys or the EasyMode
Start program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Increase speed: Hold down a quick setting key, which has a speed
value that is greater than or equal to the one displayed in the first
line (> 1 s).
Decrease speed: Hold down a quick setting key, which has a speed
value that is less than the one displayed in the first line (> 1 s).
Ä The selected speed is displayed in the first line in rpm
(revolutions per minute). The quick setting keys are shaded
gray for intermediate values.

IMPORTANT
Increments
The size of the increments depends on the speed range setting.
For BL, BL ISO C and BL Implant motors:
From 90 to 400 rpm = 10 rpm increments
From 400 to 5,000 rpm = 200 rpm increments
From 5,000 to 40,000 rpm = 1,000 rpm increments
For BL ISO E motor:
From 200 to 2,000 rpm = 200 rpm increments
From 2,000 to 10,000 rpm = 400 rpm increments
From 10,000 to 40,000 rpm = 1,000 rpm increments
Please note that the speed of the burr depends on the selected
straight or contra-angle handpiece.

Setting intermediate speed values with programmable quick setting

keys
ü The electric motor is removed from its holder.
ü The Motor program is displayed on the touchscreen with
programmable quick setting keys.
➢ Press and hold the left or right quick setting key – or + (> 1 s).
Ä The speed is increased or reduced.
For increments see "Setting intermediate speed values with static quick
setting keys" (above).

Setting the speed with function levels

ü The electric motor is removed from the holder.
ü The Motor program with function levels is displayed on the
touchscreen.
➢ Set the speed using the – and + keys.
< 1 s coarse adjustment, > 1 s fine adjustment
Ä The selected speed is displayed in the first line in rpm
(revolutions per minute).
For increments for coarse adjustment, see "Selecting the speed with the
quick setting keys" (above).
For increments for fine adjustment, see "Setting intermediate speed
values with the quick setting keys" (above).

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 113
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.10.3 Setting the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can be changed only when the motor is at a
standstill.
In the EasyMode Start program operating mode, the direction of rotation
can only be set by using the foot control.

Via touchscreen
ü The Standard Start program operating mode is set.
ü An electric motor is removed from the holder.
ü The Motor dialog is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Touch the Counterclockwise rotation key on the touchscreen.
Ä For counterclockwise rotation: The key is highlighted orange
and an orange counterclockwise rotation arrow appears.
For clockwise rotation: The key is displayed in gray and the
orange counterclockwise arrow is hidden.

Via foot control

When the cursor control is switched off, the rotational direction of the
motor can also be set via the 4-way control plate of the foot switch. In
the EasyMode Start program operating mode, the direction of rotation
must be set via the foot switch.
ü An electric motor is removed.
ü The Motor program or EasyMode Start program is displayed on the
touchscreen.
➢ For counterclockwise rotation: Move the 4-way control plate to the
left.
S

0
For clockwise rotation: Move the 4-way control plate to the right.
Ä In the Standard Start program:
If the counterclockwise rotation is selected, the CCW Rotation
key is highlighted orange and an orange counterclockwise
arrow appears. If the motor is running in a clockwise direction,
the CCW Rotation key is displayed in gray and the orange
counterclockwise arrow is hidden.

63 22 726 D3561
114 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Ä In the EasyMode Start program:

If counterclockwise rotation is selected, an orange
counterclockwise arrow appears. The counterclockwise arrow
disappears when clockwise rotation is selected.
Tip: After starting the electric motor with the foot switch, an audible
warning signal sounds 6 times if counterclockwise rotation is activated.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 115
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.10.4 Implantology/endodontics treatments with motor

4.5.10.4.1 Electronic torque limitation
If your treatment center is equipped with the implantology/endodontics
software option, please observe the instructions provided in the chapter
"Implantology and endodontic treatments" [→ 128]. If your treatment
center is not equipped with this option, please note that you do not have
the option of electronic torque limitation.

CAUTION
No electronic torque limitation is available in the Motor program.
Root canal files can easily break during operation without torque
limitation.
➢ Never perform endodontic treatments without torque limitation.
Use an endodontic handpiece with mechanical torque limitation,
e.g. SiroNiTi from Dentsply Sirona.

4.5.10.4.2 Endodontic treatments with the ApexLocator in the motor screen

If your treatment center is equipped with the ApexLocator option but
does not have the treatment function, the Apex function in the Motor
program can be used for endodontic treatments.
Please note that the ApexLocator can be accessed only in the Motor
program in the Standard Start program operating mode.

IMPORTANT
SiroNiTi Apex
Only Dentsply Sirona SiroNiTi Apex must be used to perform apex
measurement using a torque-limiting handpiece! The electrical
conductivity can be ensured only using this handpiece.
The SiroNiTi handpiece can also be used to perform endodontic
treatments without the ApexLocator.

ü The treatment center is prepared for apex measurements using the

instrument, see section "Preparing to use the ApexLocator" [→ 103].
ü The Motor dialog is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. Set the appropriate motor speed according to the handpiece and
the root canal file used, see "Setting the speed" [→ 114].
2. You can set the motor so that it stops automatically when the
physiological apex is reached. If you want to use the automatic
motor stop, this can be preset in the Motor sub-dialog. To do this
touch the Sub-dialog key.
Ä The Motor sub-dialog is displayed.

63 22 726 D3561
116 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

3. Touch the Apex stop key.

Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the motor stops automatically
when the physiological apex is reached. The – and + keys and
the AutoReverse key are displayed.
4. Use the – and + keys to set the required apex distance from 1.5 to
0. If the distance is 0, the motor does not stop until it reaches the
physiological apex. Please note that the distance values are not a
metric length measurement!

Ä The set distance is displayed to the left of the – and + keys. The
preset motor stop position is displayed in the Motor dialog as a
black triangle to the right of the distance display under the text
"Stop".

5. To combine the automatic motor stop with the automatic switching

to counterclockwise rotation, press the AutoReverse key.
Ä If the button is orange, the motor automatically switches to
counterclockwise rotation following the motor stop the next time
the foot pedal is operated. When the file is withdrawn, the bur
drive automatically switches back to clockwise rotation.
6. In the second Motor sub-dialog, the apex acoustic signals and apex
distance signals can be switched on. To do this touch the Sub-
dialog key.
Ä The second Motor sub-dialog is displayed.

7. To switch on the apex acoustic signals, press the Apex acoustic

signals key.
Ä If the key is colored orange, an acoustic signal is issued when
the apex or the set motor stop position is reached. If the Auto-
reverse function is activated, three acoustic signals are issued
when the motor switches to counterclockwise rotation.
8. To switch on the apex distance acoustic signals, press the Apex
distance acoustic signals key.
Ä If the key is colored orange, distance acoustic signals will be
issued in addition to the distance display diagram. If the
automatic motor stop is switched off, the intervals between the
acoustic signals vary according to the measured distance from

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 117
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

the physiological apex. If this function is switched on, the

acoustic signals vary depending on the measured distance to
the preset motor stop position. For more information on the
acoustic signals during apex measurement, see the section
"Acoustic signals" [→ 108].
9. Touch the Return key.

Ä The Motor screen is displayed.

CAUTION
Preventing incorrect measurements
When performing the apex measurement, wear non-conductive
gloves to avoid measurement errors caused by unwanted leakage
current.
During the measurement, the instrument must not come into contact
with the patient's mucosa, metallic tooth restorations, or the mucosal
electrode. It is recommended to pull the silicone isolation sleeve over
the handpiece and perform the treatment using a cofferdam.

10. Attach the required root canal file to the handpiece.

11. Short the electrical measurement system. Plug in the files and hold
them directly against the mucosal electrode. This cancels out any
inaccuracies caused by jumps in impedance in the measurement
setup (standardization).
Ä If a short signal is heard and the distance display appears with
no bars, standardization was successful. If not, check the
electrical connections for signs of damage.
12. Place the mucosal electrode in the patient's mouth and perform the
treatment. Activate the bur using the foot pedal.
Ä The measured root canal depth is displayed by a colored bar in
the distance display. For more information, please refer to
"Distance display" [→ 105].

63 22 726 D3561
118 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.11 Highspeed handpiece

4.5.11.1 Using the highspeed handpiece

IMPORTANT
Also observe the operating instructions for the different high-speed
handpieces.

The high-speed handpiece hose is equipped with a standardized

coupling according to ISO 9168.
The coolant, spray, air, or NaCl can be preselected in the High-speed
handpiece sub-screen; see "General instrument functions" [→ 95].
If your treatment center is equipped with the proportional valve option,
the driving air of the high-speed handpiece can be regulated using the
foot control.
In the operating mode EasyMode Start program, the quick setting keys
are shown, but they have no function.

4.5.11.2 Setting the light of the highspeed handpiece

Opening the highspeed handpiece setup program

ü The highspeed handpiece is removed from the holder.
➢ Press and hold the Setup fixed key (> 2 s).

Ä The Setup program of the highspeed handpiece is displayed.

Adjusting the instrument light and switching it on/off

If the highspeed handpiece is equipped with an instrument light, it can
be switched on/off and its brightness can be adjusted.
1. Use the – and + keys to adjust the brightness of the highspeed
handpiece light.
2. Switch the highspeed handpiece light on or off with the Instrument
light key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, activating the foot control will
switch on the highspeed handpiece light at the set brightness.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 119
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Preselecting the instrument light operating voltage

The original Dentsply Sirona halogen and LED lamps are usually
operated at 3.6 V. Voltages over 3.8 V destroy the lamp. The operating
voltage can be adjusted for lamps made by other manufacturers.

NOTICE
The operating voltages of different lamps may vary.
Overvoltages can lead to damage.
➢ When changing lamps, make sure that the operating voltage is
properly set for the new lamp.

➢ Use the – and + keys to adjust the maximum operating voltage of

the highspeed handpiece light.

63 22 726 D3561
120 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.12 Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe

The multifunctional syringe is used to clean the treatment areas and
blow them dry. It supplies air and preheated water media. The heating
cartridge for the water is located in the handpiece.

IMPORTANT
Also observe the operating instructions of the Sprayvit M.

4.5.12.1 Safety instructions

The Sprayvit M is equipped with extensive safety monitoring functions.
However, please observe the following information.

CAUTION
After changing the Sprayvit M hose, no cooling water for the Sprayvit
M heating cartridge flows until the hose is completely filled.
The patient may be scalded by the emission of hot steam. The
heating cartridge can overheat and be destroyed.
➢ After changing the hose on the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe,
press the Water key brieflyand repeat until there is an ample
supply of water in the hose before treating the patient.

IMPORTANT
Heating cartridge switch-on delay
To minimize the risk of scalding, the Sprayvit M water heater is not
activated for several seconds after the treatment center is switched
on and after a hose change when the Water key is initially pressed.

CAUTION
If the flow rate is insufficient, hot water may be emitted by the Sprayvit
M.
The patient could thus be scalded.
➢ Check the water flow rate prior to use.
➢ Check the flow rate at least once a month and whenever you
suspect that it may be insufficient as described in the section
"Checking the flow rate of the Sprayvit M multifunctional
syringe" [→ 226]. Clean the nozzle according to the Sprayvit M
operating instructions.

IMPORTANT
Air outlet during hose change
If the Sprayvit M is removed from the instrument hose while the
treatment center is in use, air will escape from the hose coupling. You
should therefore switch off the treatment center before changing a
hose.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 121
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

IMPORTANT
Electronic flow monitoring
If the electronic flow monitoring system detects low flow, the water
heater will be deactivated and the system displays the corresponding
error message, see also "Error messages" [→ 267].

4.5.12.2 Using the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe

The following instructions apply to the standard version (water on the
right) of the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe. A Sprayvit M with
inverted media (water on the left) is available as an option.
➢ Press the Air key (A).
B Ä Air flows out of the instrument tip.
➢ Press the Water key (B).
Ä Water flows out of the instrument tip.
➢ Press the Air key A and the Water key B simultaneously.
A Ä Spray flows out of the instrument tip.
For more information on operation and care, please refer to the
Operating Instructions of the Sprayvit M.

4.5.12.3 Instrument light on/off and water temperature adjustment

The water temperature and instrument light of the two Sprayvit M
multifunctional syringes on the dentist and assistant elements can be
set separately.
Settings made for Sprayvit M always refer to the multifunctional syringe
removed from the dentist or the assistant element. If both
multifunctional syringes are removed, the settings apply only to the
multifunctional syringe on the dentist element.
If the multifunctional syringe is not operated for Sprayvit M10 s, the
instrument light turns off automatically.

Switching the Sprayvit M instrument light on/off in the Start sub-

screen
ü The Start program is shown on the touchscreen
1. Touch the Sub-screen key.

Ä The Start sub-dialog is displayed.

2. Take a Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe from the holder of the
dentist or assistant element.

63 22 726 D3561
122 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Ä The Sprayvit M instrument light is displayed in the Start sub-

screen.

3. Touch the Sprayvit M instrument light key.

Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the instrument light is turned on
at the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe if this is the only
instrument to have been removed.

Activating/deactivating and setting the water temperature in the

Sprayvit M setup program
The heating power of the water heater of the Sprayvit M multifunctional
syringe is adjustable. This accommodates different input temperatures
of the supply water (e.g. summer/winter). The setting range is approx.
8°C.
In order to prevent interference with the treatment process, the
corresponding program does not automatically appear on the
touchscreen when the Sprayvit M is removed from its holder. It must be
opened with the Setup key.

CAUTION
The heating power can be set too high.
The patient then feels that the water is too warm.
➢ Adapt the heating power of the water heating to the inlet
temperature of the water.
➢ Please check the water temperature, e.g., on the back of your
hand, before using the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe.

ü The Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe on the dentist and assistant

element is removed.
1. Press and hold the Setup fixed key (> 2 s).

Ä The Sprayvit M setup program is displayed.

2. Touch the Water temperature key.

Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the water tempering function is
activated.
3. Use the – and + keys to set the water temperature.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 123
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.13 SiroSonic TL scaler

The SiroSonic TL scaler is used for removing plaque and for endodontic
treatments.

IMPORTANT
See also the SiroSonic TL operating instructions.

4.5.13.1 Safety instructions

The torque wrench is used as a tool for screwing in instrument tips and,
at the same time, to protect against injury.

CAUTION
Ultrasonic tips are sharply pointed.
There is a risk of injuring one's hand on the deposited scaler.
➢ Always attach the torque wrench to the scaler for protection as
soon as you deposit the handpiece.

CAUTION
Ultrasonic tips from other manufacturers do not guarantee safe
operation.
➢ Use only ultrasonic tips from Dentsply Sirona.

4.5.13.2 Setting the intensity

In the Standard Start program mode, settings can be made using the
static quick setting keys (with the key values 1, 25, 50, 75, 100), with
programmable quick setting keys (with changeable key values), or via
function levels (E1, E2).
In the EasyMode Start program, the intensity can be set only using the
static quick setting keys.

63 22 726 D3561
124 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Selecting the intensity with the quick setting keys

ü The SiroSonic TL scaler is removed.
ü Either the Ultrasonic program with static or programmable quick
setting keys or the EasyMode Start program is displayed on the
touchscreen.
➢ Touch one of the quick setting keys in the bottom line briefly (<1 s).
Ä The quick setting key is highlighted orange. The selected
intensity is displayed in the first line.

Setting intermediate intensity values with static quick setting keys

ü The SiroSonic TL scaler is removed.
ü The Ultrasonic program with static quick setting keys or the
EasyMode Start program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Increase intensity: Hold down a quick setting key, which has an
intensity value that is greater than or equal to the one displayed in
the first line (> 1 s).
Decrease intensity: Hold down a quick setting key, which has an
intensity value that is lower than the one displayed in the first line
(> 1 s).
Ä The selected intensity is displayed in the first line. The intensity
changes in increments of 1. The quick setting keys are shaded
gray for intermediate values.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 125
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Setting intermediate intensity values with programmable quick

setting keys
ü The SiroSonic TL scaler is removed.
ü The Ultrasonic program with programmable quick setting keys is
displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Press and hold the left or right quick setting key – or + (> 1 s).
Ä The intensity is increased or reduced.

Setting the intensity with function levels

ü The SiroSonic TL scaler is removed.
ü The Ultrasonic program with function levels is displayed on the
touchscreen.
➢ Set the intensity using the – and + keys.
< 1 s coarse adjustment, > 1 s fine adjustment
Ä The selected intensity is displayed in the first line.

IMPORTANT
Increments
The coarse adjustment increments are 1, 25, 50, 75, 100.
For fine adjustment, the intensity changes in increments of 1.

Increasing the intensity by increments of 20 (boost function)

The boost function allows for a 20-step increase of the intensity during
treatment in relation to the final value. From an intensity of 80, the
maximum value of 100 is the maximum that can be selected.
In the EasyMode Start program operating mode, this function can only
be set by using the right key of the foot control. Activation of the boost
function is only seen on the user interface if the intensity is increased on
the display. The +20 key is not available.
ü The SiroSonic TL scaler is removed.
ü The Ultrasonic program is displayed on the touchscreen either with
static or programmable quick setting keys or with function levels.
1. Touch the +20 key on the touchscreen.

or
S 0 ➢ Press the right button of the foot control.
0
Ä The key is highlighted orange. The Boost function is activated.

63 22 726 D3561
126 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Switching on the endodontics function

The intensity of the endodontics function is limited for safety reasons,
e.g., in order to prevent broken needles.
If the instrument programs are displayed in the Standard Start
program operating mode with static quick setting keys, they are
assigned values 1e to 5e when the endodontics function is activated.
With the programmable quick setting keys, the values 1e to 5e can be
saved to the keys.
In the EasyMode Start program operating mode, the endodontics
function must be switched on using the sub-screen.

IMPORTANT
Endo intensity values
The intensity can be adjusted from 1e to 5e. Please note that the
endodontics intensity values of 1e to 5e do not match the values of 1
to 5 in the scaler mode.
Always use the Endo mode for endodontics!

ü The SiroSonic TL scaler is removed.

ü The Ultrasonic screen or Standard Start program is displayed on
the touchscreen.

1. Only in the EasyMode Start program operating mode: Press the

Instrument program change key.

Ä The Ultrasonic sub-screen is displayed.

2. Touch the Endo key.

Ä The key is highlighted orange. In the first row of the ultrasonic
program, the endodontics intensity is displayed instead of the
ultrasonic intensity.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 127
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.14 Implantology and endodontic treatment

The treatment functions support implantology and endodontic
treatments. The speed and torque of the rotating instrument can be
precisely adjusted and saved for later reference, if desired. This is
possible for every work step for implantology treatments. A selection of
the most popular file systems with the speed and torque values
recommended by the manufacturer is provided for endodontic
treatments in a library. The file composition and sequence can be set by
the user. If the treatment center is equipped with the ApexLocator
option, this can be used for endodontic treatments.
The treatment center enables the management of two implantology
treatments and up to three endodontic treatments with individual
settings for each user profile.
If the adjacent display appears when the treatment function is switched
on (see below), the software has detected that the bur drive marked
with a warning triangle is not suitable for treatment purposes. In this
case, please contact your dental depot.
The Treatment function can only be accessed in the Standard Start
program operating mode.

4.5.14.1 Treatment selection

Switching the function on and selecting the treatment

In the Treatment selection program, the treatment types Endodontics
and Implantology are specified in two separate lists. The required
treatment is selected from these lists.

IMPORTANT
Pencil symbol
Endodontic treatments that were created or edited by the user are
marked with a pencil symbol. Please note that changes to the file
settings may have been made during these treatment sessions. E.g.,
files were possibly removed from the sequence or the values
recommended by the manufacturer were altered.

ü The Start dialog is displayed on the touchscreen.

1. Touch the Treatment key.

Ä The Treatment selection screen is displayed.

2. Touch the field for the desired endodontic (left) or implantology
(right) treatment.

63 22 726 D3561
128 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Ä The Start program is displayed or, if an instrument has already

been taken from the holder, the system will switch to the
Instrument program. The Treatment key is marked orange. The
bur drive that corresponds to the treatment is displayed in the
status bar with an orange dot. Please refer to the section
"Assigning bur drives" for information on the significance of the
empty or filled dots.
3. Remove the bur drive that is marked with an orange dot in the
status bar from the instrument holder.
Ä Depending on the type of treatment selected, the Endodontics
program or the Implantology program is displayed on the
touchscreen.

Endodontics program (left) and implantology program (right)

IMPORTANT
Display of the blue and orange cursor
In the Treatment Program, the key assignment of the foot control is
indicated by blue and orange cursor bars even when cursor control is
switched off. The orange cursor can only be moved with the 4-way
foot control plate when cursor control is switched on. For more
information on the cursor control, please refer to "Using the cursor
control" [→ 62].

Assigning the bur drive

A specific bur drive must be assigned to each treatment type, i.e.
endodontics and implantology.
The Treatment Selection screen indicates which bur drive is assigned to
the treatment type and which one could be used alternatively:
● Empty, gray circle
Instrument cannot be used for the selected treatment type
● Solid gray circle
Bur drive can be assigned to the selected treatment type
● Solid orange circle
Bur drive is assigned to the selected treatment type
If you would like to use a different bur drive for the treatment, you can
change this setting:
ü The Treatment selection program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Before selecting the treatment, touch the upper or lower Assign bur
drive key.
Upper key: endodontic treatment
Lower key: implantology treatment
Ä The next usable bur drive is marked by the orange dot. The
required bur drive is assigned to endodontics or implantology
treatment.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 129
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Switching the treatment function off

When the treatment function is activated, the Implantology program or
the Endodontics program is displayed on the touchscreen instead of the
Motor program when the bur drive assigned to the selected treatment is
removed from its holder. In order for the Motor program to be displayed
again the next time the bur drive is removed, the treatment function
must be switched off beforehand.
➢ Touch the Treatment key again.
Ä If the key is blue, the Treatment function is deactivated. The
Motor program is activated when a bur drive is removed from its
holder.

63 22 726 D3561
130 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.14.2 Implantology

CAUTION
Only the Dentsply Sirona contra-angle handpiece Implant 20:1 may
be used for the Implantology function.
Instruments from other manufacturers can lead to malfunctions. Third-
party instruments may be improperly calibrated for implantology.
➢ Use only the Dentsply Sirona Implant 20:1 contra-angle
handpiece from Sirona for implantology.
➢ Check whether the transmission ratio on the touchscreen agrees
with the value specified on the contra-angle handpiece being
used.

4.5.14.2.1 Calibrating the burr drive

Calibration is required at the start of treatment, every time the contra-
angle handpiece is changed and every time the contra-angle handpiece
is lubricated.
The contra-angle handpiece is automatically checked during calibration.
This includes a measurement of motor current at different speeds to
assess the properties of the system.

CAUTION
To ensure proper calibration, use only Dentsply Sirona instruments.

ü The Implantology program is displayed on the touchscreen.

1. Attach the contra-angle handpiece that you would like to use for the
implantology treatment to the electric motor.
2. Insert the tool in the contra-angle handpiece. This is thus also taken
into account by the measurement.
3. Touch the Calkey on the touchscreen.
Ä The button flashes orange.
4. Hold down the foot pedal throughout the duration of the calibration.
Ä The Calkey continues to flash. If the burr drive is calibrated, the
key permanently remains highlighted orange. Calibration is then
completed.
4.5.14.2.2 Setting the speed and torque
In the Implantology function, the speed and torque values of the contra-
angle handpiece, and not those of the motor, are specified. The control
electronics of the burr drive calculate the motor control based on the
specified gear reduction and the speed and torque values.
ü The Implantology program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Use the – and + keys to set the speed and torque of the contra-
angle handpiece. You can also hold down the keys for this purpose.
Ä The selected speed is displayed in the first line in rpm
(revolutions per minute). The torque is displayed in the second
line in Ncm (newton centimeters).

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 131
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

IMPORTANT
Torque adjustment
The maximum adjustable torque depends on the system motor and
the speed settings.

CAUTION
Improperly selected speeds and torque values endanger the patient.
Treatment errors, e.g. jaw damage, may result from incorrect settings.
➢ Observe the manufacturer's instructions regarding tools and
implants.

4.5.14.2.3 Setting the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can only be changed when the motor is idle.
Counterclockwise rotation is performed without torque limitation. The
torque setting keys are hidden when counterclockwise rotation is
selected.
ü The Implantology program is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. Touch the Counterclockwise rotation key on the touchscreen.
or
➢ Press the right button of the foot control.
Ä For counterclockwise rotation: The key Counterclockwise
rotation is highlighted orange and an orange counterclockwise
rotation arrow appears.
For clockwise rotation: The key Counterclockwise rotation is
displayed in gray and the orange counterclockwise arrow is
hidden.
Tip: After starting the electric motor with the foot switch, an audible
warning signal sounds 6 times if counterclockwise rotation is activated.
4.5.14.2.4 Activating/deactivating and setting the NaCl flow
In order to supply the burr drive with a sterile saline solution during
implantology treatments, a peristaltic pump must be attached to the
dentist element; see "Preparing for use of (NaCl) saline solution" [→ 98].
The peristaltic pump can be switched on/off by touching the NaCl key. If
the key is highlighted orange, the pump is activated using the foot
control.
The NaCl flow rate set of the peristaltic pump is permanently displayed
by a bar in the bottom line of the touchscreen in the
Implantologyprogram.
The flow rate can be set by pressing and holding the NaCl key (> 2
seconds). For details, see "Setting the NaCl flow rate" [→ 101].

63 22 726 D3561
132 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.14.2.5 Selecting a work step

Individual settings can be made and saved for each implantology work
step, e.g. predrilling, final drilling, tapping, etc., see "Saving
settings" [→ 135]. At the end of each work step, the required settings
can be accessed immediately by selecting the next step.
ü The Implantology program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Select the required implantology work step. Touch the previous step
or next step key.
Ä The selected work step is displayed on the touchscreen. The
settings saved in the work step are preset.
If NaCl rinsing was selected in the Implantology sub-screen, the CCW
rotation key is displayed instead of the previous step key. The
implantology steps can then be run only forward in a loop. See
"Preselecting NaCl rinsing, setting the flow rate, and activating the rinse
function" [→ 134].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 133
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.14.2.6 Functions in the sub-screen

Opening the implantology sub-screen
ü The Implantology program is displayed on the touchscreen.

➢ Touch the Sub-screen key.

Ä The Implantology sub-screen is displayed.

Preselecting NaCl rinsing, setting the flow rate, and activating the
rinse function
The NaCl rinsing function can be used to activate an NaCl jet to rinse
the treatment area when the bur instrument is not running.

Preselecting the NaCl rinsing key

A setting can be made to show or hide the NaCl rinsingkey in the
Implantology Program. If the show function is selected, the NaCl, NaCl
Rinsing and CCW Rotation keys are all displayed adjacent to one other.
The implantology steps can then be run only forward in a loop.
ü The Implantology sub-screen is displayed on the touchscreen.

➢ Touch the Preselect NaCl rinsing key.

Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the NaCl rinsing keys are
shown in the sub-screen and the NaCl rinsing is displayed in
the Implantology program.

Setting the flow rate for NaCl rinsing

The flow rate of the peristaltic pump for NaCl rinsing can be set
separately.
ü The Preselect NaCl rinsing key is marked orange in the sub-
screen. The setting keys for the NaCl rinsing are now displayed.
➢ Use the – and + keys to set the flow rate for NaCl rinsing.

63 22 726 D3561
134 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Activating NaCl rinsing via button on foot control

ü The NaCl rinsing key is displayed in the Implantology program.
S 0 ➢ Press the right button of the foot switch.
0
Ä The NaCl rinsing function remains active as long as the button
is pressed.

Switching the torque signal on/off

This can be used to set the acoustic signal that sounds whenever 75%
of the currently set torque value is exceeded.
➢ Touch the Acoustic Signal key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the torque acoustic signal is
activated.
Saving settings
The following settings can be saved for the selected work step in the
Implantology program:
● Speed and torque [→ 131]
● NaCl cooling and NaCl cooling quantity
In addition, the system will save the following settings that apply to the
entire treatment:
● Presetting of NaCl rinsing and NaCl rinsing amount [→ 134]
● Torque signal [→ 135]

IMPORTANT
The system will always save the entire treatment, including the step-
independent settings of the treatment and the specific settings of all
treatment steps, not just those of the current work step.

ü The corresponding settings are made.

ü The Implantology program is displayed.
➢ Press and hold the Memory key (> 2 s).
Ä An acoustic signal sounds. The settings you have made will be
saved for every work step and the entire treatment session.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 135
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.14.2.7 Preparing the treatment center for sterile operation

The requirements for sterile operation must be met for surgical
procedures. Work only with the cursor control to avoid touching the user
interface.
Covering the dentist element with a sterile drape
The dentist element and tray can be covered with a surgical drape to
allow for sterile operation.
For the Sinius with sliding track and Sinius TS a rectangle must be cut
out of the drape to allow for operation and visibility of the EasyTouch.
In order to connect the BL Implant motor hose on the Sinius CS, the
instrument holder must be removed before covering with a sterile drape.
To do this, remove all instruments one after the other and allow them to
hang down in front of the dentist element. Lift the instrument holder by
the front edge until the clamps are released and the holder can be
removed.
On the Sinius CS without a tray, the BL Implant motor hose must be
threaded through the swivel arm. The motor is then positioned on the
instrument holder that is covered with a sterile drape.
If the Sinius CS dentist element is equipped with a tray, we recommend
removing the standard motor with the swivel arm. Let the BL Implant
motor hose hang down in front of or next to the dentist element. Position
the motor on the tray in the separate motor holder (see below).
When using this method, be sure to activate the implantology treatment
function before detaching the swivel arm. To do this, touch the
Treatment key in the start program. Then take the burr drive assigned to
implant treatment (orange dot). As long as the treatment function is not
switched off, you can alternate between the implant treatment and the
start program.
Use of separate motor holder
When the instrument holder of the dentist element is inaccessible due to
the surgical drape, the burr drive being used can be deposited in a
separate motor holder. This holder is set on the dentist element or the
instrument holder.
The motor holder can be sterilized.
To reorder the motor holder, see "Spare parts and
consumables" [→ 270].
Attaching the instrument hose cover
The instrument hoses cannot be sterilized. Therefore, the instrument
hose of the bur drive used must be covered with a sterile paper sleeve.
The instrument hose sleeves can be ordered from a specialist dealer.

63 22 726 D3561
136 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.14.3 Endodontics

CAUTION
For the endodontics function, only Dentsply Sirona Endo 6:1 (SN
6407 and above / July 2010) and Endo 6 L contra-angle handpieces
may be used.
Instruments from other manufacturers can lead to malfunctions. Third-
party instruments may be improperly calibrated for endodontics.
➢ For endodontics, use Dentsply Sirona Endo 6:1 (SN 6407 and
above / July 2010) or Endo 6 L contra-angle handpieces.
➢ Check whether the transmission ratio on the touchscreen agrees
with the value specified on the contra-angle handpiece being
used.

4.5.14.3.1 File selection

A list of the files available for this endodontic treatment is displayed over
the full height of the touchscreen in the Endodontics program. This
allows five files to be displayed at the same time.
The speed and torque values preset or set for the selected files are
automatically used.

CAUTION
The parameters of the filing systems can be changed by the
respective manufacturer. Therefore, please make sure to always
check the specifications of the respective manufacturer prior to use.

ü An endodontic treatment is selected.

ü The Endodontics program is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to select the file that you would like to use.
or
➢ Select the endo file directly by touching the corresponding list entry.
Ä The selected file is highlighted orange.
Tip: The four keys that are marked with cursor positions (blue/orange)
can be operated with the foot switch even when the cursor control is not
activated.

IMPORTANT
Background shading of files
Files are displayed on the touchscreen with or without a white
background. Files, for which the speed or the torque were changed,
are highlighted with a transparent background.

CAUTION
Root canal files are subject to material fatigue
Fatigued files may break during treatment.
➢ Use files only for the service life specified by the manufacturer.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 137
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

CAUTION
The parameters of the filing systems can be changed by the
respective manufacturer. Therefore, please make sure to always
check the specifications of the respective manufacturer prior to use.

4.5.14.3.2 Calibrating the burr drive

Calibration is required at the start of treatment, every time the contra-
angle handpiece is changed, and every time the contra-angle
handpiece is lubricated.Recalibration is not necessary when a file is
changed.Calibrating the motor" />
The contra-angle handpiece is automatically checked during calibration.
This includes a measurement of motor current at different speeds to
assess the properties of the system.

CAUTION
To ensure proper calibration, use only Dentsply Sirona instruments.

ü The Endodontics program is displayed on the touchscreen.

1. Attach the contra-angle handpiece that you would like to use for the
treatment to the electric motor.
2. Insert a file in the contra-angle handpiece. This ensures that the file
is taken into account in the measurement.
3. Touch the Calkey on the touchscreen.
or
➢ Press the right button of the foot control.
Ä The button flashes orange.
4. Hold down the foot control throughout the duration of the calibration.
Ä The Calkey continues to flash. During calibration, increasing
speeds are set on the motor. If the burr drive is calibrated, the
key permanently remains highlighted orange. Calibration is then
completed.
4.5.14.3.3 Setting the direction of rotation
The direction of rotation can be changed only with the motor stopped.
Counterclockwise rotation is performed without torque limitation. The
torque setting keys are hidden when counterclockwise rotation is
selected.
ü The Endodontics program is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. Touch the CCW Rotation key on the touchscreen.
or
➢ Press the left button of the foot control.
Ä For counterclockwise rotation: The CCW Rotation key is
highlighted orange and an orange CCW arrow appears.
For clockwise rotation: The CCW Rotation key is displayed gray
and the orange CCW arrow disappears.
After you start the electric motor with the foot control, an audible
warning signal sounds 6 times if counterclockwise rotation is activated.

63 22 726 D3561
138 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.14.3.4 Using reciprocal rotating files

For endodontic treatment with reciprocating rotating files, the sequence
of the files and the preset values recommended by the manufacturer
cannot be changed.
The keys for setting the speed and torque and the counterclockwise key
are hidden.
If the treatment center is equipped with the ApexLocator option, it can
also be used with reciprocating rotating files.

4.5.14.3.5 Using the ApexLocator

ü The treatment center is prepared for apex measurements using the
instrument, see section "Preparing to use the ApexLocator" [→ 103].
ü The Endodontics program is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. Select a file, see "Selecting a file" [→ 137]. If necessary, change the
preset speed and torque, see "Setting the speed and
torque" [→ 141].
2. You can set the motor so that it stops automatically when the
physiological apex is reached. If you want to use the automatic
motor stop, this can be preset in the Endodontics sub-screen. The
automatic motor stop can be combined with the Auto-Reverse
function, see "Switching the automatic motor stop of the
ApexLocator on/off" [→ 143].

IMPORTANT
Preventing incorrect measurements
When performing the apex measurement, wear non-conductive
gloves to avoid measurement errors caused by unwanted leakage
current.
During the measurement, the instrument must not come into contact
with the patient's mucosa, metallic tooth restorations, or the mucosal
electrode. It is recommended to pull the silicone isolation sleeve over
the handpiece and perform the treatment using a cofferdam.

3. Attach the previously selected file to the handpiece.

4. Short the electrical measurement system. Plug in the files and hold
them directly against the mucosal electrode. This cancels out any
inaccuracies caused by jumps in impedance in the measurement
setup (standardization).
Ä If a short signal is heard and the distance display appears with
no bars, standardization was successful. If not, check the
electrical connections for signs of damage.
5. Place the mucosal electrode in the patient's mouth and perform the
treatment. Activate the bur using the foot pedal.
Ä The measured root canal depth is displayed by a colored bar in
the distance display. For more information, please refer to
"Distance display" [→ 105].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 139
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

For manual measurement using the file clamp, you can change directly
from the Endodontics program to the Start sub-screen.
ü Endodontics treatment is activated.
1. Return the endo handpiece to the instrument holder.

Ä The Start program is displayed with the treatment function

activated.
2. Conduct a manual measurement using the file clamp.

Ä When a signal is detected via the file clamp, the Start sub-
screen appears automatically with manual measurement
activated. The function cannot be switched off.
3. Remove the endo handpiece from the holder again.
Ä The display switches back to the Endodontics program. Apex
measurement is again done via the handpiece.

63 22 726 D3561
140 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.14.3.6 Functions in the sub-screens

Opening the endodontics sub-screen
Settings, such as changing the preselected speed and torque
values [→ 141], or removing a file from the sequence [→ 144], are file-
specific. They apply only to the file selected from the file list. Therefore
please double-check which file is selected from the list before opening
the Endodontics sub-screen.
ü The Endodontics program is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to select the file whose settings you would
like to change.
Ä The selected file is highlighted orange.

2. Touch the Sub-screen key.

Ä The Endodontics sub-screen is displayed.

3. Touch the sub-screen key again to activate the second sub-screen.

Ä The second Endodontics sub-screen is displayed.

➢ Perform the settings as described in the following sections:

Setting the speed and torque

If you do not wish to work with the standard parameters of the file, you
can set them yourself.
In the Treatment function, the speed and torque values of the contra-
angle handpiece, and not those of the motor, are specified. The control
electronics of the burr drive calculate the motor control based on the
contra-angle handpiece gear reduction and the speed and torque
settings.
1. Select a file from the file list of the Endodontics program to change
its speed and torque values. Touch the ↑ and ↓ keys.
or

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 141
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

➢ Touch the file in the file list.

Ä The selected file is highlighted orange.
2. Switch to the Endodontics sub-screen and use the – and + keys to
set the speed and torque of the contra-angle handpiece. You can
also hold down the keys for this purpose.
Ä The selected speed is displayed in the first line in rpm
(revolutions per minute); the second line indicates the speed in
Ncm (NewtonCentimeters).

IMPORTANT
Torque adjustment
The maximum adjustable torque depends on the system motor and
the speed settings.

CAUTION
Improperly selected speeds and torque values endanger the patient.
Treatment errors, e.g. breaking of a file, may result from incorrect
settings.
➢ Observe the manufacturer's instructions regarding file systems.

CAUTION
For the endodontics function, only Dentsply Sirona Endo 6:1 (SN
6407 and above / July 2010) and Endo 6 L contra-angle handpieces
may be used.
Instruments from other manufacturers can lead to malfunctions. Third-
party instruments may be improperly calibrated for endodontics.
➢ For endodontics, use Dentsply Sirona Endo 6:1 (SN 6407 and
above / July 2010) or Endo 6 L contra-angle handpieces.
➢ Check whether the transmission ratio on the touchscreen agrees
with the value specified on the contra-angle handpiece being
used.

Switching AutoReverse ON/OFF

A setting can be made so that the bur drive automatically switches to
counterclockwise rotation when the preset torque value is reached.
If your treatment center is equipped with the ApexLocator option, you
can set the bur drive to stop automatically at a preset distance from the
apex, see “Switching the automatic motor stop of the ApexLocator on/
off” [→ 143]. If the AutoReverse function is switched on, the next time
the foot pedal is activated following a motor stop, the motor is switched
to counterclockwise rotation. When the file is withdrawn, the bur drive
automatically switches back to clockwise rotation.
➢ Touch the AutoRev key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the AutoReverse function is
activated.

63 22 726 D3561
142 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Turning on/off the automatic motor stop of the ApexLocator

If your treatment center is equipped with the ApexLocator option, you
can set the motor to stop at the physiological apex. The motor stop can
be combined with the AutoReverse function, see “Switching the
AutoReverse function on/off”.
1. Touch the Apex stop key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the automatic motor stop is
activated.
2. Use the – and + keys to set the required apex distance from 1.5 to
0. If the distance is 0, the motor does not stop until it reaches the
physiological apex. Please note that the distance values are not a
metric length measurement!
Ä The set distance is displayed to the left of the – and + keys. The
preset motor stop position is displayed in the Endodontics
dialog as a black triangle to the right of the distance display
below the text "Stop".
Apex settings are stored automatically when the treatment is completed.

Switching the torque signal and apex signal tones on/off

This can be used to set the acoustic signal that sounds whenever 75%
of the currently set torque value is exceeded.
If your treatment center is equipped with the ApexLocator option, this
button also switches the apex signal tones on or off. A beep is emitted
when the apex or a set motor stop position is reached. If the
AutoReverse function is activated, three acoustic signals are emitted
when the motor switches to counterclockwise rotation. For more
information on the acoustic signals during apex measurement, see the
section "Acoustic signals" [→ 108].
➢ Press the Torque signal and apex acoustic signals key.
Ä If the key is marked in orange, the torque signal and the apex
acoustic signals are switched on.
Switching the apex distance signal tones on/off
If your treatment center is equipped with the ApexLocator option, you
can adjust a setting so that distance signal tones are emitted in addition
to the graphical distance display. If the automatic motor stop is switched
off, the intervals between the acoustic signals vary according to the
measured distance from the physiological apex. If this function is
switched on, the acoustic signals vary depending on the measured
distance to the preset motor stop position. For more information on the
acoustic signals during apex measurement, see the section "Acoustic
signals" [→ 108].
➢ Press the Apex distance acoustic signals key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the apex distance acoustic
signal is activated.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 143
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Remove file from sequence

Individual files can be removed from the sequence.

IMPORTANT
Automatic file system reset
When the treatment function is completed, the files removed from the
file system are inserted again and changed speed and torque values
are reset according to recommendations of the file manufacturers.
Only treatments created by the user retain changes to file systems
after the treatment function is exited, provided that the changes were
saved previously. See “Copying existing endodontic
treatment" [→ 145]. User-created treatments are marked with a pencil
symbol in the Treatment selection program.
The ApexLocator settings, the auto-reverse function and the acoustic
signals are always saved automatically when the treatment function is
exited.

1. Select a file from the file list of the Endodontics program to remove
it from the sequence. Touch the ↑ and ↓ keys.
or
➢ Touch the file in the file list.
Ä The selected position is highlighted orange.
2. Switch to the Endodontics sub-screen and touch the Delete key > 2
s.
Ä The selected file is removed from the sequence.
Switch instrument light on/off
The Dentsply Sirona Endo 6L handpiece is equipped with a light guide.
➢ Switch the instrument light on or off with the Instrument light key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the instrument light can be
activated using the foot pedal.
Speed foot control
The use of the speed foot control is not available in the Endodontics
program!

63 22 726 D3561
144 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.5.14.3.7 Endodontic treatment administration

Up to three endodontic treatments can be added to the treatment list of
the Treatment selection screen. The following functions are for
managing the endodontic treatment list:
● Copying, renaming and, if necessary, deleting endodontic
treatments
● Adding specified file systems to the endodontic treatment list
Endodontic treatments using rotating files cannot be changed.
Opening the endodontic management program
ü The Start program is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. Touch the Treatment key.

Ä The Treatment selection program is displayed.

2. Before selecting a treatment, touch the Endodontic management

key.

Ä The Endodontic management program is displayed.

Copying an existing endodontic treatment

A treatment can be copied and saved in the treatment list under a
different name. Then the settings can be changed.
This procedure allows for making changes to factory-preset endodontic
treatments (without a pencil symbol).
The treatment center enables you to create up to three endodontic
treatments. After the third treatment has been added, the Copy
endodontic treatment key disappears.
1. Touch the button of an endodontic treatment that you would like to
copy.
Ä The selected button is highlighted orange.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 145
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

2. Touch the Copy endodontic treatment key.

Ä A keyboard is displayed. The name of the endodontic treatment
to be copied is displayed in the text box.
3. Enter the name of the copy. Confirm your entry with the OK key.
Ä The keyboard is hidden. The new endodontic treatment is
displayed in the treatment list with the designation you entered.

Rename endodontic treatment

When copying endodontic treatments, the user must name them
accordingly. They also can be renamed later on to facilitate corrections
and editing.

IMPORTANT
Factory specified endodontic treatments cannot be renamed. If an
endodontic treatment without a pencil symbol is selected, the
Rename endodontic treatment key is hidden.

1. Touch the button of an endodontic treatment that you would like to

rename.
Ä The selected button is highlighted orange.

2. Touch the Rename endodontic treatment key.

Ä A keyboard is displayed.

3. Rename the endodontic treatment. Confirm your entry with the OK

key.
Ä The keyboard is hidden. The designation of the endodontic
treatment is changed in the treatment list.

Deleting an endodontic treatment from the list

If user-created endodontic treatments are no longer required or must be
replaced, they can be deleted from the treatment list. Endodontic
treatments that were preset by factory default can only be removed by
deselecting the corresponding file system, see "Adding a file system to
the treatment list“ [→ 147].

63 22 726 D3561
146 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

1. Touch the button of an endodontic treatment that you would like to

delete.
Ä The selected button is highlighted orange.

2. Touch the Delete endodontic treatment key for more than 2

seconds.
Ä The selected endodontic treatment is deleted. It is no longer
displayed in the treatment list.
Adding a file system to the treatment list
The treatment center software contains the most popular endodontic file
systems with the speed and torque values recommended by the
manufacturer in a library. The required file systems can be added to the
endodontic treatment list via a pick list.
1. Touch the Add file system key.
Ä A list of the most popular file systems is displayed.

2. Select the file system that you would like to add to the endodontic
treatment list. You can scroll in the list with the ↑ and ↓ keys. Touch
the button of the desired file system (multiple file systems can also
be selected).
Ä The selected buttons are highlighted orange.

3. Touch the Return key.

Ä The Treatment administration screen is displayed. The selected
file systems are displayed in the endodontic treatment list of the
Treatment selection screen.
The treatment center enables you to add up to three endodontic
treatments to the treatment list. When the third endodontic treatment is
selected, a symbol appears on the touchscreen. This symbol indicates
that the maximum number (total number of self-created and in the
library selected treatments) has been reached.

IMPORTANT
Expanding a file system via a software update
File systems previously added to the treatment list are not
automatically adjusted during a software update. As a consequence,
new files are not immediately displayed in the file list.
➢ Deselect and then immediately re-activate the file system
concerned.
Ä After you select endodontic treatment, the added files are
displayed in the file list.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 147
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.6 Assistant element

4.6.1 Maximum load capacity
The maximum load of the assistant element is 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs). A skid-
proof silicone mat can also be used.

CAUTION
To prevent injuries caused by falling objects, never place anything on
the support arm of the assistant element.

4.6.2 Positioning

CAUTION
The assistant element can be positioned above or below the patient
chair.
The patient could be pinched during chair movements or the chair
could be damaged.
➢ Move the assistant element out of the collision zone before
moving the patient chair.

IMPORTANT
Safety stop
In case of collision, a safety system in the support arm stops the chair
movement.

4.6.3 Fixed keys on the assistant element

The functions assigned to the keys can be switched on/off on the

assistant element. The settings screens can be opened only on the
touchscreen of the dentist element. To make settings, see "Fixed keys
on the dentist element" [→ 84].

63 22 726 D3561
148 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.6.3.1 Tumbler filling

If the your treatment center is equipped with the Tumbler filling option
with automatic sensor control, see “Tumbler filling with automatic sensor
control” [→ 158].
1. Place the tumbler under the tumbler filler.

2. Press the Tumbler Filling fixed key.

Ä The tumbler is filled with water for the preset time. The LED in
the key lights up during the tumbler filling process.
Pressing the Tumbler Filling fixed key again stops the filling function
immediately.

4.6.3.2 Flushing of the cuspidor bowl

The flushing function can be used for rough cleaning of the cuspidor
during treatment.
➢ Press the Flushing fixed key.
Ä The flushing function is activated for the preset flushing time.
The LED in the key lights up during the flushing function.

4.6.3.3 Operating light

Repeatedly press the fixed key Operating light to set the following
switching positions at the assistant element:
1. Switched on: The operating light is switched on at the preset
brightness level.
2. Composite function: This function is used to prevent premature
curing of composite materials.
3. Switched off
➢ Press the Operating light fixed key, repeat if necessary.
Ä The operating light switches to “on,” “composite function” or
“off”. When the operating light is in use, the LED on the fixed
key lights up on the dentist and assistant elements.

4.6.3.4 Chair programs S and 0

The chair programs Mouth rinsing position (S) and Entry/exit position (0)
can be selected on the assistant element:
For details, see "Moving the patient chair via chair programs" [→ 72].
Mouth rinsing position and Entry/exit position programs can also be
programmed from the assistant element side, see "Programming chair
programs and shock positioning" [→ 77].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 149
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.6.3.5 Hash key

The Hash key on the assistant element can be configured in the setup
program. The key allows the user to switch the X-ray viewer or the white
screen function on the Sivision monitor on or off or alternatively to
activate the bell or hash relay, see “Setting function of the Hash key on
assistant element” [→ 195].
The white screen function can be used if the treatment center has no X-
ray viewer, but is equipped with a Sivision monitor, see "Show/hide key
for white screen on Sivision monitor." [→ 196]
➢ Press the Hash key.
Ä If the hash key is set to control the X-ray viewer or the bell or
hash relay, the LED of the key lights up when the function is
activated.
If the white screen function is controlled in Sivision monitor
using the hash key, the LED of the hash key does not light up. It
is lit only when the X-ray viewer is switched on. In addition, the
White screen key is no longer shown in orange in the Start
program.

63 22 726 D3561
150 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.6.4 Suction handpieces

The assistant element can be equipped with a maximum of three
suction handpieces.

CAUTION
The tip attaches itself to the oral mucosa.
The patient's oral mucosa can be irritated by the vacuum.
➢ Make sure that you hold the suction tip in such a way that the
opening cannot accidentally attach to the oral mucosa. Dentsply
Sirona recommends using spray aspirator cannulas with
additional air intake, see"Spare parts, Consumables" [→ 270].

CAUTION
The spray aspirator can be switched off with the 4-way foot switch.
Due to the lack of suction flow, fluid may run back out of the spray
aspirator and into the patient's mouth.
➢ It must be ensured that there is a suction flow before holding the
spray aspirator in the mouth.
➢ Always remove the spray aspirator from the patient's mouth
before switching it off.

NOTICE
Suction removal of metal oxides from blasting devices
Observe the safety information on the "Vacuum system" [→ 18].

Tip: The factory-set suction power can be adjusted in the water unit by a
service engineer.

Spray aspirator
You can angle the suction handpiece by turning it.
To prevent completely interrupting the suction flow when the cannulae
attach to the oral mucosa, spray aspirator cannulae with lateral air
intakes A should be used. This prevents backflow from the hose into the
oral cavity if the cannula becomes attached.
A The thick suction hose can be used for surgical suction. To insert a
surgical cannula, please attach the adapter supplied.

It can be adjusted so that the suction flow of the spray aspirator can be
interrupted or reactivated by pressing the 4-way foot control at the base
of the chair in any direction; see"Linking the spray aspirator to the 4-
way foot control" [→ 194].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 151
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Saliva ejector
A curved tip that can be placed in the corner of the mouth is provided
for saliva ejection.

Surgical suction device

The surgical cannula can be inserted directly into the saliva ejector
handpiece.

63 22 726 D3561
152 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.6.5 Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe

The function is described in the chapter on the dentist element, see
"Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe" [→ 121].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 153
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.6.6 Mini LED curing light

The curing light is used to cure composite material with short-wave light.

4.6.6.1 Safety instructions

LED beam CAUTION

exit aperture
The curing light contains powerful LEDs. In accordance with IEC
62471, they are classified in risk group 2 with the light bar removed.
➢ Do not stare into the beam path for longer periods, as this can
IMPORTANT! damage your eyes.
Potentially hazardous ➢ Do not observe the light aperture with optical instruments which
radiation!
can decrease the beam cross-section (e.g. magnifying lenses).
➢ Do not under any circumstances stare into the beam path when
the glass rod is removed.
➢ Never aim the laser beam at the user's or the patient's eyes, even
if he or she is wearing protective goggles.
➢ Never work without the glare shield.
➢ Never look into the light reflected by the tooth surface.
➢ Aim the light only at the treatment area in the oral cavity.

Any condensation occurring in the handpiece of the mini LED may

cause impairment (e.g. fogging of the LED). When moving the
handpiece from a cool environment to a warm room, always wait for it to
reach room temperature before putting it into operation.
Curing lights must not be used on persons who are suffering from or
have in the past been afflicted by photobiological reactions (including
solar urticaria and erythropoietic porphyria). Nor should they be used on
persons currently being treated with any medications which increase
one’s sensitivity to light (including methoxsalene and chlorotetracycline).
Any persons who have in the past suffered from retinal or eye lens
disorders or have undergone eye surgery, especially for cataracts, must
consult their medical eye specialist before undergoing treatment with
the mini LED. Caution is advisable even if the patient gives his or her
consent, since the light intensity can cause accidents.
It is especially advisable to always wear appropriate protective goggles.
For the frequency range of the light, refer to “Technical data” [→ 157].

4.6.6.2 Symbols on the mini LED

These symbols are on the mini LED. They have the following meanings:
Observe the operating instructions

Wear eye protection

63 22 726 D3561
154 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.6.6.3 Connecting the Mini L.E.D.

The Mini L.E.D. is connected to the assistant element in holder 1.
E D C B 1. Connect the supply cable A to the treatment center.
2. Screw the hose coupling B onto the Mini LED C.
3. Screw the sterilized light guide D onto the Mini L.E.D. C. Make sure
to insert the fiber optic correctly.
Ä The fiber optic clicks into place audibly.
A 4. Slip the glare shield E onto the light guide D.
Ä The glare shield protects your eyes against reflecting curing
light

4.6.6.4 Functional description

Controls

A B C E G I J

D F H

A Glare shield F Pulse curing mode light

B Fiber optics G "Soft start" mode lamp
C On/off button H Mode button
D Status control lamp I Straight handpiece
E Quick curing mode light J Supply cable

Status control lamp

The status control lamp (D) signals the following states:

Status control lamp Mode

Off Instrument in holder
green Normalbetrieb
red, flashing Overheat protection

The mini LED has three operating modes, which you can select with the
Mode H key:

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 155
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Quick curing mode

In the quick curing mode, the Mini LED operates at full power for 10
seconds.
In this mode, the light intensity output is as follows:
0 5 10 Sec. ²
● 1250 mW/cm (± 10%) with the standard light guide, dia. 7.5 mm
²
● 2000 mW/cm (± 10%) with the booster light guide, dia. 5.5 mm

Pulsed curing mode

In the pulsed curing mode, the Mini LED radiates in 10 consecutive light
pulses of 1 s each. There is a 250 ms break between the individual
pulses.
0 12.5 Sec.

"Soft start" mode

The “soft start” mode features:
²
● A 10-second “soft start” from 0 to 1250 mW/cm , or from 0 to 2000
²
mW/cm with the "booster light guide," dia. 5.5 mm.
0 5 10 15 20 Sec.
● Full power for 10 seconds.

4.6.6.5 Operating the Mini LED

IMPORTANT
Contact with the material to be cured
Make sure that the light guide never touches the material to be cured,
as this may cause damage to the light guide and reduce its
effectiveness.

When the Mini LED is removed from its holder, the operating mode last
used before it was deposited is selected.
1. Use the Mode key H to select the quick curing, pulse curing or "soft
start" mode.
Ä The corresponding lamp shows which mode is selected. The
Mini LED is ready for operation.
2. Hold the light guide as close as possible to the composite material
surface to be photopolymerized.

3. Start the curing cycle. Press the on/off button C briefly.

Ä An acoustic signal sounds. The curing cycle is started.
Ä The acoustic signal sounds every 5 seconds.
Ä The end of the curing cycle is also indicated by an acoustic signal.
You can interrupt the curing cycle immediately by pressing the on/off
button C.
For care and cleaning, see "Disinfecting and sterilizing the Mini LED
curing light" [→ 225].

63 22 726 D3561
156 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.6.6.6 Technical data

General Technical Data on Mini L.E.D. Model: Mini L.E.D.
Weight of handpiece without 105 g
hose:
Dimensions: Dia. 23 mm x 240 mm
Current consumption of hand- 5 V DC / 0.65 A
piece:
Thermal safety: Overheat protection
1
Optical specification of Mini L.E.D. Wavelength: 420 nm – 480 nm
Max. intensity: at 450 nm
2
Light power dia. 7.5 mm (stan- 1250 mW/cm
dard version):
2
Light power dia. 5.5 mm (avail- 2000 mW/cm
able from Satelec):
Light power: 450 mW – 500 mW
Classification acc. to IEC 62471 Risk group 2 with light bar re-
moved
1
Only composite materials can be cured which react to the stated
®
wavelength. The Mini L.E.D. is not suitable, e.g. for Lucirin (absorption
maximum 380 nm).
Hazard distance (HD) and exposure HD EHV
hazard value (EHV) according to IEC
Blue light 907 mm 20.6
62471
Free group
Blue light 323 mm 2.6
Risk group 1
Blue light – 0.01
Risk group 2
Thermal hazard to – 0.97
the cornea
Free group

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 157
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.7 Water unit

4.7.1 Swiveling the cuspidor bowl
The cuspidor on the water unit can be manually swiveled approx. 110
mm toward the patient chair.

IMPORTANT
Chair movements with cuspidor swiveled in
With the cuspidor bowl swiveled in, the chair cannot be moved. This
prevents the patient from colliding with the cuspidor. Swing the
cuspidor outward before initiating chair movement.

4.7.2 Tumbler filling with automatic sensor control

The automatic sensor control is not available in all countries.
With this tumbler filler, the sensor control automatically detects the filling
level of the tumbler.
If the tumbler is removed before the preset filling level has been
reached, the water flow stops immediately.

Filling the tumbler

ü The tumbler must not be transparent.
ü The tumbler must always be placed in the center of the area
provided for it.
➢ Place the tumbler under the tumbler filler.
Ä The tumbler is filled automatically.
Ä After the preset filling level has been reached, the water flow stops
automatically.
If required, the tumbler can be refilled manually by the Tumbler filling
key; see "Setting the tumbler filling function" [→ 86].

IMPORTANT
Tumbler filling after switch-on
If an empty tumbler is standing below the tumbler filler when the
treatment center is switched on, the tumbler will not be filled
automatically. To activate automatic tumbler filling, remove the
tumbler briefly and then put it back again.

63 22 726 D3561
158 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Setting the filling level

The tumbler filling level can be preset.
1. Open the maintenance flap (A) on the base of the water unit.
2. Set the filling level with control knob B.

4.7.3 Adjusting the water amount for flushing

The water quantity and water pressure for flushing can be set using a
valve.
1. Open the maintenance flap (A) on the base of the water unit.
2. Adjust the water amount with the control knob C.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 159
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.7.4 Self-sufficient water supply

If the water quality of the public drinking water supply is not suitable for
treating patients, the treatment center can be operated with a self-
sufficient water supply.
In this case, food-grade water is mixed with the disinfectant for the
water lines in a 100:1 ratio (1 liter of water, 10 ml of the disinfectant)
and filled into the fresh water bottle or disinfectant tank of the water unit.
The disinfectant reduces microbial growth in the water lines.
The self-sufficient water supply should be a temporary operating
condition only if public drinking water supply is contaminated, not a
permanent operating condition.
The cuspidor is still flushed using the public drinking water supply.
The self-sufficient water supply function is available only if the treatment
center is equipped with an integrated water disinfection system.

CAUTION
Microorganisms can multiply in the water.
These microorganisms could increase the risk of damage to one’s
health.
➢ Dentsply Sirona recommends never operating the treatment
center without the disinfectant for disinfecting the water lines.
➢ Mix fresh water for the self-sufficient water supply every day. At
the end of the work day, the remaining water must be flushed out
of the disinfectant tank using the tumbler filling function.
➢ Check the bacteria count in the water of the treatment center at
regular intervals. In particular if no disinfection system is available
or no disinfectant can be used for disinfecting the water lines. See
"Microbiological water test" [→ 203].

CAUTION
If self-sufficient water supply lasts more than 28 days in exceptional
cases, the treatment center must be manually sanitized.
Please follow the sanitization procedure for operation with self-
sufficient water supply described in the section "Sanitizing the
treatment center manually" [→ 257].
Ensure that the "Days to next sanitization" display does not appear on
the touchscreen status bar when operating with a self-sufficient water
supply.

NOTICE
Always fill food-grade distilled water (< 100 colony forming units/ml),
never drinking water, e.g. from beverage bottles, due to the minerals
it contains.
Aqua purificata or aqua destillata can be used as distilled water.

The desired mode of operation is set using the touchscreen.

63 22 726 D3561
160 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Opening Start sub-screen

ü The Start program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ In the Standard Start program: Touch the Sub-screen key.
In the EasyMode Start program: Press the Chair program change
key.

Ä The Start sub-screen is displayed.

Changing disinfection system to self-sufficient water supply

If the Aqua key is displayed gray in the Start sub-screen, the treatment
center uses water from the public drinking water supply. If the key is
highlighted orange, the treatment center is switched to self-sufficient
water supply. To change the mode of operation, proceed as follows:
1. Press and hold the Aqua key (> 2 s).

Ä The Aqua key flashes orange until the disinfectant tank is

emptied. In addition, the Switching to self-sufficient water
supply display appears.
Ä If there is still disinfectant for disinfecting the water lines in the
tank, it is rinsed down the drain. This can take up to 6 minutes.
The Refill water display then appears on the touchscreen.

2. Mix distilled water with the disinfectant for disinfecting the water
lines at a ratio of 100:1 (1 liter of water, 10 ml of the disinfectant)
and fill this into the disinfectant tank of the water unit. The tank has
a capacity of approx. 1.3 liters. It is full when the water surface is
visible on the filter of the filling funnel.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 161
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Ä In the Start sub-screen, the Aqua key is highlighted in orange.

The disinfection system is now changed to the self-sufficient
water supply.
If the treatment center is changed to self-sufficient water supply, the
Sanitization key is hidden in the Start sub-screen. Without disinfectant
for the water lines, it is not possible to sanitize the water lines
interactively. The treatment center must be sanitized manually, see
"Sanitizing the treatment center manually" [→ 257].

Resetting the disinfection system to the public drinking water supply

and the disinfectant for the water lines
Resetting the disinfection system to public drinking water is performed
in the same manner as changing to self-sufficient water supply. Instead
of the Refill water display, the Refill disinfectant for the water lines
display appears on the touchscreen.
➢ Sanitize the water lines after switching to the public drinking water
supply, see "Interactive sanitization of the treatment center" [→ 249].

Level control
If the Refill water or Refill disinfectant for the water lines display appears
during the treatment, the reservoir is almost empty (< 400 ml). By
pressing the Return key, the display can be hidden and the treatment
can be continued. Refill the tank as soon as possible.

IMPORTANT
400 ml are approximately sufficient for:
➢ 6.5 min. spray operation (motor, high-speed handpiece, scaler) or
➢ 2.5 min. Sprayvit Moperation or
➢ 5 x tumbler fillings
The actual values depend on the instrument types and settings used.

63 22 726 D3561
162 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.8 Tray
4.8.1 Tray on the support arm (for Sinius)
Maximum load capacity
Sinius treatment centers as a sliding track device can be equipped with
a tray on a support arm.
The maximum load of the tray is 1 kg (2.2 lbs).

Removing the tray

1. Hold the tray tightly.
2. Open the lock by swiveling the lever downwards.
3. Remove the tray.
4. Let the lever fall back into its original position.
To insert the tray, simply guide it into the mount. The mechanism locks
automatically.

CAUTION
If the tray is not locked in place, it can disengage from the tray holder.
➢ After installing the tray, make sure it is securely attached to the
tray holder.

Adjusting the height of the tray

The tray is supported to rotate on a height-adjustable support arm.

NOTICE
A locking brake blocks the height adjustment.
The support arm may be damaged if you adjust the height with the
locking brake applied.
➢ Never, under any circumstances, try to adjust the support arm
with the locking brake securely tightened. Release the locking
brake first.

1. Loosen the brake knob A slightly.

2. Set the tray to the desired position.
3. Retighten the brake knob slightly.
Ä The tray can thus be subjected to different loads within limits
without lowering its position.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 163
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Removing the brake knob

The brake knob of the support arm can be removed if it is found to be
disturbing.
1. Loosen the brake knob at the safety screw A.
2. Remove the brake knob B.
To reattach it, insert the hexagonal pin of the brake knob B in the
connector on the support arm. Tighten the safety screw A.

4.8.2 Tray on the Sinius CS dentist element

Maximum load capacity
Sinius CS treatment centers can be equipped with a tray that is
mounted underneath the dentist element. The tray holder is available in
two sizes for one or two standard trays.
The maximum load of the tray is 1 kg (2.2 lbs).

Removing the tray

1. Hold the tray tightly.
2. Open the lock by turning the lever downwards.
3. Remove the tray.
4. Let the lever fall back into its original position.
To insert the tray holder, simply guide it into the mount. The mechanism
locks automatically.

CAUTION
If the tray is not locked in place, it can disengage from the tray holder.
➢ After installing the tray, make sure it is securely attached to the
tray holder.

63 22 726 D3561
164 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.8.3 Tray on the Sinius TS dentist element

Maximum load capacity
Sinius TS treatment centers can be equipped with a tray mounted to the
left of the dentist element.
The maximum load of the tray is 1 kg (2.2 lbs).
With the Sinius TS, the total maximum load on the tray and dentist
element should not exceed 2 kg (4.4 lb). See "Maximum load capacity
of the dentist element." [→ 79]

Removing the tray

1. Hold the tray tightly.
2. Open the lock by swiveling the lever downwards.
3. Remove the tray.
4. Let the lever fall back into its original position.
To insert the tray, simply guide it into the mount. The mechanism locks
automatically.

CAUTION
If the tray is not locked in place, it can disengage from the tray holder.
➢ After installing the tray, make sure it is securely attached to the
tray holder.

Adjusting the height of the tray

The tray is attached to a height-adjustable telescope mount and can be
rotated.
1. Turn the locknut A in a counterclockwise direction (right-hand
groove).
B
B Ä The telescopic tube B is extended to the maximum length with a
pneumatic spring.
2. Press the telescopic tube B together to the desired height and
tighten the locknut A in a clockwise direction.

A
A unlock

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 165
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Adjusting the stiffness of the rotary joint

In the head of the tray holder there is a regulating screw for setting the
necessary exertion for turning the tray.
1. Remove the tray.
2. Grab under the front of the tray head cover with your fingers and
pull it up and off.
3. Turn the regulating screw to set the stiffness of the rotary joint.
Clockwise: Increase stiffness
Counterclockwise: Decrease stiffness
4. Put the cover back on the tray head. First put the nose on the rear
edge of the cover on the tray head. Then, fold the front of the cover
down until it locks in place.

4.8.4 Cup holder

A cup holder can be attached to the tray to collect waste. It is suitable
for disposable 0.2-liter cups.
For Sinius with sliding track and Sinius TS, the cup holder may not be
attached to the front edge of the tray.
The maximum load of the cup holder is 0.5 kg (1.1 lbs). The load on the
tray and the cup holder may not exceed a total of 1 kg (2.2 lbs).
The cup holder can be ordered from a specialized dealer. Please note
the different tray systems:

Treatment center Tray REF Cup holder REF

Sinius (sliding track 64 09 986 65 95 321
unit) and Sinius TS
Sinius CS 64 29 042 Holder for 65 95 339
two standard trays
64 29 059 Holder for 1
standard tray

63 22 726 D3561
166 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.9 Panoramic X-ray image viewer

The Sinius TS treatment center can be equipped with an X-ray viewer
on the support arm of the dentist element arm.
An X-ray viewer cannot be attached to the Sinius and Sinius CS
treatment centers.

4.9.1 Switching on/off the X-ray viewer or white screen on the

Sivision monitor
The white screen function can be used if the treatment center has no X-
ray viewer, but is equipped with a Sivision monitor, see "Show/hide key
for white screen on Sivision monitor." [→ 196]

WARNING
Misdiagnoses of X-ray images are possible
Use the white screen of the Sivision monitor not for diagnosis of X-ray
images. The light intensity of the monitor is not sufficient.

Via touchscreen
ü The Start dialog is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Touch the X-ray viewer key or the White screen key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the X-ray viewer is switched on
or the Sivision monitor is switched to white screen.

Via the assistant element

The Hash key on the assistant element can be configured in the setup
program. The key allows the user to switch the X-ray viewer or the white
screen function on the Sivision monitor on or off or alternatively to
activate the bell or hash relay, see “Setting function of the Hash key on
assistant element” [→ 195].
➢ Press the Hash key.
Ä If the hash key is set on the control of X-ray viewer or bell or
hash relay, the LED of the key lights up when the function is
activated.
If the White screen function is controlled in Sivision monitor
using the hash key, the LED of the hash key does not light up. It
is lit only when the X-ray viewer is switched on. In addition, the
White screen key is no longer shown in orange in the Start
program.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 167
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.9.2 Attaching the anti-glare film

An anti-glare film is supplied with the X-ray viewer for viewing intraoral
dental images.
1. Remove the three retaining clips (A).
A A

A
2. Use two of the retaining clips to clamp the anti-glare film (B) to the
upper edge of the X-ray viewer on the left and right.
B 3. Use the third retaining clip to clamp the intraoral dental image to the
upper edge of the X-ray viewer in the center.

63 22 726 D3561
168 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.10 Operating light

The operating light is attached to a multi-jointed support arm. It can be
easily adjusted to the work area using the handles. Brakes in the
support arm hold the operating light in the position to which it has been
adjusted.
The clearly defined light field illuminates the treatment area without
blinding the patient.
Tip: The ideal working distance between the light and the patient's
mouth is 70 cm/27.5 inches.

NOTICE
Also observe the operating instructions of your operating light.

4.10.1 Switching the operating light on/off

➢ Briefly press the Operating light fixed key on the dentist or assistant
element.
Ä When the operating light is switched on, the LED of the fixed
key lights up on the dentist and assistant elements.
The operating light is always switched on with the programmed
brightness level. The setting is programmed on the user interface of the
dentist element (see below).

A contactless sensor is mounted beneath the LEDview and LEDview

Plus operating lights. Using this sensor, the operating light can be
switched on/off or switched to the composite function using one hand
movement. The sensor control can be switched on and off via the

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 169
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

treatment center touchscreen. The distance at which the contactless

sensor will react to movements can also be adjusted.

4.10.2 Setting the brightness and sensor control of the LEDview

1. Press and hold the Operating Light fixed key on the dentist element
(> 2 s).

Ä The settings screen of the operating light is displayed on the

touchscreen.

2. Use the – and + keys to set the desired brightness of the operating
light (5 levels). The – key decreases the brightness and the + key
increases it.
3. Touch the Sensor control key.

Ä If the key is highlighted in orange, the operating light can be

controlled with the contactless sensor. The keys for adjusting
the operating distance are displayed.
4. Use the – and + keys to set the desired operating distance of the
contactless sensor (5 levels). The – key decreases the operating
distance and the + key increases it. You can try out the setting on
the operating light without leaving the setting program. The setting
should be selected so that the contactless sensor cannot be
operated unintentionally.
5. Touch the Sensor control key again to switch off the sensor control.
Ä The key is no longer highlighted in orange and the keys for
adjusting the operating distance are faded out.

4.10.3 Setting the brightness, color temperature, and sensor

control of the LEDview Plus
1. Press and hold the Operating Light fixed key on the dentist element
(> 2 s).

Ä The settings screen of the operating light is displayed on the

touchscreen.

2. Use the – and + keys to set the desired brightness of the operating
light (7 levels). The – key decreases the brightness and the + key
increases it.

63 22 726 D3561
170 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

3. Use the – and + keys to set the desired light temperature of the
operating light (3 levels). The – key decreases the light temperature
and the + key increases it.
4. Touch the Sensor control key.

Ä If the key is highlighted in orange, the operating light can be

controlled with the contactless sensor. The keys for adjusting
the operating distance are displayed.
5. Use the – and + keys to set the desired operating distance of the
contactless sensor (5 levels). The – key decreases the operating
distance and the + key increases it. You can try out the setting
directly on the operating light without leaving the setting program.
The setting should be selected so that the contactless sensor
cannot be operated unintentionally.
6. Touch the Sensor control key again to switch off the sensor control.
Ä The key is no longer highlighted in orange and the keys for
adjusting the operating distance are hidden.

4.10.4 Switching the dentist element composite function on/off

The composite function is used to prevent premature curing of
composite materials.
➢ Press the Composite function fixed key on the dentist element.
Ä When the composite function is switched on, the LED of the
Composite function fixed key lights up on the dentist element.
On the assistant element, the Operating light key lights up.

4.10.5 Activating operating light on the assistant element

Repeatedly press the Operating light fixed key to set the following
switching positions at the assistant element:
1. Switched on: The operating light is switched on at the preset
brightness level.
2. Composite function: This function is used to prevent premature
curing of composite materials.
3. Switched off
➢ Press the Operating light fixed key on the assistant element, several
times if necessary.
Ä The operating light switches to “on,” “composite function” or
“off”.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 171
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.11 X-ray tube unit

The Sinius, Sinius CS, and Sinius TS treatment centers can be
equipped with the Heliodent Plus X-ray tube unit. However, for the
Sinius CS, this is possible only if the dentist element is mounted in the
standard position at the water unit, see section "Positioning the dentist
element" [→ 80].
The X-ray tube unit is attached to the light post of the treatment center
using a multi-jointed support arm that can be adjusted both horizontally
and vertically. Brakes in the support arm hold the X-ray tube unit in the
position to which it has been adjusted.
The X-ray parameters are set on the wall adapter of the X-ray tube unit
or on a "remote timer".
The USB module for the Xios XG intraoral X-ray system can be
connected to the PC via the USB interface on the dentist and assistant
element. For details, please refer to the section "USB interface" [→ 189].

WARNING
The X-ray tube unit can be positioned within the movement range of
the patient chair.
Moving the patient chair may cause the patient to collide with the X-
ray tube unit or its support arm. The patient could be injured.
➢ Before moving the patient chair, position the X-ray tube unit to
make a collision with the patient or the patient chair impossible.

CAUTION
Gaps appear between the internal hinges when moving the support
arm.
Fingers may be crushed in these gaps.
➢ Ensure that you never place your fingers in the gaps between the
hinges, neither during operation nor for cleaning purposes.

IMPORTANT
See also the Heliodent Plus operating instructions.

63 22 726 D3561
172 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.12 Sivision Digital video system

The Sivision Digital video system enables intraoral and extraoral images
to be made. The SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera generates digital
image data that can be transmitted via a USB 2.0 port (high-speed
universal serial bus) to a connected PC and stored there. This computer
can then display the images on the Sivision monitor of the treatment
center.
The video images represent an outstanding possibility for improving
patient communication.

CAUTION
The video images are not suitable for diagnosis.

The Sivision Connect and/or Siucom Plus application must be installed

in order to transmit the camera images to the PC. Siucom Plus enables
PC control. Furthermore, a video application, e.g. Sidexis 4 or Sidexis
XG and/or SI Video must be installed on the PC in order to display the
camera images. For details, refer to the "Installation and configuration
of Siucom Plus / Sivision Connect" manual.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 173
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.12.1 Sivision monitor

22" DC monitor (REF 64 97 452 D3655)
The monitor is equipped with loudspeakers and a glass screen to
facilitate cleaning. For details, see "Operating Instructions for the 22
inch DC monitor".

WARNING
Monitors without approval must not be connected.
They endanger the product safety of the treatment center.
➢ Use only monitors that are approved according to IEC 60950-1,
IEC 62368-1 (office equipment) or IEC 60601-1 (medical
devices).

WARNING
Unsuitable devices can be connected to the loudspeaker port of the
monitor.
The connection of unsuitable devices endangers the product safety of
the treatment center.
➢ The loudspeaker port of the monitor may be connected only to a
device that complies with IEC 60950-1, IEC 62368-1 (office
equipment such as PCs) or IEC 60601-1 (medical devices).
Under no circumstances should it be connected e.g. to a stereo
system.

Attachment versions
Monitor on lamp support tube
The monitor can be rotated and swiveled.
Monitor on tray arm
The monitor can be rotated and swiveled.

CAUTION
The patient can collide with the monitor.
The patient's head could collide with the monitor during movement of
the patient chair or during use of the cuspidor.
➢ Make sure that the patient does not collide with the monitor.
Swivel the monitor out of the collision zone as soon as it is no
longer required.

63 22 726 D3561
174 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.12.2 SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera

4.12.2.1 Safety instructions
The SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera is a sensitive optical instrument
and must therefore always be handled with care.

NOTICE
The lens window is sensitive to scratches.
The lens window can be damaged by hard objects. Deep scratches in
the lens window impair image quality.
➢ Always place the intraoral camera in the designated holder and
clean the lens window with a soft cloth.

IMPORTANT
The intraoral camera is heated during operation due to the LEDs in
the camera head.

The following temperatures are reached:

Duty time Temperature at 25 °C Temperature at 37 °C

room temperature in oral cavity
1 min 31 °C 43 °C
Continuous operation 46 °C 58 °C

4.12.2.2 Functional description

The camera generates digital image data with the help of a CMOS
sensor. The camera allows for the acquisition of intraoral and extraoral
images.

A Lens window (covered)

B Key for automatic focus (Auto focus)
C Connecting cable

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 175
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.12.2.3 Connecting the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera

Connecting the intraoral camera to the Sinius and Sinius TS dentist

elements
Depending on the equipment version, the intraoral camera can be
placed at instrument position five or in the additional holder.

B The camera connector is connected to the lower side of the dentist

element. If the dentist element does not have an additional holder, the
A
camera connection at instrument position five will be located below the
dentist element A. If an additional holder is available, then it is
connected to an additional sixth position B.
➢ Plug the connector of the intraoral camera into the correspondingly
marked socket on the dentist element.
Ä The plug locks in place.

Connecting the intraoral camera to the Sinius CS dentist element

The connecting cable of the intraoral camera is guided through a swivel
arm. The camera connection is located underneath the instrument
holder. The holder is fixed on the front edge with two internal clamps on
the dentist element.
1. The instruments must be removed from the instrument holder. To
do this, remove all instruments one after the other and allow these
to hang down in front of the dentist element.
2. Lift the instrument holder by the front edge until the clamps are
released and the holder can be removed.
3. The connection for the intraoral camera is located at the fifth
instrument position. Mount the connection cable of the camera in
the swivel arm and insert the camera connector into the socket.
Ä The plug locks in place.
4. First insert the rear edge of the instrument holder into the groove on
the dentist element. Then push the holder forward and down until it
locks into place.
5. Place the instruments in their holders. Make sure that the
instrument hoses and the connection cable of the camera are
located in the guide rollers of the swivel arm.

Connecting the intraoral camera to the assistant element (only with

Sinius CS and Sinius TS)
If the treatment center is equipped with the Sinius CS or Sinius TS
dentist element, the intraoral camera can be operated at the first
instrument position of the assistant element. The camera connection is
located underneath the assistant element instead of the connection for
the curing light.
➢ Plug the connector of the intraoral camera into the socket on the
assistant element.
Ä The plug locks in place.

63 22 726 D3561
176 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Removing the intraoral camera

The plug of the intraoral camera is secured against unintentional
removal.
➢ Grasp the plug by its locking device A and pull this out without
A tilting, if possible.

4.12.2.4 Operating the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera

An external or internal PC is required in order to display the video
images of the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera on the Sivision
monitor. The Sidexis or SI Video can be used as a PC video application.
For details please refer to chapter "Operation with a PC" [→ 183].
4.12.2.4.1 Focusing SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera
The SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera adjusts the image focus at the
touch of a button. It is focused continuously.
1. Direct the camera to the subject to be acquired.
Ä The image is displayed on the Sivision monitor.
2. Press the Auto focus key A.
Ä The intraoral camera adjusts the image focus according to the
distance from the object to be scanned. The adjustment
remains until the key is pressed again.
The function of focusing the camera image using the foot control can be
configured in the treatment center setup, see "Switching on/off the foot
control function for intraoral camera focus" [→ 194].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 177
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.12.2.4.2 Using the camera with SI Video

Using SI Video, up to four still images can be generated with the
SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera. These can be displayed on the
Sivision monitor either as a sequence of single images or
simultaneously as a quad image. The active quadrant is marked with an
orange square. The quadrants are run through in a clockwise direction.
The generated still images remain until the treatment center or the PC is
disconnected from the power supply.
➢ Remove the intraoral camera from the holder.
Ä The live image is displayed on the Sivision monitor as a single
image. The Sivision program is displayed on the touchscreen.
When the intraoral camera is put in the holder, the live image is no
longer displayed on the monitor. The generated still images remain
displayed.

Operation of Si Video with the camera removed

With the camera removed, Si Video is controlled via the foot control and
the Sivision program keys.

Switching between live and still image

ü The intraoral camera is removed from its holder.
S
1. Press the foot pedal.
0
Ä The display switches from live to still image.
2. Press the foot pedal again.
Ä The live image is displayed again.
The function of focusing the camera image using the foot control can be
configured in the treatment center setup, see "Switching on/off the foot
control function for intraoral camera focus" [→ 194]. In this case, the foot
pedal must be pressed down fully to switch between live and still
images.

Selecting the next quadrant

In order to produce another still image, another quadrant must be
selected. If there is already a still image in the desired quadrant, it can
be replaced by a new image.
ü The intraoral camera must be removed from its holder to allow for
operation via the foot control.
S S

0 1. Press the left button of the foot control.

or
➢ Touch the Select next quadrant key on the touchscreen.
Ä The orange square highlights the selected quadrant. When the
intraoral camera is removed, the live image is displayed.

Switching between quad image and single image

When switching from quad to single image, the previously marked quad
image is displayed as a single image. Conversely, the displayed single
image is marked in the quad image.

63 22 726 D3561
178 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

ü The intraoral camera must be removed from its holder to allow for
operation via the foot control.
S 0
0 1. Press the right button of the foot control.
or
➢ Touch the Quad image key on the touchscreen.
Ä The mode changes between quad and single image.

Operation of Si Video with the camera in place

When the camera is in the holder, SI Video is controlled via the Sivision
program buttons.

Selecting the next quadrant

In single image mode, the still image in the next quadrant is displayed.
In quad image mode, the next quadrant is highlighted.
Quad image
Display quad image or single image. Up to four single images are
simultaneously displayed on the Sivision monitor in quad image mode.
Deleting images
All generated still images are deleted.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 179
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.12.2.4.3 Using the camera with Sidexis

Besides displaying and processing X-ray images, Sidexis 4 and
Sidexis XG can be used additionally as a video application for the
SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera. Sidexis displays live and still
images in separate windows. Still images are saved in the patient
database.

Some functions of Sidexis 4 and Sidexis XG can be controlled via the

user interface of the treatment center, see "Communication with
Sidexis" [→ 186].

An additional video plugin must be installed if the intraoral camera is

used in combination with Sidexis 4. Please refer to the "Video plugin for
Sidexis 4" user manual for details on installing and using the plugin. The
video plugin can be controlled via the user interface of the treatment
center with version 2.0 and higher, see "Communication with video
plugin" [→ 188].

63 22 726 D3561
180 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Switching the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera on/off

ü The PC is in operation and the Sivision Connect or Siucom Plus PC
application is started.
➢ Take the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera from the holder.
Ä The Sivision program appears on the touchscreen. Sidexis is
started and the live image appears on the Sivision monitor.
When the intraoral camera is returned to the holder, the live image
window closes. Sidexis remains active on the PC.

Generating a still image

ü The live image is displayed on the Sivision monitor.
S
1. Step on the foot pedal.
0
Ä The display switches from live to still image.
2. Press the foot pedal again.
Ä The live image is again displayed on the Sivision monitor.
The function of focusing the camera image using the foot control can be
configured in the treatment center setup, see "Switching on/off the foot
control function for intraoral camera focus" [→ 194]. In this case, the foot
pedal must be pressed down fully to switch between live and still
images.

Saving an image
ü The patient must be registered in Sidexis.
S S
ü The still image to be saved is displayed on the Sivision monitor.
0
➢ Press the left button of the foot control or put the camera back in the
holder.
Ä An acoustic signal sounds.
Ä In Sidexis 4, the still image is saved in the side image bar of the
video plugin. For the final export in Sidexis 4, see
Communication with the video plugin" [→ 188].
For Sidexis XG, the still image is displayed in an additional
Sidexis window and saved in the patient database.

Focusing and and automatically saving the image

When using Sidexis 4 version 4.2 or higher in combination with the
video plugin version 2.0 or higher, we recommend selecting the third
option in the setup dialog for focusing the intraoral camera, see "Switch
focusing the intraoral camera on/off by the foot switch" [→ 194]. The
images can then be displayed automatically on the Sivision monitor in
the side image bar of the video plugin. Saving the still image with the
left button (S) of the foot switch and switching between live and still
image is thus no longer necessary.
ü The live image is displayed on the Sivision monitor.
S
➢ Press the foot pedal.
0
Ä The live image is focused and automatically saved in the side
image bar of the video plugin.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 181
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.12.2.5 Technical camera data

General technical data Model: Intraoral camera
SiroCam AF SiroCam AF+
Weight of handpiece without ca- approx. 80 g approx. 85 g
ble:
Dimensions: diam. 27.5 x 207 mm
Working temperature: +10 to +40 °C
Power supply and signal output: 5 V via USB 2.0 interface (modi-
fied plug-in connection)

Characteristics of the image acquisition Lighting: 2 white light LEDs

Image sensor: 1/4" CMOS
Live image resolution: 824 x 514
Resolution of saved images: 1024 x 640 with SiroCam AF
1276 x 796 with SiroCam AF+
White balance: Permanently set to 4800 K

63 22 726 D3561
182 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.13 Operation with a PC

The treatment center can be connected to a PC via an Ethernet cable.
The Sivision Connect and/or Siucom Plus PC application enables
communication between the treatment center and the PC. Siucom Plus
is required for PC control. This allows the PC to be operated directly via
the touchscreen and in connection with the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral
camera, via the foot control of the treatment center.
For details, please refer to the "Installation and configuration of Siucom
Plus / Sivision Connect" manual.

CAUTION
Integrating the Sinius into an IT network that includes other devices
can lead to previously unknown risks.
The following changes to the IT network can lead to new risks:
• Changes to the IT network configuration
• Connecting additional elements to the IT network
• Removing elements from the IT network
• Updating devices that are connected to the IT network
• Upgrading devices that are connected to the IT network
The provider of the IT network must determine, analyze, assess, and
control the risks (e.g. IEC 80001-1).

The treatment center can be operated with the following PC versions:

● External PC
The treatment center is connected to an external PC via an
®
Ethernet cable. PC applications such as Sidexis, Microsoft
®
PowerPoint , Windows Mediaplayer and SI Video can be controlled
from the treatment center.
● Internal PC
The treatment center is operated as a standalone unit without an
external PC. A mini PC is integrated in the base of the chair instead.
It is required to display the camera images using the Si Video PC
application. This version is not intended for image storage or the
control of any additional PC applications.
● Operation without PC
The use of Sivision is not possible.
The SI Video application is used in treatment centers with an external
PC on which Sidexis is not installed, or with an internal PC (standalone
solution). In these cases, SI Video serves as a video application for the
camera.

IMPORTANT
The PC's HDMI outlet and graphics card should be hot-plug capable.
When the PC is switched on before the treatment center, the Sivision
monitor may remain black in some PC models.
➢ In this case. switch the treatment center on first, then the PC..
➢ Equip your PC with a hot-plug capable HDMI outlet. Then the
devices can be switched on in any order.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 183
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.13.1 Sivision program

Various PC applications of the PC can be started and operated in the
Sivision program.
The PC applications to be operable via the treatment center can be set
in Siucom Plus. The keys displayed on the touchscreen and their
arrangement can be adjusted individually. See the "Installation and
configuration of Siucom Plus / Sivision Connect" manual.
The network connection of the treatment center must be configured in
the setup program before using the Sivision program, see "Configuring
the network connection".
PC applications can be controlled from the treatment center only if they
were started via Siucom Plus.

4.13.1.1 Starting PC communication

Opening the Sivision program

ü All PC applications which were started from the treatment center
have been terminated.
ü Siucom Plus has been started, e.g. via autostart.
1. Touch the Sivision program change key at the left next to the
touchscreen.
or
➢ For intraoral images: Remove the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral
camera from the holder. The Sidexis or SI Video PC application
starts immediately.
Ä The Sivision programappears on the touchscreen.

Starting other PC applications

1. Select the desired PC application from the left side of the
touchscreen.
Ä The key of the selected PC application is highlighted orange
and the corresponding control keys are displayed on the right
side of the touchscreen; see the following sections. The PC
application is automatically started on the PC.

2. The File selection program opens for PC applications that can

access files of the PC. Select the desired file by touching it.
Ä The control keys of the relevant PC application are displayed on
the touchscreen.

63 22 726 D3561
184 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

The treatment center starts the PC applications automatically. An

orange square located in front of the respective PC application on the
touchscreen indicates whether the application has been started and is
ready for operation on the PC. If the orange square is not displayed,
communication with the PC application is not yet possible.

4.13.1.2 Communication with the media player

The treatment center has the option of playing back multimedia files
stored on the external PC using the Windows Media Player. Audio or
video files can be selected from the file system and the Media Player
can be controlled from the treatment center. Video images can be
viewed on the Sivision monitor.

Previous/next title

Stop playback

Start/interrupt playback

Mute

Adjust volume

4.13.1.3 Communication with Microsoft PowerPoint

® ®
For effective patient communication, Microsoft PowerPoint
presentations stored on the external PC can be displayed on the
Sivision monitor. The presentations in the file system can be selected
and the display of slides can be controlled from the treatment center.

Previous/next slide

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 185
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.13.1.4 Communication with Sidexis

The Sidexis 4 and Sidexis XG PC applications can display X-ray and
intraoral camera images on the Sivision monitor. They can save images
taken with the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera in the patient
database. The following Sidexis functions can be controlled from the
treatment center:
For more details, please refer to the "Sidexis 4" or "Sidexis XG" user
manual.

Next image
The next image window is activated.

Tiled layout
All open image windows are scaled to a uniform size in the display area
and arranged without overlapping.
Cascaded layout
The opened windows are "cascaded", i.e. arranged slightly displaced
behind one another. All image window titles are thus visible.
Overview layout
The opened image windows are scaled in the display area so that no
scroll bars or as few scroll bars as possible must be displayed. The
image windows are arranged without overlapping.
Full frame
The active image window is enlarged so that it covers the entire display
area. The control elements of the Sidexis user interface are not
concealed in the process.
Zoom in/out
This magnifies and decreases the active image window and the size of
the image displayed in it on the Sivision monitor.

Rotate image
Rotates the image 90° counterclockwise or clockwise. With Sidexis 4,
the image can be rotated 180° by pressing a key.

63 22 726 D3561
186 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

Contrast optimization filter

This image filter analyses and optimizes the current grayscale
distribution of an image. In this way, for instance, details within a very
low-contrast, “faint” image can be made visible.
Relief display filter
Image details with high contrast are displayed brighter or darker. Edges
or contours within the image are thus clearly accentuated. The result is
a relief-like image distortion.
Smooth image
To mitigate high-contrast or high-interference effects in images, the
contrast between neighboring pixels is reduced or averaged. The
overall definition of the image is reduced.
Sharpen image
Contrasts between neighboring pixels are increased. This function helps
to accentuate edges or contours. The impression of a sharper image is
created.
Invert image
This function inverts the brightness values of the image pixels, thus
enabling a positive or negative display of the image. The inversion can
be canceled by pressing the key once again.
Display image in pseudocolors
To enable better distinction of image details, an image can be displayed
in what is called pseudo color mode. The grayscale values of the image
are replaced by colors which the human eye can distinguish better from
one another than the corresponding gray levels.
Filter black dots
Single pixel errors may occur when taking digital X-rays. These pixel
errors appear as individual black dots when the optimum resolution
(100%) is selected. They are removed by Sidexis.
Reducing noise
Individual scattered pixels and minor disturbing information which lead
to a noisy image are eliminated without reducing the overall definition of
the image.
Undo
The effect of the last filter operation is undone.

Restore original image

The changes previously made, e.g. via filters, are canceled. The most
recently saved version of the image is restored.
Close current media window

Close all media windows

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 187
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Cancel/confirm entry

Accept an order
Accepts an order that was placed and is waiting in Sidexis, e.g. for
creating an intraoral image with the X-ray unit of the treatment center or
a video recording with the intraoral camera.
Readiness for intraoral X-ray exposure
Establishes readiness for an X-ray exposure. A Sidexis window then
opens where the image type can be selected and the image can be
described in detail.

4.13.1.5 Communication with video plugin

The video plugin for Sidexis 4 can be controlled via the user interface of
the treatment center in versions 2.0 and higher. After replacing the
SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera, the last image taken is displayed in
the main window of the video plugin. In an image bar at the side, a
preview of all images taken is displayed. The image displayed in the
main window is highlighted orange. Via the touchscreen of the
treatment center, the images taken can be selected and marked for final
export to Sidexis. Unmarked images are discarded.
For more details, refer to the "Video plugin for Sidexis 4" user manual.
Scroll up / select previous still image

Scroll down / select next still image

Mark selected still image for import to Sidexis 4

Mark all still images for export to Sidexis 4

Import marked still images to Sidexis 4

Discard all still images

Note: The Siucom Plus PC application can be used to configure the

layout of the keys.
For a description of the SI Video Sivision program, please refer to the
section "Using the camera with SI Video" [→ 178].

63 22 726 D3561
188 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.13.2 USB port

A USB 2.0 port is provided on the back of the dentist element.
Type BF
CAUTION
Only type BF medical devices and applied parts according to IEC
60601-1, e.g. the Dentsply Sirona Xios XG USB module intraoral X-
ray system, may be connected to the USB interface.

CAUTION
USB devices with their own voltage supply (e.g., via a power supply
Type BF unit) may lead to increased leakage current.
This endangers the safety of patients and users.
➢ Connect only USB devices that use the USB connection as their
exclusive power source.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 189
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.14 Configuration of the treatment center (setup)

Various treatment center functions can be individually configured via the
Setup settings. The treatment center can therefore be adapted to match
each user's personal method of treatment.

4.14.1 Opening the setup programs

ü All instruments are in place.
ü The required user profile is active.
➢ Press and hold the Setup fixed key (approx. 3 s).

Ä Six setup programs are offered for selection.

The current software version of the treatment center is displayed on the
left side of the touchscreen.
Key symbols of the six setup programs row by row from left to right:
● EasyTouch user interface
● Date and time
● Control options
● Instruments
● Network connection
● Service domain (for service engineers only)
➢ Touch the corresponding key to open the Setup dialogs.

Some of the setup programs comprise several pages. Using the Scroll
forward key, you can switch to the next Setup program page.

IMPORTANT
Setup program, storing settings
The setup program closes automatically if no key is activated in 25
seconds. All of the settings you have made will be accepted when you
leave the setup program.

IMPORTANT
Missing function keys
Function keys for functions which the treatment center equipment
does not include are not displayed on the touchscreen.

63 22 726 D3561
190 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.14.2 Configuring the EasyTouch user interface

➢ Touch the EasyTouch user interface key in the setup program.

Ä The sub-screen opens.

4.14.2.1 Switching the key sound on/off

The program can be set to issue an acoustic signal that sounds when
the operator touches a key on the touchscreen or a fixed key.
➢ Touch the Key tone key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the key tone is activated.

4.14.2.2 Calibrating the touchscreen

If the touchscreen is no longer able to precisely locate the position of a
contact, it must be recalibrated.
1. Touch the touchscreen calibration key.
Ä A calibration field is displayed.

2. Touch the small cross on the touchscreen with a blunt pen.

Ä The cross is displayed at another location on the touchscreen.
3. Repeat this procedure until the cross no longer appears.
4. Touch the empty touchscreen again.
Ä The touchscreen is now calibrated. The User interface setup
program is displayed again.

4.14.2.3 Adjusting the touchscreen brightness

➢ Use the – and + keys to set the brightness of the touchscreen.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 191
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.14.3 Setting the date and time

➢ Touch the Date and time key in the setup program.

Ä The sub-dialog opens.

Setting the date

The date is displayed in the format day/month/year.
1. Use the – and + keys to set the day.
2. Touch the Date key.
Ä The month field is highlighted orange.
3. Repeat this procedure for the month and year.

Setting the time

1. Use the – and + keys to set the hour.
2. Touch the Time key.
Ä The minutes field is highlighted orange.
3. Use the – and + keys to set the minutes.

Switching 12/24 hour display

The 12-hour display is only changed in the status bar of the touch
screen. The setup dialog will continue to display a 24-hour system.
➢ Touch the 12/24 hour display key.
Ä If the field is highlighted orange, the 12-hour display is set.

63 22 726 D3561
192 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.14.4 Configuring control options

Operation of the entire treatment center operation can be configured in
this dialog.
➢ Touch the Control options key in the setup program.

Ä The sub-dialog opens.

4.14.4.1 Preselecting the number of user profiles

If fewer user profiles are required, their number can be limited so that
only the specified users can be selected after the treatment center is
switched on.
➢ Touch the User profiles key.
Ä The selected field is highlighted orange. The number of user
profiles is limited to the set value.
If the number of user profiles is limited to one, the User profiles key is
hidden in the start dialog.

4.14.4.2 Setting the cursor control

The cursor control can be set as follows:
● Field 1: Cursor control switched off
● Field 2: Cursor control switched on, without screen change
● Field 3: Cursor control switched on, with screen change:
For more information, please refer to "Using the cursor control" [→ 62].
ü A cable foot control is connected to the treatment center or a
wireless foot control is registered on the treatment center; see
"Setting the wireless foot control on the treatment center" [→ 60].
➢ Touch the Cursor control key.
Ä The selected field is highlighted orange.

4.14.4.3 Select the operating mode of the Start program

The Start program can run in two operating modes. In the operating
mode,Standard Start program, the functions of the patient chair and
instruments are each shown on separate screens. In the operating
mode, EasyMode Start program, the patient chair and instrument
functions that are most important for the treatment are shown together
on the same screen. For further details on the operating modes, see
"Start program operating modes" [→ 55].
➢ Touch the Start program operating mode key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the EasyMode Start program is
displayed.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 193
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Changing setup program page

➢ Change to the next setup dialog page.

4.14.4.4 Switching on/off the foot control function for intraoral camera
focus
The foot control can be set to focus the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral
camera:
● Field 1: The display switches between a still or live image when the
foot pedal is pressed. The knob on the camera can be used to focus
the image.
● Field 2: The camera is focused by pressing the foot pedal. The
display switches between a still or live image only when the foot
pedal is pressed down fully. The knob on the camera can still be
used to focus the image.
● Field 3: When the foot pedal is pressed, the camera image is
focused and a still image is automatically taken. The knob on the
camera can still be used to focus the image.
➢ Touch the Autofocus key.
Ä The selected field is highlighted orange.
Please note that the Autofocus key is displayed in the setup dialogue
only when the PC is switched on and the autofocus camera is
configured for use on this treatment center. The latest version of the
SIUCOM Plus / Sivision Connect application must be installed on the
PC. For details, please refer to the "Installation and configuration of
Siucom Plus / Sivision Connect" manual.
When using Sidexis 4 version 4.2 and higher in combination with the
video plugin version 2.0 or higher as a PC application for the intraoral
camera, we recommend selecting the third option for focusing the
camera. The images are then displayed automatically in an image bar
on the Sivision monitor. Saving the still image with the left button (S) of
the foot switch and switching between live and still image is thus no
longer necessary. For details, please see the section "Using the camera
with Sidexis" [→ 180] and the "Video plugin for Sidexis 4" user manual.

4.14.4.5 Linking the spray aspirator to the 4-way foot switch

A setting can be made to enable interruption and/or reactivation of the
suction flow of the spray aspirator by pressing the 4-way foot switch in
any direction. This function cannot be used on the saliva ejector or on
the surgical suction device. Also observe the safety information, see
"Suction handpieces".

63 22 726 D3561
194 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

➢ Touch the Spray aspirator key.

Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the removed spray aspirator
can be switched on/off with the 4-way foot switch.
If you deposit the spray aspirator in its holder while the suction flow is
interrupted, the suction flow is automatically restarted when you pick it
up again.

4.14.4.6 Linking the headrest tilt to the 4-way foot switch

If a motor-driven headrest is used, control of the tilt patient couch
function using the 4-way foot control can be replaced by the headrest tilt
function.
➢ Touch the headrest tilt key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the tilt of the motor-driven
headrest can be adjusted to the left and right using the 4-way
foot control.

Changing setup program page

➢ Change to the next setup program page.

4.14.4.7 Setting the hash key function on the assistant element

The Hash key on the assistant element can be assigned the X-ray
viewer function or, if the X-ray viewer function is set to the white screen
on the Sivision monitor, it can be assigned the white screen function.
See "Key for showing/hiding white screen on Sivision monitor" [→ 196].
Alternatively, the Hash key on the assistant element can also be used to
activate the bell or hash key, e.g. if neither an X-ray viewer or a Sivision
monitor is available.
➢ Press the X-ray viewer, bell, or hash key.
Ä The selected field is highlighted orange.

4.14.4.8 Setting the bell/hash fixed key as a pushbutton or as a switch

The relay assigned to the bell and hash keys can be actuated as a push
button or a switch.
● Field 1: Push button
● Field 2: Switch
➢ Touch the Bell and/or Hash key.
Ä The selected field is highlighted orange.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 195
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.14.4.9 Key for showing/hiding white screen on the Sivision monitor

If the treatment center has no X-ray viewer but is equipped with a
Sivision monitor, the Sivision monitor can be set to the white screen
mode.
➢ Touch the White screen key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the White screen key is
displayed in the Start program.

Changing setup program page

➢ Change to the next setup program page.

4.14.4.10 Adjust cleaning agent mixture for chemical suction hose cleaning
The suction system can be cleaned by pumping water into a tank
behind the connector of the suction hoses and extracting it from there. A
cleaning agent is added to the water if the dental treatment center is
equipped with the chemical suction hose cleaning option. For more
information, see the section "Cleaning the suction hose" [→ 229].
It is possible to set how much cleaning agent should be added to the
water for chemical suction hose cleaning. The quantity is dependent on
the cleaning agent used and the type of treatment. Please follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the cleaning agent.
➢ Use the – and + keys to adjust the cleaning agent mixture for
chemical suction hose cleaning (0 to 5%).
Ä The adjusted percentage is displayed on the touchscreen.

4.14.4.11 Switching the central supply for chemical suction hose cleaning
off and on
For clinical use, Sinius treatment centers can be equipped with a central
cleaning agent supply for chemical suction hose cleaning. The CDS 60
system of Dürr Dental is intended for this purpose.
The cleaning agent is pumped from the central supply station to the
treatment centers via an in-house tubing or hose system. Here it is
mixed with water and suctioned off at the water unit via the suction hose
adapter.
➢ Touch the Dürr CDS key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the treatment center is switched
to the central supply for chemical suction hose cleaning.

63 22 726 D3561
196 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

NOTICE
The CDS 60 station may be operated only with a cleaning agent
approved by Dürr Dental and Dentsply Sirona, e.g., Orotol plus.

IMPORTANT
Also observe the installation and operating instructions for the CDS
60 from Dürr Dental.

4.14.4.12 Adjusting the temperature of the tumbler heater

The water temperature for the tumbler filling can be adjusted.
➢ Use the – and + keys to set the intensity of water heating using
tumbling heater.

4.14.4.13 Linking the tumbler heater to the chair program

A setting can be made so that the tumbler heater automatically switches
off when the entry/exit position (0) chair program is activated. The
tumbler heater switches back on as soon as the patient chair leaves the
entry/exit position. This makes it possible for the patient to drink cold
water during waiting periods and to save energy.
● Field 1: The tumbler heater is switched off in the chair program
entry/exit position (0).
● Field 2: The tumbler heater remains switched on in every chair
program.
➢ Touch the Tumbler heater key.
Ä The selected field is highlighted orange.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 197
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.14.5 Configure instruments

➢ Touch the Instruments key in the setup program.

Ä The sub-screen opens.

4.14.5.1 Preselecting how instrument settings are to be saved

The settings in the instrument programs can be made either via static
quick setting keys (with the key values 0.09 or 2, 20, 40 or 1, 50, 100),
via the programmable quick setting keys (with changeable key values)
or via the function levels (E1, E2). For more information see "Quick
setting keys and function levels" [→ 89] and "Saving the instrument
settings" [→ 198].
When using the static quick setting keys, you can choose one of two
options for saving the settings you made in the instrument program:
● SaveMode – The Memory key is displayed in the Instrument
programs:
The settings made in the Instrument program will be saved after the
instrument is placed in its holder only if the Memory key was
pressed and held beforehand (> 2 s).
● DropMode – Memory key hidden in Instrument programs:
When the instrument is deposited, the settings made in the
Instrument program are automatically saved.
One of the following presettings can be selected:
● Field 1: Static quick setting keys with SaveMode
● Field 2: Static quick setting keys with DropMode
● Field 3: Function levels
● Field 4: Programmable quick setting keys

➢ Touch the Select memory type key.

Ä The selected field is highlighted orange.

4.14.5.2 Switching afterblow on/off

After the foot control pedal has been released, the cooling spray
remaining in the instrument head or in the tip of the instrument can be
automatically blown out by briefly activating the chip blower.
➢ Touch the Afterblow key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the afterblow function is
activated.

63 22 726 D3561
198 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 4 Operation
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.14.5.3 Showing/hiding the key for the external HF surgical unit

External HF surgical devices may interfere with the treatment center
and Sivision monitor. Therefore, the External HF surgical devices key
may be displayed on the Start sub-screen. If the key in the sub-screen
is highlighted in orange, the treatment center is protected from
interference resulting from the HF fields.
➢ Touch the External HF surgical unit key.
Ä If the key is highlighted orange, the external HF surgical unit
key is displayed in the Start sub-screen.
If the suction system is required with the external HF surgical unit during
the treatment, the suction handpiece must be removed from the holder
before blocking the treatment center. The suction unit remains switched
on until the block is removed and the suction handpiece is returned to
the holder.

Changing setup program page

➢ Change to the next setup program page.

4.14.5.4 Setting the spray temperature

The spray temperature of the instruments on the dentist element except
for the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe can be adjusted.
The spray temperature of the multifunctional syringe Sprayvit M can be
adjusted separately. See "Switching the instrument light on/off and
setting the water temperature." [→ 122]
➢ Use the – and + keys to set the spray temperature.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 199
4 Operation Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4.14.6 Configuring the network connection

➢ Touch the Network connection key in the setup dialog.Berühren Sie
im Setup-Dialog die Taste Netzwerkverbindung.

Ä The sub-dialog Network connection opens. It shows the

currently used network configuration.
Call in your data processing specialist for network configuration.
Network configuration is described in detail in the "Sinius / Sinius CS /
Sinius TS installation instructions".

4.14.7 Opening the service function

The Service domain is intended to be used only by service engineers.

CAUTION
A user operating error may cause malfunctions and hazards.

➢ Please contact your service technician or your dental depot.

63 22 726 D3561
200 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the

practice team
5.1 Basics
Handling mainly involves the following steps:
● Cleaning
● Disinfection
● Sterilization if possible
It is recommended to clean the unit as soon as possible after use.
Preliminary cleaning should be done with disposable/paper towels.
Inappropriate care and cleaning of the device can result in failure or
damage. Technical personnel must be trained in the handling of medical
devices.

5.1.1 Intervals
To maintain the value and safe functioning of your treatment center, it is
necessary to have it maintained, cleaned, and disinfected by the
practice team regularly. This will minimize the risk of contamination for
patients and users and ensure proper functioning.
The national requirements and recommendations for hygiene and
disinfection must be observed, e.g., Robert Koch Institute (RKI),
American Dental Association (ADA), Centers for Disease Control and
Prevention (CDC), etc.

IMPORTANT
Maintenance, cleaning, and disinfecting intervals
The time intervals specified for maintenance, cleaning, and
disinfection/sterilization are reference values.
Please adapt the time intervals to suit your personal method of
working and your national requirements.

After each patient

Clean/disinfect surfaces [→ 206]
● Disinfecting the upholstery [→ 211]
● Disinfecting the EasyTouch [→ 207]
● Lubricate, disinfect/sterilize the treatment instruments [→ 224]
● Clean and disinfect/sterilize the components of the
ApexLocator [→ 224]
● Disinfect handles [→ 208]
● Disinfect the tray [→ 209]
● Disinfect the cup holder [→ 210]
● Maintaining and cleaning the operating light (see separate operating
instructions for the operating light)
● Clean/disinfect the cuspidor [→ 237]

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 201
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Clean the gold trap [→ 236]

Cleaning the suction hoses [→ 229]
Sterilize/disinfect the suction handpieces [→ 233]
Purge the water lines (purge function) [→ 215]

Daily
Automatically purge water lines (AutoPurge function) [→ 218]
Rinse water lines [→ 215]
Cleaning the suction system using the cleaning adapter in the cuspidor
or via external container [→ 231] (if chemical suction hose cleaning
option not available)
Clean and thermally disinfect the suction hoses [→ 234]
Thermally disinfect the instrument holder of the dentist and assistant
element and sterilize silicone mats [→ 212] and [→ 214]

Weekly
Clean and care for upholstery [→ 211]
Cleaning the bottom surface of the mount for the backrest
component. [→ 211]
Clean outlet lines [→ 238] (if chemical suction hose cleaning option
available)
Change the cotton wool roll on the turbine hose and oil collector [→ 227]
Clean the foot control [→ 214]

Monthly or as required
Check the flow rate on the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe [→ 226]
Change the water and air filters [→ 240]
Microbiological water test [→ 203]
Interactively guided or manual sanitization of the treatment
center [→ 249]
Change the amalgam rotor [→ 241] or
empty the sediment container [→ 245] or
clean the filter insert of the standard wet suction [→ 247]
Check the message system of the amalgam separator [→ 244]
Change the battery of the wireless foot control [→ 262]

For a quick overview of the work involved, see the “Maintenance,

cleaning, and disinfection schedule” for the Sinius treatment center.

63 22 726 D3561
202 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.1.2 Care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents

NOTICE
Approved care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents
Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents approved by
Dentsply Sirona!

A continuously updated list of approved media can be downloaded from

the internet via the online portal for technical documents. You can reach
this portal at the address:
www.dentsplysirona.com/manuals
. Click on the menu item "General documents" and then open the "Care,
cleaning and disinfection agents" document
If you do not have internet access, please contact your dental depot to
order the list (REF 59 70 905).

5.1.3 Microbiological water test

Perform the microbiological test of the water from the treatment center
at regular intervals and after longer periods of disuse > 1 week; see
"Media quality" [→ 16]. Start the checkups in intervals of no more than
two weeks and adjust the time intervals depending on the results. In
addition to running laboratory tests, you can also use the "Total Count
Tester" as a simple means of performing this test.
To order the motor total count tester, see "Spare parts and
consumables" [→ 270].

IMPORTANT
Shelf life of the total count tester
The maximum shelf life of the total count tester is 1 year after the date
of receipt.

The cardboard disk contains a dehydrated culture medium. It is

activated by the sample and serves as culture medium for a number of
bacteria. The bacterial count provides information on the hygiene quality
of the water.
Be careful not to touch the inside of the test container or the part of the
tester to be immersed (with nutrient medium) prior to incubation.
1. Allow water to run out of the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe into
the cuspidor bowl for about 1 minute.
2. Use the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe to fill cold water into the
test container to its upper mark.
3. To neutralize the disinfecting agent of the water sample, add
approx. 1.5 g of fixing salt (sodium thiosulfate). Fixing salt can be
obtained in pharmacies or from chemical dealers.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 203
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

4. Immerse the tester in the filled container for 30 seconds.

Ä The cardboard disk with the culture medium will now absorb 1
ml of the water sample.

30 s

5. Remove the tester from the container. Shake out any excess water.
Empty the tank.
6. Place the tester in the container for incubation either for two days at
a room temperature of 20°C/68°F or for 24 hours at a temperature
of 35°C/95°F.

7. Count all germs found on the surface of the tester.

If the number of germs significantly exceeds 100, then sanitation is
required; see "Sanitation" [→ 249].

48 h – 20 °C / 68 °F
24 h – 35 °C / 95 °F

5.1.4 General handling instructions

The general handling instructions generally apply to the treatment
center provided there are no other product-specific reprocessing
instructions in this operating manual. The manufacturer's instructions on
the disinfectants should be followed (temperature, concentration,
application times, etc.).
Manual cleaning
Manual cleaning can be done with a cloth or soft brush. Unless
specified otherwise, use lukewarm drinking water for cleaning surface
dirt.
Machine cleaning
Thermal disinfection at up to 93°C (200°F) according to ISO 15883-1 is
possible for all marked components. Use an alkaline cleaning agent. A
laboratory dishwasher (e.g. Miele G7781) can be used. See the
operating instructions for the respective device for the setting of the
cleaning equipment and the kind and quantity of cleaning agent.
Manual disinfection
The treatment center can be disinfected by wiping. Use a soft, colorless
cloth for this as well as an approved disinfectant. Unless specified
otherwise in the operating manual, other disinfection methods (spray
disinfection, immersion, etc.) may not be used. Please observe the
information regarding the use of disinfectants in the treatment center
operating manual (temperature, concentration, application times, etc.).

63 22 726 D3561
204 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

93°C Machine disinfection

200°F
Thermal disinfection at up to 93°C (200°F) according to ISO 15883-1 is
possible for all marked components. Use an alkaline cleaning agent. A
laboratory dishwasher (e.g. Miele G7781) can be used as disinfection
device. See the operating instructions for the respective device for the
setting of the disinfecting equipment and the kind and quantity of
disinfectant.
Manual drying
With the wipe disinfection method, drying is not necessary because
excess disinfectant evaporates. Excess water from the cleaning process
can be removed with a soft cloth.

134°C 274°F Sterilization

Sterilization may be conducted for components that are marked
3 min accordingly. Dentsply Sirona recommends sterilization in a steam
sterilizer (autoclave) according to ISO 13060, Class B (e.g., DAC
PREMIUM / DAC PROFESSIONAL).
The sterilization must be carried out with a multiple fractionated suction
system (Class B sterilizer). The process parameters can be found on
the embossed marking of the respective component and this operating
manual. In addition, please follow the operating instructions for the
sterilizer.

5.1.5 Inspection, maintenance and testing

Unless otherwise specified in this operating manual, test all components
for proper functioning on a regular basis and carry out a visual
inspection for damage and wear. Exchange damaged components if
necessary.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 205
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.2 Surfaces
5.2.1 Clean/disinfect surfaces
The surfaces can be disinfected by spraying and wiping with surface
disinfectants.

NOTICE
Drugs have a chemical reaction with the surface of the unit.
Due to their high concentrations and the substances they contain,
many drugs can dissolve, etch, bleach, or stain surfaces.
➢ Wipe any drug residues off the unit immediately with a moist,
white cloth!

NOTICE
Liquids can enter the unit during cleaning or disinfection.
Electrical components of the treatment center can be destroyed by
liquids.
➢ Do not spray any liquids into the unit.
➢ To clean near openings, first spray the liquid onto a cleaning
cloth. Then wipe over the unit with the cleaning cloth.

NOTICE
Disinfectants can dissolve dyes in cleaning clothes.
The outer surface of the unit may then be discolored by the dye.
➢ Do not clean or disinfect the unit with colored cleaning cloths.
➢ Remove any dirt and disinfectant residues regularly using a mild
commercial cleaning agent.

63 22 726 D3561
206 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.2.2 Disinfect the EasyTouch

The touchscreen and fixed keys of the dentist element, with the
exception of the main switch, can be deactivated for disinfection. This
prevents the inadvertent triggering of unwanted functions.

NOTICE
Approved care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents
Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents that have been
approved by Dentsply Sirona, see "Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents" [→ 203].

1. Actuate the Clean fixed key on the dentist element.

Ä A display stating that the touchscreen and fixed keys are
deactivated appears on the touchscreen. The main switch is
excluded from this.
2. Disinfect the EasyTouch user interface by means of wipe
disinfection.
3. Press and hold the Clean fixed key on the dentist element (> 3 s) or
press the pedal of the foot switch.
Ä The touchscreen and fixed keys are now reactivated.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 207
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.2.3 Disinfecting handles

NOTICE
Approved care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents
Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents that have been
approved by Dentsply Sirona, see "Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents" [→ 203].

The handles on the dentist and assistant element can be spray, wipe
and thermally disinfected. They can be detached.

Sinius and Sinius TS dentist elements

1. Loosen the screw A.
Ä The handle B is unlocked.

2. Slightly lift the handle B and pull it from guide bracket C.

3. Repeat this procedure for the opposite handle.
Proceed in reverse order when reattaching the handle.

Sinius CS dentist element

1. Press the button provided at the end of the handle.
Ä This will release the locking mechanism and the handle can be
detached.
2. Repeat this procedure for the opposite handle.
The handle locks in place independently when slid again.

63 22 726 D3561
208 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

Assistant element
➢ Press the button provided at the end of the handle.
Ä This will release the locking mechanism and the handle can be
detached.
The handle locks in place independently when slid again.

5.2.4 Disinfecting the tray

The tray can be removed to facilitate cleaning or thermal disinfection.

NOTICE
Approved care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents
Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents that have been
approved by Dentsply Sirona, see "Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents" [→ 203].

CAUTION
If the tray is not locked in place, it can disengage from the tray holder.
➢ After installing the tray, make sure it is securely attached to the
tray holder.

Tray on the support arm

1. Hold the tray tightly.
2. Open the lock by swiveling the lever downwards.
3. Remove the tray.
4. Let the lever fall back into its original position.
5. If a cup holder is attached to the tray, it must be removed,
see"Disinfecting the cup holder" [→ 210].
6. Thermally disinfect the tray.
To insert the tray, simply guide it into the mount. The mechanism locks
automatically.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 209
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Tray on the Sinius CS and Sinius TS dentist element

1. Hold the tray tightly.
2. Open the lock by turning the lever downwards.
3. Remove the tray.
4. Let the lever fall back into its original position.
5. If a cup holder is attached to the tray, it must be removed,
see"Disinfecting the cup holder" [→ 210].
6. Thermally disinfect the tray.
To insert the tray, simply guide it into the mount. The mechanism locks
automatically.

5.2.5 Disinfecting the cup holder

The cup holder can be disinfected by wiping or thermally
The disposable cup must be replaced after each patient.

NOTICE
Approved care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents
Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents that have been
approved by Dentsply Sirona, see "Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents" [→ 203].

63 22 726 D3561
210 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.2.6 Care for, clean, and disinfect upholstery

Special care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents are recommended by
Dentsply Sirona for the care, cleaning, and disinfection of the
upholstery.

NOTICE
Approved care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents
Use only agents approved by Dentsply Sirona for the upholstery,
see"Care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents" [→ 203]!

The upholstery of the patient chair and the headrest can be spray and
wipe disinfected.
The armrests can also be spray and wipe disinfected using the
recommended surface disinfectant. After use, wipe the chair down with
an absorbent cloth so no disinfectant remains on the upholstery.
The imitation leather upholstery must be cared for and cleaned regularly
(at least once a week), especially light colored upholstery.

NOTICE
Please note that the FD 360 cleaning and care agent for imitation
leather from Dürr must not be used on the chrome-plated surfaces of
the armrests or double articulating headrest.
Otherwise, there is a risk of discoloration.

NOTICE
The special sponge included with FD 360 may not be used on lounge
upholstery.
Lounge upholstery could be damaged by the special foam.

Tip: The upholstery of the Hugo, Carl, and Paul dental working stool is
identical to that of the patient chair. It can therefore be cleaned in the
same way; refer to the operating instructions for the respective dentist
stool.

5.2.7 Cleaning the bottom surface of the mount for the

backrest component.
The bottom surface of the mount A must be cleaned regularly on both
sides. This ensures that the backrest moves smoothly and easily.
➢ Clean the mount with a damp cloth.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 211
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.2.8 Thermally disinfecting the instrument holder of the

dentist element and sterilizing the silicone mat
Sinius and Sinius TS dentist elements
The instrument holder can be removed for cleaning and thermal
disinfection.
The removable silicone mat on the dentist element can be sterilized.
Removing the holder
1. Remove all instruments from the holder.
2. Swivel both of the levers A below the instrument holder to the rear.
Ä The latch of the instrument holder is released.
3. Grasp underneath the instrument holder and raise it at the rear.
Ä The instrument holder tilts to the front and can be removed from
the dentist element in an upward direction.

Inserting holder
ü The levers A are swiveled to the rear.
1. Fit the front recesses B of the instrument holder onto the bolts in the
dentist element.
2. Gently press the instrument holder into the dentist element.
3. Hold the instrument holder firmly and swivel both levers A toward
the front.
Ä The instrument holder is locked into the dentist element.

63 22 726 D3561
212 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

Sinius CS dentist element

The instrument holder can be removed for cleaning and disinfection. It
can be disinfected by spraying or wiping.
The removable silicone mat on the dentist element can be sterilized.
The instrument holder is fixed on the front edge with two internal clamps
on the dentist element.
Removing the holder
1. To do this, remove all instruments one after the other and allow
them to hang down in front of the dentist element.
2. Lift the instrument holder by the front edge until the clamps are
released and the holder can be removed.

Inserting holder
1. First insert the rear edge of the instrument holder into the groove on
the dentist element. Then push the holder forward and down until it
locks into place.
2. Place the instruments in their holders. Make sure that the
instrument hoses are once again located in the guide rollers of the
swivel arm.

Ball stopper (for Sinius and Sinius TS dentist elements)

If a ball stopper is inserted in an unused instrument holder, it can simply
be pushed out of the holder from the rear to facilitate cleaning or
thermal disinfection.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 213
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.2.9 Thermally disinfecting the instrument holder of the

assistant element and sterilizing the silicone mat
The instrument holder can be removed for cleaning and thermal
disinfection.
The removable silicone mat on the assistant element can be sterilized.

Removing the instrument holder

1. Remove all instruments from the instrument holder.
2. Loosen the screws A located below the assistant element.

3. Remove the instrument holder.

NOTICE
The instrument holder must be fixed in the thermal disinfector.
Abrasion and scuffing may result if the holder is not fixed securely.
➢ Position the instrument holder with the top facing upward in the
thermal disinfector tray. Fix in place to prevent the instrument
holder from slipping out of position.

Inserting the instrument holder

1. First insert the rear edge of the instrument holder into the groove on
the assistant element. Then fold the holder forward and downward.
2. Fasten the holder again.

5.2.10 Clean the foot switch

Regular cleaning of the foot control improves its stability.
H2O ➢ Clean the bottom plate of the foot control with a moist cloth (water).

63 22 726 D3561
214 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.3 Instruments and instrument hoses

5.3.1 Rinse water lines
Microorganisms can grow in the water lines of the treatment center. Use
a large amount of water for rinsing the lines prior to starting patient
appointments.
➢ Flush the cuspidor for at least one minute.

5.3.2 Purge water lines (purge function)

To reduce the bacterial load, the water lines of the water-carrying
instruments of the dentist element and the Sprayvit M multifunctional
syringe of the dentist and assistant element can be purged with water.
For the purge function, individual instruments are removed from the
holder and held over the cuspidor for purging. If your treatment center is
not equipped with a cuspidor, hold the instruments over a watertight
container with sufficient capacity. The water lines of all removed
instruments are then purged simultaneously. Press the water key on the
Sprayvit M unit for purging.
It is also possible to purge the water lines automatically, see "Purging
water lines automatically (AutoPurge function)" [→ 218].

Preparation
The following preparations should be made before you begin to purge
the water lines.
1. If your treatment center is equipped with a cuspidor, activate the
cuspidor flushing for at least one minute. This flushes the water
lines.
2. Set all of the instruments to be purged to their maximum water flow
max. rate.
3. Put all instruments in place.

Opening the purging dialog

ü The Start dialog is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. In the Start dialog standard version: Touch the Sub-dialog key.
In the Start dialog simplified version: Press the Chair dialog change
key.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 215
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Ä The Start sub-dialog is displayed.

2. Touch the Purge function key.

Ä The Purge screen is displayed on the touchscreen.

Setting the purge time and starting the purge function

The purge time of the removed instruments can be set between 20 and
180 seconds.
ü The Purge dialog is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. Use the – and + keys to set the purging time.
2. Touch the Start key.
Please note that changes made during the purging process take effect
only after the next purge process is started.

Error message: Refill water (only for self-sufficient water supply)

If the Refill water display appears after the purge function has been
started, there is not sufficient water in the disinfectant tank of the water
unit to purge the water lines. The purge function cannot be started with
insufficient water.
➢ Mix distilled water with the disinfectant for the water lines in a ratio
of 100:1 (1 liter of water, 10 ml of the disinfectant) and fill this into
the disinfectant tank of the water unit. For more information, please
refer to the section "Self-sufficient water supply" [→ 160].
Ä When sufficient water has been refilled, the purge program
continues.

Error message: Deposit instruments

If the Deposit instruments display appears after the purge function has
been started, the treatment center has detected that not all of the
instruments have been placed in their holders.
➢ Check the seating of the instruments in the holders marked with a
warning triangle on the touchscreen.
Ä When all of the instruments have been put in the holders, the
purge program will continue.

63 22 726 D3561
216 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

Purging water lines

ü The Remove instruments display appears on the touchscreen.
1. Remove the instruments to be purged from the holder. With the
Sinius CS: Move the swivel arm of the instruments to be purged into
the operating position so that the weight of the instrument hoses
keeps them in this position.
Ä If an instrument has been removed, this is displayed by a solid
gray circle on the touchscreen.

2. Hold the instruments over the cuspidor or over a watertight

container with sufficient capacity. Then press the Start key on the
dentist element. Press the water key on the Sprayvit M unit for
purging.
Ä The removed instruments are purged with water for the duration
of the set purging time. The elapsed purge time is displayed by
a progress bar on the touchscreen.
When the purge time has elapsed, the Set instruments down
display appears.

3. Place the removed instruments back in their holders. All instruments

not deposited are marked with a solid gray circle on the
touchscreen.
Ä When all of the instruments have been deposited, the Deposit
instruments display disappears.
Ä The water line purging procedure is finished. The treatment center
is again ready for operation.

Canceling the purge function

In the case of the error message Deposit instruments or during purging,
the purge function can be canceled.
➢ Touch the Stop key on the touchscreen.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 217
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.3.3 Automatically purge water lines (autopurge function)

The AutoPurge function enables automatic purging of all water-carrying
instruments in the dentist element, of the Sprayvit M multifunctional
syringe in the dentist and assistant elements, and of the suction hoses
and the tumbler filling.
All of the instruments inserted in the water unit are purged when the
AutoPurge function is activated. If the instruments remain in the water
unit after the treatment center is switched off, the purging process will
automatically be started again the next time the treatment center is
switched on.
Execute the AutoPurge function:
● Before starting work
● At the end of the work day
When the treatment center is switched to stand-alone water supply
mode, the AutoPurge function is no longer available (key hidden). It is
still possible to purge individual instruments; see "Purging water lines
(purge function)" [→ 215].

Preparation
The following preparations must be made before you start purging the
water lines:
1. If your treatment center is equipped with a cuspidor, activate the
cuspidor flushing for at least one minute. This flushes the water
lines.
2. Set all burr drives and the SiroSonic TL scaler to the maximum
max. water flow rate.
3. Put all instruments in place.
4. Do not remove the tumbler holder from the cuspidor. Place the
empty tumbler under the tumbler outlet.

Opening the AutoPurge screen

ü The Start dialog is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. In the Start dialog standard version: Touch the Sub-dialog key.
In the Start dialog simplified version: Press the Chair dialog change
key.

Ä The Start sub-dialog is displayed.

63 22 726 D3561
218 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

2. Touch the Autopurge function key.

Ä The Autopurge screen is displayed on the touchscreen.

Setting the instrument purge time and starting the AutoPurge

function
The purging time of the instruments may be set between 60 and 180
seconds.
ü The AutoPurge screen is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. Use the – and + keys to set the purging time.
2. Touch the Start key.

Error message: Deposit instruments

If Deposit instruments is displayed after the AutoPurge function has
been started, the treatment center has detected that not all of the
instruments have been placed in their holders.
➢ Check the seating of the instruments in the holders marked with a
warning triangle on the touchscreen.
Ä The AutoPurge program will continue when all instruments have
been deposited in the holder.

Inserting water-carrying instruments into the receptacle on the water

unit
The water unit has integrated receptacles for water-carrying instruments
and suction hoses. These enable all instruments to be purged with
water. For this purpose, water-carrying instruments must be inserted
into receptacles on the water unit.
ü The Insert instruments in water unit display appears on the
touchscreen.
1. Remove the Sprayvit M sleeves from the valve bodies, the straight
and contra-angle handpieces from the water-carrying instruments,
and the suction tips from the suction hoses.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 219
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

2. If the adapters are not yet located in the receptacles of the water
unit, insert them into the receptacles until they lock into place. The
Sprayvit M adapters can be inserted only into the two receptacles
on the right side of the dentist element with the guide rib facing
upward. A Sprayvit M adapter must also be inserted into the
assistant element side. The adapters always remain in the water
unit.

IMPORTANT
Arrangement of adapters
The adapters for the instrument couplings are color coded:
Yellow = Sprayvit M, water on right button
Orange = Sprayvit M, water on left button
White = turbine
Green = BL motor
Blue = BL ISO E/C motor (ISO interface)
Red = SiroSonic TL scaler

3. Dentist element side: Insert the couplings of all water-carrying

treatment instruments into the adapters in the water unit (for
Sprayvit M: valve lever in the up position, locking knob in the down
position).
Also for Sinius CS: Move the swivel arm of the instruments to be
purged into the operating position so that the weight of the
instrument hoses keeps them in this position.

4. Assistant element side: Insert the valve bodies of the Sprayvit M

into the adapter in the water unit. Also attach the suction hoses.

63 22 726 D3561
220 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

IMPORTANT
Pinching the instrument hoses
Be careful not to pinch the instrument hoses when inserting the
instruments.
If the hoses are pinched, the water flow will be obstructed during
purging.

Ä Place all water-carrying instruments and suction hoses into the

receptacles.

5. Touch the Start key on the touchscreen.

Ä First, the treatment center checks whether there is water flow
through the instruments. This will take a moment.

Error message: No water flow

If the treatment center detects no water flow through an instrument, you
can try to restore water flow through the relevant instrument. If this is
not possible, the instrument concerned can be excluded from the
purging process.
1. Check the water flow through the instruments in the instrument
positions marked with a warning triangle on the touchscreen. Set
the instruments to maximum water flow. Leave all instruments
plugged into the water unit.
Ä If the treatment center detects the water flow, the warning
triangle will disappear. If water flow is detected for all
instruments, the AutoPurge program automatically continues.

2. If you want to exclude the instruments concerned from purging,

touch the Exclude instrument key.
Ä The AutoPurge program continues. The water lines affected are
not included in the purging process.

Purge water lines

The removed instruments are purged with water for the duration of the
set AutoPurge time. Afterwards, the tumbler filler is purged and the
suction hoses are cleaned. The progress bar displayed on the
touchscreen refers to the entire AutoPurge program, not to the set
instrument purge time.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 221
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Following the purging process and suction hose cleaning, the display
Deposit instruments appears.

Displays if the purging process is not completed

The AutoPurge program can determine whether the purge process for
all instruments and the tumbler filling has been completed. Errors that
occurred during flushing are displayed on the touchscreen using a
warning triangle.

Leave the AutoPurge function active for the next working day or stop
it
You can now continue in one of two ways:
● Leave the instruments in the water unit
The AutoPurge function remains activated provided the Stop or
Back keys are not pressed.
The instruments remain in the water unit and the treatment center
can be switched off. On the next day, the autopurge function is
automatically performed again on all of the instruments remaining in
the water unit as well as on the tumbler filling unit and the suction
hoses are cleaned again immediately after the treatment center is
switched on. On the next day, the autopurge function is
automatically performed again on all of the instruments remaining in
the water unit as well as on the tumbler filling unit and the suction
hoses are cleaned again immediately after the treatment center is
switched on.
Then you can prepare the treatment center for daily practice
operation.
If the treatment center is out of operation over a prolonged period of
time, you can briefly switch it on every day and then switch it off
again when the purging process is finished. This ensures that the
number of microorganisms in the water lines will not increase
excessively. Empty the rinsing tumbler after each purging process
and place the empty tumbler again below the tumbler outlet.
If any instruments are removed from the water unit or new
instruments are connected to the treatment center while the latter is
switched off, they must be plugged into the adapters of the water
unit or returned to the instrument holder again before switching the
treatment center back on.
● Deposit instruments
The AutoPurge function is completed.

63 22 726 D3561
222 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

➢ Remove the instruments from the water unit and place them back in
their holders.
Ä When all of the instruments have been deposited, the Deposit
instruments display disappears.
Ä The AutoPurge procedure is finished. The treatment center is again
ready for operation and can be prepared for the working day.

If individual water-carrying instruments are not flushed, this is displayed

on the touchscreen by a warning triangle.

In this case the Back key must be activated to end the AutoPurge
function.

Canceling the AutoPurge function

If the error message Deposit instruments appears at the end of the flow
rate check or during purging, the AutoPurge function can be canceled.
➢ Touch the Stop key on the touchscreen.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 223
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.3.4 Care for, disinfect and sterilize the treatment instruments

5.3.4.1 Treatment instruments
The procedures required for the following treatment instruments are
described in the following separate operating instructions:
● BL motor
● BL ISO E/C motor
● Straight and contra-angle handpieces in various versions
● Highspeed handpieces
● Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe
● SiroSonic TL scaler

5.3.4.2 Clean and disinfect/sterilize the components of the ApexLocator

NOTICE
Approved care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents
Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents that have been
approved by Dentsply Sirona, see "Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents" [→ 203].

Disconnect the mucosal electrode from the connection cable. The metal
hook can be sterilized, and the connection cable can be disinfected by
wiping.
134°C 274°F
3 min

The file clamp for manual measurement can be sterilized with the
connection cable.

134°C 274°F
3 min

The apex adapter and its connection cable can be disinfected by wiping.

IMPORTANT
To guarantee conductivity, no disinfectant must be allowed to
penetrate the electrical contacts.

63 22 726 D3561
224 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

The silicone isolation sleeve is a disposable item. It must be changed

134°C 274°F
after each patient. The silicone isolation sleeve must be sterilized prior
3 min to initial use.

134°C
To reorder the silicone isolation sleeve, see "Spare parts and
consumables" [→ 270].
0123

.
sirona
C

Sterilize the root canal files according to the manufacturer's instructions.

BL ISO

5.3.4.3 Disinfecting/sterilizing Mini L.E.D. curing light

NOTICE
Approved care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents
Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents that have been
approved by Dentsply Sirona, see "Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents" [→ 203].

1. Remove the connection cable of the Mini LED by turning the

134°C 274°F
handpiece.
3 min
2. Pull out the light guide and remove the glare shield.
3. Sterilize the light guide and the glare shield at 134° C, 2 bar for 3
min.
4. Disinfect the handpiece of the Mini L.E.D.
5. Screw the sterilized light guide and glare shield back onto the Mini
L.E.D.
6. Reconnect the handpiece of the Mini L.E.D. to the connecting cable.
The following points should also be observed when operating the Mini
L.E.D.:
● Always use the glare shield to protect your eyes.
● Check the light guide after each use. Make sure that the light guide
is in perfect condition.
● There should be no traces of composite material on the light guide.
Immediately remove any residue.
● If you find any damage, replace the light guide, since damage will
impair its performance considerably.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 225
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.3.4.4 Cleaning/disinfecting the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera

The shape of the SiroCam AF / AF+ intraoral camera complies with
hygienic requirements and therefore has no areas that are difficult to
reach. It can be wipe disinfected.

NOTICE
Approved care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents
Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents that have been
approved by Dentsply Sirona, see "Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents" [→ 203].

NOTICE
The lens window is sensitive to scratches.
Deep scratches in the lens window impair image quality.
➢ Protect the lens window against scratching. Disinfect it with a soft,
lint-free cloth.

5.3.4.5 Check the flow rate on the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe

If the flow rate is less than 135 ml/min with the button fully actuated,
there is the risk of excessively hot water being emitted.

CAUTION
If the flow rate is insufficient, hot water may be emitted by the Sprayvit
M.
The patient could thus be scalded.
➢ Check the water flow rate prior to use.
➢ Clean the nozzle according to the Sprayvit M Operating
Instructions.

IMPORTANT
Air outlet during hose change
If the Sprayvit M is removed from the instrument hose while the
treatment center is in use, air will escape from the hose coupling. You
should therefore switch off the treatment center before changing a
hose.

Perform the following measurement to exclude risk to the patient.

➢ Fill a measuring cup up to the 100 ml mark with the water button
fully actuated while measuring the required filling time.
Ä The filling time must not exceed 45 seconds.
If the specified water quantity is not reached within the filling time of 45
seconds, clean the nozzle or have the treatment center checked by a
service technician.

100 ml max. 45 sec

63 22 726 D3561
226 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.3.5 Changing the cotton wool roll on the high-speed

handpiece hose and oil collector
Return air containing a small amount of turbine oil is emitted at the unit
end of the turbine hose. This oil is collected in a drip container by the
cotton wool roll.

Sinius and Sinius TS dentist elements

1. Slide the drip container down and remove the cotton wool roll.
2. Insert new cotton wool roll and slide the container back up.

Sinius CS dentist element

Cotton wool roll on the turbine hose
The instrument connections are located below the instrument holder.
The holder is fixed on the front edge with two internal clamps on the
dentist element.
1. The instruments must be removed from the instrument holder. To
do this, remove all instruments one after the other and allow these
to hang down facing forward.
2. Lift the instrument holder by the front edge until the clamps are
released and the holder can be removed.

3. Slide the drip container on the turbine hose up and remove the
cotton wool roll.
4. Insert new cotton wool roll and slide the container back down.
5. First insert the rear edge of the instrument holder into the groove on
the dentist element. Then push the holder forward and down until it
clicks into place.
6. Place the instruments in their holders. Make sure that the
instrument hoses are located in the guide rollers of the swivel arm.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 227
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Oil collector
The Sinius CS dentist element is also equipped with an oil collector. It is
located below the instrument connections and collects any liquids that
leak out.
1. Remove the instrument holder from the dentist element, as
described above.
2. Pull out the oil collector located under the instrument connections
and replace it.
To reorder the oil collectors, see "Spare parts and
consumables." [→ 270]

63 22 726 D3561
228 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.4 Vacuum system

5.4.1 Cleaning the suction hoses
The suction system is exposed daily to secretions, saliva, and blood
that contain bacteria. Therefore, for reasons of hygiene, the used
suction hoses must be cleaned after each patient, in particular after
every treatment involving blood. For long-duration treatments, the
suction hose must be cleaned at least every 60 minutes.
The suction system can be cleaned by pumping water into a tank
behind the receptacle of the suction hoses and extracting it from there.
A cleaning agent is added to the water if the dental treatment center is
equipped with the chemical suction hose cleaning option. The cleaning
agent tank is accessible via the maintenance flap on the base of the
water unit.
In the Setup of the treatment center, the amount of cleaning agent to be
mixed with water for suction hose cleaning can be set, see "Adjusting
cleaning agent mixture for chemical suction hose cleaning" [→ 196].

Cleaning suction hoses and suction system

1. Remove the suction tips from the suction hoses.
2. Swivel the cover cap on the water unit for attaching the suction
hoses upward.
3. Insert the suction hoses into the receptacle.
4. Press the button.
Ä The mixture of water and cleaning agent (optional) is pumped
into the suction hose cleaning container and drawn off by the
suction hoses. An acoustic signal will sound after completing
the suction hose cleaning.

CAUTION
The suction hose cleaning must not be interrupted to ensure that no
residual water remains in the container.

5. Then place the suction hoses back into their holders on the
assistant element.

CAUTION
Disinfect the hose fittings on the water unit after each patient.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 229
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Refilling the cleaning agent

When the adjacent display appears in the status bar of the touchscreen,
the cleaning agent for cleaning the suction system is almost depleted. It
should then be refilled as soon as possible.

CAUTION
It is possible that the cleaning agent for the suction system and the
disinfectant for disinfecting the water lines could get mixed up.
➢ Do not fill the disinfectant for disinfecting the water lines into the
cleaning agent tank for chemical suction hose cleaning! Use only
"Agents for the suction lines" approved by Dentsply Sirona, see
"Care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents" [→ 203].

1. Open the maintenance flap on the base of the water unit. The
cleaning agent tank for chemical suction hose cleaning is located on
the left side.
2. Pull the tank slightly out of the water unit. At the same time, check
er
ans the hose line.
Cle
1L 3. Open the lock of the tank and add the cleaning agent. The cleaning
agent tank has a capacity of 1 liter.

63 22 726 D3561
230 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.4.2 Cleaning vacuum system using cleaning adapter in the

cuspidor or via external container
If the treatment center is not equipped with the chemical suction hose
cleaning option, only water is used for cleaning the suction hoses. The
suction system therefore must be cleaned daily using the cleaning
adapter in the cuspidor or via external container.
The suction system is exposed to secretions, saliva, and blood that
contain bacteria. Cleaning at regular intervals is therefore absolutely
mandatory for hygienic reasons.

NOTICE
Approved care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents
Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents that have been
approved by Dentsply Sirona, see "Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents" [→ 203].

NOTICE
Domestic cleaning agents foam up.
Foaming cleaning agents often cause foam and water to be sucked
into the dry suction system. This can cause damage to the suction
machine.
➢ Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents approved by
Dentsply Sirona, see"Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents" [→ 203].

5.4.2.1 Cleaning vacuum system using cleaning adapter in the cuspidor

Preparation for cleaning

1. Prepare 1 liter of cleaning solution in a separate container
according to the manufacturer's instructions and mix it thoroughly.
2. Remove the gold trap A.
B A 3. Clean the cuspidor.
4. Insert the cleaning adapter B as far as it will go.
5. Remove the suction cannulas from the suction hoses.

6. Attach the adapter C to the saliva ejector.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 231
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Cleaning procedure
1. Pour 1 liter of cleaning solution into the cuspidor.
2. Remove the suction hoses from their holders and attach them to the
side of the cleaning adapter as simultaneously as possible.
Ä Two thirds of the cleaning solution will be suctioned off by the
suction hoses; one third will flow into the drain of the cuspidor.
3. Allow the cleaning solution to act. Observe the reaction time
specified for the cleaning solution by the manufacturer.

Rinsing the cleaning agent

1. Following the cleaning process, pour at least 1 liter of water into the
cuspidor.
Ä The water is suctioned off, thus preventing any cleaning agent
residues from remaining in the suction hoses.
2. When the aspiration process has been completed, detach the
hoses. Place the suction hoses back in their holders.
3. Remove the cleaning adapter B and insert the gold trap A.
If the treatment center is equipped with a third suction hose, repeat the
procedure.
If the water unit is equipped with a standard wet suction, the filter insert
of the standard wet suction must also be cleaned once a month after
cleaning the suction system; see "Cleaning the filter insert of the
standard wet suction" [→ 247].

5.4.2.2 Cleaning the suction system via external container

If the treatment center is not equipped with a cuspidor, the suction
system must be cleaned using an external container.
1. Prepare 1 liter of cleaning solution in a separate container
according to the manufacturer's instructions and mix it thoroughly.
2. Fill the cleaning solution into a suitable container.
3. If the container is equipped with suitable adapters for the suction
hoses, remove the suction tips from the suction hoses. Otherwise,
the cleaning solution is to be aspirated with the suction tips in place.
4. Remove the suction hoses from their holders and aspirate the
cleaning solution from the container with all suction hoses
simultaneously.
5. Allow the cleaning solution to act. Observe the reaction time
specified for the cleaning solution by the manufacturer.
6. Following the cleaning process, pour at least 1 liter of water into the
container. Aspirate the water in the same way to ensure that no
cleaning agent residues remain in the suction hoses.
7. After finishing, place the suction hoses back in their holders.

63 22 726 D3561
232 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.4.3 Sterilize and disinfect the suction handpieces

Sterilization/disinfection
All parts of the suction handpieces can be sterilized and thermally
disinfected.

134°C 274°F
A Suction tip
B Suction Handpiece
3 min A C Saliva ejector handpiece
B D Surgical suction tip
E Adapter
C

D
E

Lubricating suction handpieces

The disconnection points of the suction handpieces must be lubricated
once a week and after each thermal disinfection or sterilization process.

CAUTION
Unsuitable lubricants
Lubricants that are not food safe may endanger the patient's health.
Rubber materials such as O-rings are corroded by unsuitable
lubricants.
➢ Never use petroleum jelly or similar lubricants.
➢ Use only lubricants approved by Dentsply Sirona.

1. Pull the handpiece of the spray aspirator, the saliva ejector and, if
installed, the surgical suction device off of their suction hoses.
2. Take apart the handpiece of the spray aspirator at its joints.
3. Lubricate the disconnection points and O rings of the handpieces.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 233
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.4.4 Cleaning and disinfecting the suction hoses

The hoses of the spray aspirator and the saliva ejector as well as the
connection hose to the water unit can be removed for rinsing under
running water.
Filter inserts are inserted between the suction hoses and the assistant
element to filter out solid particles. Depending on the treatment
involved, it may also periodically be necessary to remove the trapped
solid particles (e.g. amalgam) from the collector due to reduced suction
power.

CAUTION
Amalgam residues must not enter the public sewage system.
Amalgam is a mercury compound that is hazardous to water.
➢ Do not dispose of amalgam residues in a sink.
➢ Collect amalgam residues in a closed container with water.
Dispose of amalgam residues, e.g. when replacing the amalgam
rotor by filling the amalgam residues into the amalgam rotor or
when emptying the sediment container.

The outside of the suction hoses can be disinfected by spraying or

wiping.

NOTICE
Powdering suction hoses with talcum
If the surfaces of the hoses have become sticky from disinfectants,
clean them with a commercially available dishwashing liquid and then
powder them with a light coat of talcum if necessary.

Thermally disinfectable hoses are available as special equipment; see

Thermal disinfection of suction hoses [→ 235].

WARNING
! Wear gloves when performing the following work.

1. Switch the treatment center off at the main switch.

2. Detach the filter housings B from the connectors on the assistant
element.
3. Disconnect the suction hoses from the filter housings B.

4. Take the collectors C out of the suction hoses. Collect the amalgam
residues in a glass filled with water.
5. Take off the suction needles and flush the suction hoses with clean
water.

63 22 726 D3561
234 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

If the treatment center is equipped with thermally disinfectable suction

hoses, thermal disinfection can be performed after cleaning, see
"Thermally disinfecting the suction hoses" [→ 235].
Assembly is performed in reverse order. Grease the O-rings Abefore
reconnecting the suction hoses. Lubricants, see "Care, cleaning, and
disinfecting agents" [→ 203]. Make sure that the suction hoses snap into
place.

5.4.5 Thermodisinfecting suction hoses

The treatment center is not equipped with thermally disinfectable
suction hoses as standard. Thermally disinfectable suction hoses are
available as special accessories. They are marked with a turquoise ring.
Before thermally disinfecting the suction hoses, you must remove them
from the assistant element and clean the filter inserts; see "Cleaning the
suction hoses" [→ 234].
ü The suction hoses are removed and cleaned.
1. Pull the handpiece off the spray aspirator hose.
2. Lubricate the O-rings A. For lubricants see "Care, cleaning, and
disinfecting agents" [→ 203].
3. Plug the ends of the handpiece suction hoses onto the hose
holders. Use the adapter B for the saliva ejector hose.

4. Plug the hose holders onto the rails in the (Miele) thermodisinfector
and place the suction hoses on the wire basket provided for that
purpose.
5. Thermally disinfect the suction hoses, filter housings and collectors
at max. 93°C.
To reorder the hose holders for the Miele thermodisinfector, see "Spare
parts and consumables" [→ 270].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 235
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.5 Components of the water unit

5.5.1 Clean the gold trap
The gold trap retains larger solid particles to prevent them from being
washed down the drain in the cuspidor bowl. The amalgam rotor must
be replaced and the sediment container must be emptied less often.

CAUTION
Amalgam residues must not enter the public sewage system.
Amalgam is a mercury compound that is hazardous to water.
➢ Do not dispose of amalgam residues in a sink.
➢ Collect amalgam residues in a closed container with water.
Dispose of amalgam residues, e.g. when replacing the amalgam
rotor by filling the amalgam residues into the amalgam rotor or
when emptying the sediment container.

1. Remove the gold trap from the drain of the cuspidor bowl.
2. Remove the amalgam residues from the gold trap. Amalgam
residues must be disposed of separately.
3. Clean the gold trap.
4. Reinsert the gold trap.

63 22 726 D3561
236 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.5.2 Clean/disinfect the cuspidor

The cuspidor bowl, the tumbler holder A and the tumbler outlet B can be
sprayed and wiped with surface disinfectants.
Clean and disinfect the cuspidor bowl with a special cleaning agent.
This agent will also care for the drain lines of the cuspidor bowl.

NOTICE
Domestic cleaning agents foam up.
Foaming cleaning agents often cause foam and water to be sucked
into the dry suction system. This can cause damage to the suction
machine.
➢ Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents approved by
Dentsply Sirona, see"Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents" [→ 203].

The cuspidor bowl is attached to the water unit via a bayonet catch and
can be removed for thorough cleaning. The tumbler holder A can be left
attached when doing this.

CAUTION
If the treatment center is switched on, the flushing and tumbler filling
functions can be activated even with the cuspidor bowl removed.
In this case, water would run onto the floor and could enter the
treatment center.
➢ Switch the treatment center off at the main switch before
removing the cuspidor bowl.

1. Remove the gold trapC.

2. Hold the cuspidor bowl firmly with both hands. Loosen the bayonet
catch by twisting the cuspidor bowl counterclockwise.
A rubber gasket is attached to the bayonet catch of the water unit to
seal its closure. Lubricate this gasket before reinserting the cuspidor
C bowl. For lubricants, see "Care, cleaning and disinfecting
agents." [→ 238]
Make sure that the bayonet catch snaps into place when you reinsert it.
After snapping into place, the higher side of the cuspidor bowl must be
located below the tumbler outlet.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 237
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.5.3 Cleaning the outlet lines of the cuspidor

With the option chemical suction hose cleaning, the drain outlets of the
cuspidor are not cleaned/disinfected. If the treatment center is equipped
with this option, the drains of the cuspidor must therefore be cleaned
weekly. Use the same agent as for the suction lines.

NOTICE
Approved care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents
Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents that have been
approved by Dentsply Sirona, see "Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents" [→ 203].

NOTICE
Domestic cleaning agents foam up.
Foaming cleaning agents often cause foam and water to be sucked
into the dry suction system. This can cause damage to the suction
machine.
➢ Use only care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents approved by
Dentsply Sirona, see"Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents" [→ 203].

1. Prepare 1 liter of cleaning solution in a separate container

according to the manufacturer's instructions and mix it thoroughly.
2. Fill the cuspidor with the cleaning solution and leave it to take effect.
Observe the reaction time specified for the cleaning solution by the
manufacturer.
1L
Cle
an
se
r

3. Rinse the cleaning solution away. To do this, pour at least 1 liter of

water into the cuspidor.

1L
H
2 O

63 22 726 D3561
238 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.5.4 Refill disinfectant for the water lines

The water unit can be optionally equipped with a disinfection system. In
normal operation, this will automatically inoculate the water that comes
in contact with the patient (also called treatment water) with an agent to
disinfect the water lines. This leads to a decrease in bacterial growth
and to the reduction of the bacteria in the water. Furthermore, the
disinfection system can also be used to disinfect the water lines, see
"Interactive sanitizing of the treatment center" [→ 249]. If you decide to
operate the treatment center without the disinfection system, please
refer to the information in the chapter "Media quality" [→ 16].

WARNING
Microorganisms can multiply in the water.
These microorganisms could increase the risk of damage to one’s
health.
➢ If the treatment center is equipped with a disinfection system,
never operate this to disinfect the water lines without disinfectant.

When the supply of disinfectant for sanitizing the water lines in the
reservoir begins to run short (< 300 ml), the Disinf display appears in
the status bar of the touchscreen. Treatment can nevertheless be
continued. Refill the disinfectant as soon as possible.
If the Disinf display does not appear, disinfectant for disinfecting the
water lines should not be refilled. The treatment center may detect that
consumption of disinfectant is too low due to regular refilling and report
an error. See “Error messages,” [→ 267] Code 14.
1. Open the cover of the disinfectant tank.
2. Refill the disinfectant for disinfecting the water lines. The refill
container has a capacity of approx. 1.3 liters. It is full when the
disinfectant is visible at the filter of the funnel tube.
Ä The Disinf display is hidden.

WARNING
It is possible that the cleaning agent for the suction system and the
disinfectant for disinfecting the water lines could get mixed-up.
➢ Do not fill the agent for chemical suction hose cleaning into the
disinfectant tank of the water unit. Use the disinfectant for
disinfecting the water lines, see “Care, cleaning, and disinfecting
agents” [→ 203].

NOTICE
Splashes of undiluted disinfectant for sanitizing the water lines can
result in discoloration of surfaces if left for too long.
Any splashes should therefore be removed immediately using a moist
cloth.

To reorder the disinfectant for sanitizing the water lines, see "Spare
parts and consumables" [→ 270].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 239
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

NOTICE
Approved care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents
Use only the disinfectant for disinfecting the water lines that has been
approved by Dentsply Sirona for the disinfection system; see "Care,
cleaning, and disinfecting agents" [→ 203].

5.5.5 Change the water and air filters

If you notice any changes in media flows, check the water and air filters
for permeability. The filters must be changed, if necessary.
To reorder the filters, see "Spare parts and consumables" [→ 270].
1. Switch the treatment center off at the main switch.
Ä The water and air supply are switched off.

2. Open the maintenance flap (A).

3. Any remaining water flows out of the water filter when it is opened.
You should therefore place an absorbent cloth underneath the filter.
Then unscrew and remove the screw-on cap of the water filter (B)
and/or the air filter (C).
4. Check the filters and replace them if necessary.

5. Reinsert the rubber ring (E) in the screw-on cap (B), (C). Then plug
B on the filter (D) as shown in the drawing.
Ä The filter (D) engages in the screw-on cap (B), (C).
D C
6. Screw the screw-on cap(s) B, C back onto the water unit.

63 22 726 D3561
240 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.5.6 Changing the amalgam rotor

Amalgam residues and other solid particles are trapped in the amalgam
rotor according to the centrifugal principle.
When the Amalg display appears in the status bar of the touchscreen,
the amalgam rotor is almost full and must be replaced as soon as
possible. An acoustic signal sounds when the rotor is completely filled.
In this case, a safety shutoff function ensures that the rotor is
exchanged before the treatment center can be used again.
Regardless of whether or not the Amalg display lights up, the amalgam
rotor must be replaced at least once a year.

CAUTION
Amalgam residues must not enter the public sewage system.
Amalgam is a mercury compound that is hazardous to water.
➢ Do not dispose of amalgam residues in a sink.
➢ Collect amalgam residues, e.g. from the gold trap of the cuspidor
bowl, in a closed container with water. Dispose of amalgam
residues when replacing the amalgam rotor by filling the amalgam
residues into the amalgam rotor.

CAUTION
Disposal of the amalgam rotor
When a replacement rotor is supplied, a package for the return
shipment of the filled amalgam rotor is attached.
Authorize only certified waste management companies to dispose of
rotors.

Cleaning the suction system

The amalgam rotor is exposed to secretions, saliva and blood that
contain bacteria. It is therefore important to clean the suction system
before changing the amalgam rotor.
If the treatment center is equipped with the chemical suction hose
cleaning option, see "Cleaning the suction hoses". If this option is not
available, see "Cleaning vacuum system using cleaning adapter in the
cuspidor or via external container" [→ 231].

Removal and disposal of the amalgam rotor

WARNING
! ü
Wear gloves when performing the following work.

The treatment center is switched on.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 241
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

1. Open the flap A on the base of the water unit.

2. Loosen the bayonet catch by turning the lower part of the amalgam
separator B counterclockwise. Remove the lower part of the
amalgam separator along with the amalgam rotor located inside it.
Ä The message "Amalg" appears on the touchscreen and an
acoustic signal sounds.

95 %
95 %

95 %

3. Dispose of the collected amalgam residues from the cuspidor bowl

and from the suction hoses in the amalgam rotor; see "Cleaning the
gold trap" [→ 236] and "Cleaning and disinfecting the suction
hoses" [→ 234]. Fill the amalgam residues into the amalgam rotor.
4. Hold the lower part of the amalgam separator upright. Attach the
transport cap to the amalgam rotor.
Ä The transport cap locks in place. A bonding agent is released
on attachment. Therefore, please note that the transport cap
cannot be removed again once it has been closed.
5. Remove the amalgam rotor with the transport cap from the lower
part of the amalgam separator.
6. Place the container in the special packaging and ship it for disposal
or authorize a certified waste management company.

Installing the amalgam rotor

Use only original Dentsply Sirona accessories. Never use a used or
recycled amalgam rotor.
C
To reorder the amalgam rotor, see "Spare parts and
consumables" [→ 270].
E 1. Grease the O-ring E on the lower part of the amalgam separator.
For lubricants, see "Care, cleaning and disinfecting agents." [→ 203]
2. Insert the new amalgam rotor C in the lower part of the amalgam
B separator B.

3. Hold the lower part of the amalgam separator B so that the latching
noses of the bayonet catch are positioned transverse to the water
unit. Screw the lower part of the amalgam separator B onto its
upper part by rotating it clockwise.

NOTICE
Amalgam separator message
If the message Amalg is still displayed on the touchscreen and the
acoustic signal persists after the amalgam rotor has been inserted,
the lower part of the amalgam separator is not properly locked.

4. Close the flap A.

63 22 726 D3561
242 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5. In Germany: Document the exchange of the amalgam rotor in the

"D3181 II amalgam separator operation log".
International: Document in accordance with the national regulations.

Amalgam separator operation log

In Germany, users are obligated by law to keep an operation log for the
amalgam separator. This log is included with the treatment center.
Please note the user duties as described in the operation log:
● Document the replacement of the amalgam rotor
● Check the function of the amalgam separator system annually
● Arrange for a 5-year inspection

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 243
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.5.7 Check the message system of the amalgam separator

An electronic control monitors the function of the amalgam separator. It
detects any mechanical blocking or failure of the drive motor. The error
is indicated by the Amalg display on the touchscreen and by an acoustic
signal.
The functionality of this message system must be checked at least once
per year.
Inform your service technician if the error occurs during regular operation.
In Germany: Document the test in the operation log of the amalgam
separator in the "Testing the function of display and message systems"
section.
ü All instruments are in their holders. The Start program is displayed
on the touchscreen.

1. Press and hold the Setup fixed key (> 2 s).

Ä The Setup dialog appears.

2. In the setup dialog, hold and press the Service key (> 2 s).

Ä The service dialog is shown.

3. Test the message system. Press and hold the Amalg key for an
extended period.
Ä The message system is working if a signal sounds as long as
the Amalg key is pressed.
Inform your service technician if the acoustic signal does not sound.
Press the Back key to exit the service dialog.

63 22 726 D3561
244 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.5.8 Emptying the sediment container

In addition to other solid particles, a large proportion of the amalgam
residues are trapped in the sediment container by gravitational force.
Empty the sediment container in cycles that are appropriate for your
work method, but at least every 4 weeks.
The sediment container is installed only if neither an amalgam separator
nor a standard wet suction is installed.

Cleaning the suction system

The sediment container is exposed to secretions, saliva and blood that
contain bacteria. It is therefore important to clean the suction system
before removing the sediment container.
If the treatment center is equipped with the chemical suction hose
cleaning option, see "Cleaning the suction hoses". If this option is not
available, see "Cleaning vacuum system using cleaning adapter in the
cuspidor or via external container" [→ 231].

Removing and emptying the sediment container

WARNING
! Wear gloves when performing the following work.

1. Open the flap A on the base of the water unit.

2. Loosen the bayonet catch by turning the sediment container B
counterclockwise.

3. Pour the excess water out of the sediment container and collect the
amalgam residues. Dispose of these properly together with the
amalgam residues collected from the cuspidor bowl and from the
suction hoses; see "Cleaning the gold trap" [→ 236] and "Cleaning
and disinfecting the suction hoses" [→ 234]. Authorize a certified
waste management company for this purpose.

Installing the sediment container

1. Grease the O-ring C on the sediment container. Lubricants, see
"Care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents" [→ 203].
C

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 245
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

2. Hold the sediment container B so that the latching noses of the

bayonet catch are positioned transverse to the water unit. Rotate
the sediment container B clockwise.
Ä The sediment container is locked in place.
3. Close the flap A.

63 22 726 D3561
246 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.5.9 Cleaning the filter insert of the standard wet suction

The automatic separator and amalgam separator or sediment container
are not installed in the water unit for standard wet suction. The
separation of air and water and amalgam separation are performed
centrally in this case.
In order to ensure that larger solid particles nevertheless cannot enter
the separating unit, the vacuum line in the water unit is equipped with a
filter. The filter insert must be cleaned when the suction power
decreases.

WARNING
! Wear gloves when performing the following work.

Cleaning the suction system

Before the filter insert of the standard wet suction is cleaned, the suction
system should be cleaned
If the treatment center is equipped with the chemical suction hose
cleaning option, see "Cleaning the suction hoses" [→ 229]. If this option
is not available, see "Cleaning vacuum system using cleaning adapter
in the cuspidor or via external container" [→ 231].

Opening Start sub-screen

ü The Start program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ In the Standard Start program: Touch the Sub-screen key.
In the EasyMode Start program: Press the Chair program change
key.

Ä The Start sub-screen is displayed.

Extracting residual water

As long as the treatment center is switched on, water mains in the
vacuum line for technical reasons. Therefore, in order to clean the filter
insert, this water must be completely extracted beforehand. Otherwise
the remaining water will flow out when the filter housing is opened.
When the treatment center is switched off at its main switch, the
remaining water is automatically extracted.
➢ Touch the Extract residual water key.
Ä As long as the key is lit up in orange, water is being extracted
from the water unit. A slurping noise indicates that the water

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 247
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

unit is completely empty. When the key turns gray the extraction
process is finished.

Removing and cleaning the filter insert

NOTICE
The flushing and tumbler filling functions may not be activated when
the filter housing is open.
Otherwise, water could escape from the open filter housing.
➢ Do not switch the flushing and tumbler filling functions on
whenever the filter housing is open.

ü Water completely extracted from the water unit.

1. Open the flap A on the base of the water unit.
2. Loosen the bayonet catch of the filter insert B. Unscrew the filter
insert from the filter housing of the standard wet suction
counterclockwise.

3. Properly dispose of the amalgam residues together with the

amalgam residues collected from the cuspidor and from the suction
hoses. Then clean the filter insert under running water in a sink (not
in the cuspidor!).

4. Grease the O-ring C of the filter insert. Lubricants, see "Care,

cleaning, and disinfecting agents" [→ 203].

5. Reinsert the filter insert in the filter housing. Rotate the filter insert
(B) clockwise.
6. Close the flap A.
Ä The treatment center is again ready for operation.

63 22 726 D3561
248 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.6 Sanitation
Sanitation effectively combats the reproduction of microorganisms in the
water lines.
If the disinfection system is set for operation with public drinking water
supply, the sanitization must be guided using the sanitization screen,
see "Interactively guided sanitation of the treatment center" [→ 249].
If the equipment is being operated with a self-sufficient water supply,
sanitation can only be carried out manually, see "Sanitizing the
treatment center manually" [→ 257]. The Sanitation program is not
available in this operating mode.
For more information, please refer to the section entitled "Self-sufficient
water supply" [→ 160].

5.6.1 Interactively guided sanitation of the treatment center

Sanitization, that is disinfecting the treatment water lines, can be
performed by using the disinfection system. During sanitization, the
treatment water is first emptied according to a pre-defined process, then
the disinfectant for the water lines is filled undiluted into the treatment
water lines and flushed out again at the end. Sanitization includes
several phases and takes at least 24 hours but should not exceed 3
days.
When operating with public drinking water supply (self-sufficient water
supply switched off), interactive sanitization should be carried out:
● Regularly every 4 weeks
The display Days until next sanitization appears in the status bar of
the touchscreen. It first appears three days before the date of
sanitization (3d = 3 days until sanitization).
● After longer periods of disuse (> one week)
● If the bacterial count exceeds 100 bacteria per milliliter, see
"Microbiological water test" [→ 203].
● After changing from stand-alone water supply to public drinking
water supply and the disinfectant for disinfecting the water lines

NOTICE
Additional devices connected to the external device connection must
not be sanitized with the treatment center.
The additional devices could be damaged. Residues of the
disinfectant for disinfecting the water lines can remain in the
additional devices.
➢ Disconnect any additional devices from the treatment center prior
to sanitization.

Preparation
The following preparations should be made prior to beginning
sanitation.
1. If your treatment center is equipped with a cuspidor, activate the
cuspidor flushing for at least one minute. This flushes the water
lines.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 249
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

2. Set all bur drives and the SiroSonic TL scaler to the maximum water
max. flow rate.
3. Put all instruments and suction hoses in their holders.
4. Do not remove the tumbler holder from the cuspidor. Put an empty
glass with a volume ≥200 ml under the tumbler outlet to prevent
discoloration from the disinfectant for the water lines.

Opening the sanitization program via the touchscreen

ü The Start dialog is displayed on the touchscreen.
1. In the Start dialog standard version: Touch the Sub-dialog key.
In the Start dialog simplified version: Press the Chair dialog change
key.

Ä The Start sub-dialog is displayed.

2. Touch the San key.

Ä The Sanitation dialog is displayed on the touchscreen.

Symbols 1 to 6 stand for the individual sanitation phases as described
below. The current sanitation phase is highlighted by an orange
rectangle.

Symbol legend
The status of the individual instruments is represented by symbols on
the touchscreen as operational help and for support in case of an error.
These symbols have the following meaning:
● Empty gray circle
Instrument cannot be sanitized
● Solid gray circle
Instrument not yet sanitized
● Solid orange circle
Instrument sanitized

63 22 726 D3561
250 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

● Crossed-out solid gray circle

Instrument excluded from sanitation, after a failed flow rate check or
if an instrument was returned during the reaction time
● Warning triangle
Check instrument or tumbler filling
The top row of symbols indicates the instrument positions in the dentist
element, while the bottom row indicates the instrument positions in the
assistant element.

Starting sanitation
➢ Touch the Start key.
Ä The sanitization process starts.

Error message: Filling with disinfectant for disinfecting the water

lines
If the Disinf display appears after the sanitization process has been
started, the supply of disinfectant for the water lines in the reservoir of
the water unit is not sufficient to sanitize the treatment center.
Sanitization cannot be started with too little disinfectant, see "Filling with
disinfectant for the water lines" [→ 239].

Error message: Deposit instruments in instrument holders

If the Deposit instruments display appears after sanitation has been
started, the treatment center has detected that not all of the instruments
have been placed in their holders.
➢ Check the seating of the instruments in the holders marked with a
warning triangle on the touchscreen.
Ä When all of the instruments have been deposited, sanitation
phase 1 begins automatically.

Sanitation phase 1 – Inserting instruments and suction hoses into

the receptacle on the water unit
The water unit has an integrated receptacle for water-carrying
instruments and suction hoses. This allows all instruments and suction
hoses to be simultaneously treated with a high concentration of
sanitation solution and then rinsed with water. For this purpose,
sanitizable instruments and suction hoses must be inserted into the
adapters on the water unit.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 251
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

ü Sanitization phase 1 is highlighted on the touchscreen.

ü The Insert instruments in water unit display appears on the
touchscreen.
1. Remove the Sprayvit M sleeves from the valve bodies, the straight
and contra-angle handpieces from the instruments that can be
sanitized, and the suction tips from the suction hoses.

2. If the adapters are not yet located in the receptacles of the water
unit, insert them into the receptacles until they lock into place. The
Sprayvit M adapters can be inserted only into the two receptacles
on the right side of the dentist element with the guide rib facing
upward. A Sprayvit M adapter must also be inserted into the
assistant element side. The adapters always remain in the water
unit.

IMPORTANT
Arrangement of adapters
The adapters for the instrument couplings are color coded:
Yellow = Sprayvit M, water on right button
Orange = Sprayvit M, water on left button
White = high-speed handpiece
Green = BL motor
Blue = BL ISO E/C motor (ISO interface)
Red = SiroSonic TL TL scaler

3. Dentist element side: Insert the couplings of all water-carrying

treatment instruments into the adapters in the water unit (for
Sprayvit M: valve lever in the up position, locking knob in the down
position).
Also for Sinius CS: Move the swivel arm of the instruments to be
purged into the operating position so the weight of the instrument
hoses keeps them in this position.

4. Assistant element side: Insert the valve bodies of the Sprayvit M

into the adapter in the water unit. Also attach the suction hoses.

63 22 726 D3561
252 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

IMPORTANT
Pinching the instrument hoses
Be careful not to pinch the instrument hoses when inserting the
instruments.
If the hoses are pinched, the water flow will be obstructed during
purging.

Ä The receptacles for the water-carrying instruments and suction

hoses are completely assembled.

5. Touch the Start key on the touchscreen.

Sanitization can be started only if at least one instrument is removed
from the holder.

Sanitization phase 2 – Checking the water flow

First, the treatment center checks whether there is water flow through
the instruments.
ü Sanitization phase 2 is highlighted on the touchscreen.
➢ Wait briefly until the water flow has been checked.
Ä If sufficient water flow is present, the treatment center continues
with sanitation phase 3.

Error message: No water flow

If the treatment center detects no water flow through an instrument or
through the tumbler filler, you can try to restore water flow. If this is not
possible, the instrument concerned can be excluded from the sanitation
process.
1. Check the water flow through the instruments in the instrument
positions marked with a warning triangle on the touchscreen. Set
the instruments to maximum water flow. Leave all instruments
plugged into the water unit.
Ä If the treatment center detects the water flow, the warning
triangle will disappear. If there is sufficient water flow through all
instruments, sanitation phase 3 automatically continues.
2. If you want to exclude the instruments concerned from sanitation,
touch the Exclude instrument key.
Ä The treatment center continues with sanitation phase 3. The
water lines you excluded are not included in the sanitation
process.
If it is impossible to restore the flow to the tumbler filler, sanitization is
not possible. The tumbler filler cannot be excluded from the sanitization
process.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 253
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Sanitizing phase 3 - Treating the water lines with the disinfectant for
disinfecting the water lines
The water is pumped out of the water tank of the water unit using the
tumbler filling function. Then the water tank is automatically filled with
the undiluted disinfectant for the water lines. The instrument hoses, the
Sprayvit M hoses, and the tumbler filler are then rinsed with the
disinfectant. The suction hoses are cleaned.

NOTICE
Splashes of undiluted disinfectant for sanitizing the water lines can
result in discoloration of surfaces if left for too long.
Any splashes should therefore be removed immediately using a moist
cloth.

Sanitization phase 4 – Allow 24 hours reaction time

In order to effectively combat germs, you must let the disinfectant for
disinfecting the water lines react for at least 24 hours and not longer
than 3 days (maximum sanitation time).
ü Sanitization phase 4 is highlighted on the touchscreen.
ü The treatment center displays the remaining reaction time on the
touchscreen next to the sanitation phase 4 field, starting from 24
hours.
ü The treatment center has automatically switched to Standby mode.
1. Leave all instruments plugged into the water unit.
2. Make sure that the treatment center is switched off for at least 24
hours, but not longer than 3 days (maximum sanitation time). If
necessary, you can also turn off the power switch on the base of the
treatment center patient chair.
A IMPORTANT
Blocking water and air supply
If the treatment center is turned on again after 24 hours, then
sanitization phase 5 continues automatically. However, if the water
and air supplies are blocked, the disinfectant for disinfecting the water
lines cannot be rinsed out of the water lines.
Switch the treatment center back on after 24 hours only when the
water and air supply lines are open.

3. Empty the rinsing tumbler and return the empty tumbler below the
tumbler outlet.
4. Switch the treatment center on again after 24 hours and before 3
days have elapsed.

63 22 726 D3561
254 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

Error message: Inserting instruments in the water unit

If an instrument is accidentally deposited in its holder during the
reaction time, the message Insert instruments in water unit is displayed
on the touchscreen after the treatment center is switched on. The
sanitizing process is then completed anyway.
1. Take the accidentally removed instrument out of the instrument
holder and place it back in the receptacle on the water unit so that it
can be rinsed in sanitation phase 5.

2. If you want to exclude the instruments from sanitation, touch the

Exclude instrument key.
Ä Excluded instruments will not be rinsed in sanitation phase 5.

Sanitization phase 5 – Rinsing water lines with water

The disinfectant for the water lines is rinsed purged from the instrument
hoses, Sprayvit M hoses, and tumbler filling unit with water. This takes
several minutes.

Sanitization phase 6 – Returning the instruments to their holders

After the water lines have been purged, the instruments and suction
hoses can be removed from the receptacle on the water unit and re-
inserted in the instrument holders.
ü The Return instruments to their holders display appears on the
touchscreen.
➢ Place the Sprayvit M sleeves, the straight and contra-angle pieces
and the suction tips on the instruments or suction hoses. Return all
instruments and suction hoses to the instrument holders.
Ä The sanitation process is finished. The treatment center is
again ready for operation.

Displays in case of incomplete sanitation

The sanitization program detects whether the sanitization of all
instruments and the tumbler filling was completed. Errors that occurred
during sanitization will be displayed on the touchscreen as follows:
● Crossed-out, solid gray circle: The instrument was excluded from
sanitization before it had been filled with the disinfectant for the
water lines
● Orange circle with warning triangle: The instrument or tumbler filling
was not (sufficiently) purged, the disinfectant for the water lines is
still present in the water lines
➢ In the latter case, rinse the affected instruments and tumbler filling
manually after sanitization.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 255
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Canceling the sanitizing process

Sanitation can be canceled during some sanitation phases, e.g. if the
treatment center must be switched back on before the 24 hours have
expired. The Stop key shows whether cancellation is possible.
ü The sanitizing process has started.
➢ Touch the Stop key on the touchscreen.
Ä The sanitization process is canceled. If the water lines have not
yet been treated with the disinfectant for the water lines (prior to
sanitization phase 3), the treatment center automatically
proceeds directly to sanitization phase 6. If the sanitization
process is canceled during the reaction time, the water lines are
first rinsed with water (sanitization phase 5).

5.6.2 Display sanitation report

Sanitation processes with interactive guidance, with a reaction time of at
least 24 hours, are logged by the treatment center. The corresponding
log reports can be displayed on the touchscreen.
ü The Sanitation program is displayed on the touchscreen.
➢ Press the Sanitation program key to display the log.
Ä The sanitation report is displayed.

The sanitation report contains the following data:

Column Display
1 Sequential number
2 Status of sanitized instruments in dentist element, holder
1 to 5
3 Status of sanitized instruments in assistant element,
holder 1 to 4
4 Date of sanitation
5 Time

The status of column 3 and 4 can assume the following values:

+ = successful sanitation
- = Sanitation was not completed (e.g., interruption)

63 22 726 D3561
256 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.6.3 Sanitizing the treatment center manually

IMPORTANT
The sequence for manual sanitization described below is feasible only
if the treatment center is operated with a self-sufficient water supply.
If the disinfection system is set for operation with public drinking water
supply, the sanitization must be guided via the "Sanitation" dialog
box, see "Interactively guided sanitation of the treatment
center" [→ 249].

When operating with a self-sufficient water supply, sanitation is to be

carried out manually:
● if the self-sufficient water supply takes more than 28 days, in
exceptional cases
● After longer periods of disuse (> one week)
● If the germination index exceeds 100 germs per milliliter, see
“Microbiological water test” [→ 203].
Manual sanitation is not documented in the sanitation report, see
"Display sanitation report" [→ 256].
Sanitization takes at least 24 hours.

NOTICE
Additional devices connected to the external device connection must
not be sanitized with the treatment center.
The additional devices could be damaged. Residues of the
disinfectant for disinfecting the water lines can remain in the
additional devices.
➢ Disconnect any additional devices from the treatment center prior
to sanitization.

Preparation
The following preparations should be made prior to beginning
sanitation.
1. If your treatment center is equipped with a cuspidor, activate the
cuspidor flushing for at least one minute. This flushes the water
lines.
2. Set all bur drives and the SiroSonic TL scaler to the maximum water
max. flow rate.
3. Put all instruments and suction hoses in their holders.
4. Do not remove the tumbler holder from the cuspidor. Put an empty
glass with a volume ≥200 ml under the tumbler outlet to prevent
discoloration from the disinfectant for the water lines.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 257
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Emptying the disinfectant tank and mixing tank

Before manual sanitization, the disinfectant tank and mixing tank must
be emptied using the Sprayvit M.
1. Remove the Sprayvit M on the dentist element from the instrument
holder. Remove the Sprayvit M sleeve from the valve body and
connect the valve body into the water unit adapter (in for Sprayvit
M: valve lever up, locking button down).
Additionally for Sinius CS: Move the swivel arm of the Sprayvit M
into the working position so the weight of the instrument tube holds
it in this position.

2. Wait until no more water flows from the Sprayvit M. This can take
up to 12 minutes. Press the tumbler filler several times to speed up
the process.
Ä A warning triangle appears in the status bar of the touchscreen.
After pressing the warning triangle, the error code 10 is
displayed ("Flow in the Sprayvit M on the dentist element too
low"). This message confirms that the disinfectant tank and
mixing tank are empty.

3. Switch off the treatment center via the user interface and return the
Sprayvit M valve body to the instrument holder.

Treating the water lines with the disinfectant for the water lines
The water lines of the instrument hoses, Sprayvit M hoses, and the
tumbler filler are filled with the undiluted disinfectant for the water lines.
1. Fill approx. 0.6 liters of disinfectant into the disinfectant tank.

2. Switch the treatment center on via the user interface and wait
approximately 3 minutes until the treatment center is ready for
operation.

63 22 726 D3561
258 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

3. Remove the instruments one after the other from the holder and
max. hold them over the cuspidor or over a watertight container with
sufficient capacity. Activate each instrument for approximately 15
seconds. Then return the instruments to their holders.
Also with the Sinius CS: Move the swivel arm of the instruments to
the working position.
4. Empty the rinsing tumbler and return the empty tumbler below the
tumbler outlet.
5. Press the tumbler filler twice.

NOTICE
Splashes of undiluted disinfectant for sanitizing the water lines can
result in discoloration of surfaces if left for too long.
Any splashes should therefore be removed immediately using a moist
cloth.

Allow 24 hours reaction time

In order to effectively combat bacteria, you must let the disinfectant for
the water lines react for at least 24 hours and not longer than 3 days
(maximum sanitization time).
1. Switch off the treatment center via the user interface, not via the
power switch on the base of the patient chair. Make sure that the
treatment center is switched off for at least 24 hours, but not longer
than 3 days (maximum sanitization time).
2. Switch the treatment center back on after the reaction time.

Purging disinfectant for the water lines from the water lines
Once it has reacted, the remaining disinfectant for the water lines must
be rinsed out of the mixing tank using the Sprayvit M.
1. Insert the Sprayvit M valve body on the dentist element into the
water unit adapter as described above. Wait until no more water
flows from the Sprayvit M.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 259
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Ä The warning triangle with error code 10 ("Flow at the Sprayvit M

on the dentist element too low") appears again in the status bar
of the touchscreen. The remaining disinfectant for the water
lines has now been rinsed out.
2. Remove the Sprayvit M valve body from the water unit and reattach
the Sprayvit M sleeve. Return the Sprayvit M to the instrument
holder.

Purging water lines with water

The disinfectant for the water lines is rinsed out of the instrument hoses,
Sprayvit M hoses, and tumbler filling unit with water.
1. Mix distilled water with the disinfectant for the water lines in a ratio
of 100:1 (1 liter of water, 10 ml of the disinfectant) and fill this into
the disinfectant tank of the water unit. Then wait approx. 2 minutes.
2. Hold the instruments over the cuspidor or over a watertight
container with sufficient capacity again and thoroughly rinse all the
instruments for approximately 30 seconds.
3. Empty the rinsing tumbler and return the empty tumbler below the
tumbler outlet.

4. Press the tumbler filler three times.

Ä The manual sanitation process is finished. The treatment center is
again ready for operation.

Cleaning the suction hoses

After the manual sanitation, all suction hoses should also be cleaned.
● If the treatment center is equipped with the chemical suction hose
cleaning option, see "Cleaning the suction hoses" [→ 229].
● If the treatment center is not equipped with the chemical suction
hose cleaning option, see "Cleaning suction system using cleaning
adapters in the cuspidor or an external container" [→ 231].

63 22 726 D3561
260 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.6.4 Biofilm removal by the service technician

If the microbiological test of the water from the treatment center does
not correspond with the hygiene requirements in spite of regular
sanitization of the water lines and/or regular purge/autopurge cycles,
the biofilm must be removed using special chemicals.
Biofilm removal should be performed if the bacterial count is
significantly above 100 colony forming units per mililiter.
Biofilm removal may only be done by a trained service technician. In
this case, please contact your dental depot.
Before initiating biofilm removal it must be ensured that the reason for
the raised bacterial count is not due to inflowing water.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 261
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.7 Foot control and connection box

5.7.1 Changing the battery of the wireless foot control
The wireless foot control is powered by a battery. An empty battery is
detected and displayed by the system. The battery can be changed by
the user.
For the battery type, see "Spare parts and consumables" [→ 270].
➢ Prior to changing the battery, switch the treatment center off at the
main switch. This prevents the inadvertent triggering of unwanted
functions.

For older wireless foot controls, the housing must be unscrewed to

change the battery. Newer models have a battery compartment:

Removing and replacing the battery (without battery compartment)

The housing of the wireless foot switch must be opened to change the
battery. Touch a grounded metal part before opening the housing to
prevent damage to the PC board due to electrostatic discharge.
1. Remove the screws (A) from the bottom of the foot switch.
A 2. Remove the switch part (C) from the foot switch.
3. Pull the battery out of the battery compartment by pulling the cloth
strap B and replace it with a new one. Be careful to insert it with the
correct polarity (minus pole facing spring). The cloth strap (B) must
again lie underneath the battery.
4. Note the blink signal of the LED after replacing the battery, see
"Check battery" (step after next).
5. Mount the switch part C on the foot control to reassemble the foot
control.
6. Remove the screws (A) from the bottom of the foot switch.
–
+
IMPORTANT
B Putting the wireless foot control back into operation
After changing the battery, start the treatment center and check the
C complete functionality of the foot control.
It is not necessary to register the foot control again at the treatment
center after changing batteries.

63 22 726 D3561
262 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team
Operating Instructions Sinius

Replacing the battery (with battery compartment)

1. If the adjustable feet D sit close to the battery cover E, slide this
small part outward.
2. Open the battery cover E.
3. Pull the battery out of the battery compartment by pulling the cloth
strap B and replace it with a new one. Be careful to insert it with the
correct polarity (minus pole facing spring). The cloth strap (B) must
E again lie underneath the battery.
4. Note the blink signal of the LED after replacing the battery, see
"Check battery" (step after next).
– + 5. Close the battery cover E.

B IMPORTANT
Putting the wireless foot control back into operation
After changing the battery, start the treatment center and check the
D complete functionality of the foot control.
It is not necessary to register the foot control again at the treatment
center after changing batteries.

Checking the battery status

The battery status is indicated by the yellow LED F in the switch part.
● LED lights up for approx. 10 s after battery is inserted – Battery OK
F
● LED flashes after battery is inserted – Battery too weak, must be
replaced
● LED does not light up – Battery empty, must be replaced

Battery disposal
For environmental reasons, batteries may not be disposed with
household garbage. Please observe the applicable national regulations
for battery disposal.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 263
5 Care, cleaning and maintenance by the practice team Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

5.7.2 Changing the fuse of the external device connection

The inlet connector remains live even when the power switch is turned
off. The fuse can nevertheless be changed.
To reorder the fuse, see "Spare parts and consumables" [→ 270].
ü The inlet connector is not supplying any power.
1. Pull the plug of the connected device out of the inlet connector.
2. Use a screwdriver to unscrew the fuse sleeve.
3. Replace the fuse (T 6.3 A, 250 VAC) and screw the fuse sleeve
back in.
4. Reconnect the external device to the inlet connector.
Ä If the inlet connect still is not supplying any power, contact the
manufacturer of the connected device or your local distributor.

63 22 726 D3561
264 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 6 Maintenance by the service engineer
Operating Instructions Sinius

6 Maintenance by the service engineer

6.1 Inspection and maintenance

In order to ensure the operational safety and reliability of your treatment
center and to avoid damage due to natural wear, annual inspection and
maintenance must be performed on your treatment center. This is done
by an authorized service technician from your dental depot.
As soon as the next maintenance call is due in less than 42 days, a
wrench symbol appears in the status line of the touchscreen after
switch-on. Below this symbol, the number of days until the maintenance
deadline are counted down (e.g. 13 d = 13 days). You should now
contact your dental depot and make an appointment.
The work steps to be performed as well as the parts which must be
replaced are specified in the document "Maintenance Certificate".
An overview of the inspection and servicing carried out is additionally
recorded by the service technician in the "Installation Book".

6.2 Safety checks

Medical equipment is designed in such a way that the first occurrence of
a fault does not create a hazard to the safety of patients, users or other
persons. It is therefore important to detect such faults before a second
fault occurs, which might then lead to safety hazards.
For that reason it is essential to perform safety tests every 2 years
which aim particularly at detecting electrical faults (e.g. defective
insulation ). This is done by an authorized service technician from your
dental depot, most practically together with the work to be performed
according to "Inspection and maintenance" [→ 265].
Safety tests must also be performed and documented during initial
startup, after extensions/upgrades (conversion) of your treatment center
and after repair work which might affect the electrical safety of the
system.

WARNING
The treatment center must not be operated if it has failed to pass the
safety tests!

The safety checks includes a visual inspection as well as

measurements of the protective ground wire connections and the
equivalent leakage currents.
The inspections and measurements to be performed are specified in the
"Maintenance Manual". The measured values must be documented
there by the service technician.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 265
6 Maintenance by the service engineer Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

6.3 Maintenance Manual

Keep this Maintenance Manual near your treatment center.
Any inspection and maintenance work as well as all safety tests are
documented by the service engineer in the Maintenance Manual.
We recommend to the user to always keep the documentation in the
chapter "Reporting of incidents to authorities / manufacturers" up to
date, regardless of any legal requirements.

63 22 726 D3561
266 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 7 Malfunctions
Operating Instructions Sinius

7 Malfunctions

7.1 Error messages

Error states of the treatment center that cannot be immediately
recognized by the user but must nevertheless be corrected are
displayed on the touchscreen. If an error state exists, this is indicated by
a warning triangle A in the status line of the touchscreen.
➢ Touch the warning triangle (A) in the status bar of the touchscreen.
Ä The error code(s) is(/are) displayed.

The error codes have the following meaning:

Code Anomaly Description Measure

10 Flow rate of the Sprayvit The water flow rate is below the Clean the outlet nozzle of the
M on dentist element too limit. The heater of the Sprayvit M is Sprayvit M, see the "Sprayvit M op-
low no longer heated to prevent scald- erating instructions and perform the
ing by overheated water. flow test, see "Checking the flow
11 Flow rate of Sprayvit M on
rate on the Sprayvit L multifunc-
assistant element too low
tional syringe" [→ 226].
12 Tumbler temperature fuse The temperature fuse was blown by Inform your service technician.
defective overheating. The water in the tum-
bler filling unit is no longer heated.
13 Battery of wireless foot Operation of the treatment center no See "Changing the battery of the
control empty longer possible due to fully depleted wireless foot control" [→ 262].
battery.
14 Consumption of the disin- The disinfectant tank was not emp- Inform your service technician
fectant for disinfecting the tied since its last filling even though
water lines too low many disinfection cycles were per-
formed.
15 Water feed too low The maximum filling time for the Change the water filter, see “Chang-
mixing tank is exceeded. ing the water and air filters” [→ 240].
Check the water pressure of the
drinking water supply.
17 Emergency pump opera- Malfunctioning of pump sensors in Inform your service technician.
tion the water unit.
18 Chair movement outside If the chair is located outside of the Inform your service technician.
of the permissible move- permissible movement limits or the
ment limits or chair drive position is not plausible, the chair
position not plausible stops moving.
19 Injection valve for the dis- No disinfectant for disinfecting the Inform your service technician.
infectant for disinfecting water lines will be added if the injec-
the water lines defective tion valve is defective.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 267
7 Malfunctions Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Code Anomaly Description Measure

21 The flushing tank is empty It was detected that the flushing Change the water filter, see “Chang-
tank had not been filled. Flushing of ing the water and air filters” [→ 240].
the suction paths cannot be en- Check the water pressure of the
sured. drinking water supply.
With a standard wet suction, a
restart is necessary following trou-
bleshooting.
23 ApexLocator After switching on the treatment Inform your service technician if the
center, the apex self-test failed or error occurs repeatedly.
an error occurred during the mea- The mucosal electrode must not be
surement. used on the patient in this state.
24 Backup battery empty The time and date are reset after Inform your service technician.
the treatment center is switched
back on.
25 Wireless foot control is Communication between the wire- After the foot pedal is pressed
disturbed less foot control and the treatment again, the instrument can be reacti-
center is interrupted. The instrument vated.
is stopped for the duration of the in- If the error occurs repeatedly, switch
terruption. off sources of interference, e.g. mi-
crowaves and WLAN.
26 Software inconsistency An error must be acknowledged af- Inform your service technician.
ter the treatment center is switched
on. The functions of the treatment
center may be impaired.
27 Suction hose cleaning Too little water is used for suction Inform your service technician.
hose cleaning. Instead, suction a glass of water
regularly.
31 Chemical suction hose The cleaning agent tank for chemical Inform your service technician.
cleaning suction hose cleaning has not been
emptied since the last filling despite
several suction hose cleanings.
33 Cuspidor bowl valve The water container of the cuspidor Check whether the suction device is
valve is not emptied. The tumbler switched on.
filling, flushing, suction hose clean- Inform your service technician.
ing, sanitation, purge and autopurge
functions cannot be activated.
34 LEDview Plus The operating light has overheated. Protect the LEDview Plus against
It can no longer be operated at full direct sunlight. Switch the treatment
brightness. If it heats up further, it center off and back on again. For
will switch off automatically. further details, please refer to the
operating instructions for LEDview
Plus, section "Troubleshooting".
35 Chair positioning defective The target positions of the motor- Inform your service technician.
driven headrest or sliding track are
possibly not reached.

The warning triangle automatically disappears as soon as the error

state has been eliminated. If it does not disappear, please inform your
service engineer.

63 22 726 D3561
268 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 7 Malfunctions
Operating Instructions Sinius

7.2 Remote diagnosis

Functional description With remote diagnosis, you enable the staff of your dental depot or our
Customer Service Center, see "Contact data", to connect to the PC of
your treatment center. The contents of your PC monitor are then
transmitted to the computer of the service specialist and remote access
to your PC is enabled.
Advantages This offers you the following advantages:
● Fast support through remote access
● Remote diagnosis via readout of error codes
● Effective help during the application
● Fewer service calls by service engineers due to remote diagnosis
● Shorter downtimes
Requirements In order to utilize remote diagnosis, your treatment center must be
connected to a PC. In addition, the PC must have Internet access.
Remote access to your PC is established via a remote access software.
Various different software applications can be used for remote access.
Please contact your service engineer for more information.
Safety aspects During a remote access session, you as the customer can cancel the
service specialist's remote control rights at any time, thus blocking
further remote access. You thus always remain in control during remote
access.
Extensive security and access protection functions protect your PC
against alterations, spying and manipulations. These options will vary
depending on the remote access software involved. In general, remote
controlled access can be monitored directly by the customer. By setting
the access rights, you as the customer can determine which activities
service specialists will be allowed to perform via remote access. All
other functions which have not been approved by you remain disabled
for the service specialist.
If you have any further questions, please contact your dental depot or
our Customer Service Center; see "Contact data".

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 269
8 Spare parts and consumables Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

8 Spare parts and consumables

Use only original accessories and original spare parts from Dentsply
Sirona.
Please order the materials listed below from a specialized dental dealer.
Care, cleaning, and disinfecting

Care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents

A continuously updated list of approved media can be downloaded from
the internet via the online portal for technical documents. You can reach
this portal at the address:
www.dentsplysirona.com/manuals
. Click on the menu item "General documents" and then open the "Care,
cleaning and disinfection agents" document
If you do not have internet access, please contact your dental depot to
order the list (REF 59 70 905).

Total count tester

REF 58 53 775

Spray aspirator with additional air intake

A spray aspirator from the Dürr Dental company is attached to the
treatment unit on delivery. It can be ordered from a specialized dealer.

Oil collector for Sinius CS dentist element

REF 63 31 180

Air and water filters

REF 14 43 436

Amalgam rotor
REF 14 34 138

Hose holder for Miele thermal disinfector

REF 89 18 757

Peristaltic pump hose set

REF 62 25 903 (5 pcs)
Fuses

Fuse for the external device connection

100 V – 240 V~ (T 6.3 A, 250 V~)
REF 10 77 452

63 22 726 D3561
270 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 8 Spare parts and consumables
Operating Instructions Sinius

Miscellaneous

Ball stopper
For sealing the instrument holder of the Sinius TS and Sinius dentist
elements
REF 58 99 575

Silicone isolation sleeve for endodontics with the ApexLocator

REF 63 24 631 (5 pcs)

Separate motor holder for implantology motor

REF 59 99 821

Battery for wireless foot control

1x type alkaline baby (C or LR14) with 1.5 V (commercially available)
Always use high-quality batteries!

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 271
9 Disposal Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

9 Disposal
In accordance with Directive 2012/19/EU and national disposal
regulations regarding old electrical and electronic devices, please be
advised that such items must be disposed of in a special way within the
European Union (EU). These regulations require the environmentally
friendly recycling/disposal of old electrical and electronic devices. Such
items must not be disposed of as domestic refuse. This has been
expressed using the icon of the “crossed out trash can”.

Disposal procedure
We feel responsible for our products from the first idea to their disposal.
For this reason, we give you an option to return our old electronic and
electrical devices.
If you wish to dispose of your devices, please proceed as follows:
In Germany
To initiate return of the electrical device, please send a disposal request
to enretec GmbH. You have the following options here:
● Use the “Returning an electrical device” button under the “eom”
menu item on the enretec GmbH homepage (www.enretec.de).
● Alternatively, you can also contact enretec GmbH directly.
enretec GmbH
Kanalstraße 17
16727 Velten
Tel.: +49 3304 3919-500
E-mail: [email protected]
In accordance with the national disposal regulations regarding old
electrical and electronic devices (ElektroG), as the manufacturer, we
assume the costs for disposing of the electrical and electronic devices
in question. Disassembly, transport and packaging costs shall be borne
by the owner/operator.
Prior to disassembly/disposal of the product, it must be fully prepared
(cleaned/disinfected/sterilized).
If your unit is not permanently installed, it will be collected from the
practice. If it is permanently installed, it will be picked up curbside at
your address by appointment.
Other countries
For country-specific information on disposal, contact your local dental
dealers.

63 22 726 D3561
272 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 9 Disposal
Operating Instructions Sinius

9.1 Battery disposal

Note for disposal company
Prior to disposal, remove the following batteries from the treatment
center:
● Battery in the wireless foot control
● Lithium battery on the HSA circuit board (REF 62 78 985) in the
junction box of the chair.
Remove the CR2032 button cell from the battery holder (BAT 1).

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 273
10 Overview of all function keys Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

10 Overview of all function keys

The following contains a brief description of the fixed keys on the dentist
and assistant elements and the function keys on the touchscreen and to
provide the reader with a quick overview of the significance of the
symbols on the keys. Detailed descriptions can be found in the
corresponding sections of this document.

10.1 Fixed keys

10.1.1 Dentist element
Main switch
Switches the treatment center on/off.
To switch off the treatment center, press and hold the key until an
acoustic signal sounds. Then release the key.

IMPORTANT
Power switch
The treatment center also features a power switch on the base of the
chair that separates the treatment center from the power supply, see
"Switching the treatment center on/off" [→ 51].

Program change keys

The program change keys allow the user to switch between the main
programs Start program, Instrument program and Sivision program in
the Standard Start program operating mode.
In the EasyMode Start program operating mode, the program change
keys Chair and Instrument can be used to switch to the relevant sub-
screens.

Timer function
Opens the Timer function screen where any of four preset timers can be
activated. The elapsed time is displayed in the status bar of the touchscreen.
If the Timer function key is pressed (> 2 s), the settings dialog appears.
Shock positioning
Immediately moves the patient chair to a position for shock positioning
of the patient.
Operating light
Switches the operating light on/off.
If the Operating light key is pressed for > 2 s, the settings screen
appears.
Composite function
Switches the composite function for the operating light on/off.
This function is used to prevent premature curing of composite
materials.

63 22 726 D3561
274 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 10 Overview of all function keys
Operating Instructions Sinius

Tumbler filling
Starts or stops the tumbler filling function.
When the Tumbler filling key is pressed (> 2 s), the filling time and
water heating settings screen appears.
Flushing
Starts or stops cuspidor flushing.
When the Flushing key is pressed (> 2 s), the Flushing Time settings
screen appears.
Freely selectable function
e.g., call key
Freely available relay 230 VAC, 6 A
(connected by the service engineer).
This function can be preset as a button or as a switch in the Setup
program.
Freely selectable function
Freely available relay 230 VAC, 6 A
(connected by the service engineer).
This function can be preset as a button or as a switch in the Setup
program.
Clean key
Pressing this key deactivates the complete user interface of the dentist
element with the exception of the main switch. Pressing it again > 3 s
reactivates the user interface.
This is used to make sure that no unwanted functions can be
accidentally triggered while cleaning the surface.
Setup key
Used for individual configuration of the treatment center by the user and
for reading out messages by the service engineer, see "Configuration of
the treatment center (Setup)" [→ 190].

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 275
10 Overview of all function keys Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

10.1.2 Assistant element

Tumbler filling
on/off

Flushing the cuspidor

on/off

Operating light / Composite function

Switches the operating light on, to the composite function, or off.
The composite function is used to prevent premature curing of
composite materials.
Chair program S
Mouth rinsing position with last-position memory function
(programmable)
Chair program 0
Entry/exit position (programmable)

Freely selectable function

The Hash key on the assistant element can be configured in the setup
program. The key allows the user to switch the X-ray viewer or the white
screen function on the Sivision monitor on or off or alternatively to
activate the bell or hash relay.
Freely available relay 230 VAC, 6 A
(connected by the service engineer)

63 22 726 D3561
276 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 10 Overview of all function keys
Operating Instructions Sinius

10.2 Start program

Chair program S
Mouth rinsing position with last-position memory function
(programmable)
Chair program 0
Entry/exit position (programmable)

Chair programs 1 and 2

(programmable)

Moving the headrest in/out

if a motor-driven headrest is installed

Inclining the headrest

if a motor-driven headrest is installed

Tilting the patient couch

Compensated motion of the seat and backrest without any compression
or stretching effects for the patient
Adjusting the chair height

Selecting a user profile

A stored user profile can be selected for up to six different users (A to
F).
X-ray viewer
Also white screen on Sivision monitor for Sivision Digital

Open manual chair setting screen

For the Standard Start program operating mode only

Treatment function
Activation of the endodontics treatment function

Opening the sub-screen

Used to access additional subordinate functions; see the following
function keys:
Purging water lines
Starts the purge function

Purging water lines automatically

Starts the autopurge function

Sanitizing
Starts the treatment center sanitation program

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 277
10 Overview of all function keys Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Stand-alone water supply

The disinfection system switches to self-sufficient water supply

Extracting residual water

Extraction of residual water by standard wet suction before cleaning the
filter
Apex measurement with file clamp
Activation of the ApexLocator for manual measurement with the file
clamp, showing the distance display
Apex distance acoustic signals
Activates the acoustic signals for the distance to the apex. The intervals
between the acoustic signals vary according to the measured distance
to the apex.
External HF surgical device
Activation of the protection against interference caused by an external
HF surgical unit
Sprayvit M instrument light
Switches the instrument light of the Sprayvit M removed from the holder
on/off.
Active lumbar support
Adjustment of active lumbar support

10.3 Instrument program

Static speed quick setting keys
Setting preset or intermediate speeds
BL, BL ISO C and BL Implant motors: min. 90 rpm, max. 40,000 rpm
BL ISO E motor: min. 2000 rpm, max. 40,000 rpm
Static intensity quick setting keys
Setting preset or intermediate intensity values for the SiroSonic TL
scaler
In the EasyMode Start program operating mode, the speed, intensity,
and endodontics function for the SiroSonic TL scaler can be set only
using the intensity quick setting keys.
Static quick setting keys for the endodontics function
Setting preset or intermediate endodontics intensity values for the
SiroSonic TL scaler with activated endodontics function
Programmable speed quick setting keys
Adjusts and saves the speed of the electric motor and also preselects
and activates the coolant
BL, BL ISO C and BL Implant motors: min. 90 rpm, max. 40,000 rpm
BL ISO E motor: min. 2000 rpm, max. 40,000 rpm

63 22 726 D3561
278 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 10 Overview of all function keys
Operating Instructions Sinius

Programmable intensity quick setting keys

Adjusts and saves the intensity of the SiroSonic TL scaler and also
preselects and activates the coolant
Memory key
Used to save instrument settings
This key is displayed only in the Save mode. Storage occurs
automatically when the instrument is deposited in the Drop mode.
Function levels
Storage and selection of instrument settings at two levels

Direction of rotation
Switches counterclockwise rotation ON/OFF

Boost function
Increases the intensity setting of the SiroSonic TL scaler in steps of 20,
referenced to the final value during treatment. After an intensity of 80 is
reached, only the maximum value of 100 can be selected.
Endodontics function
Activation of the endodontics function for the SiroSonic TL scaler
(power limitation)
Chip blower
Used to dry treatment areas or blow off drilling chips by emitting air
blasts from the treatment instrument
This key is displayed only when cursor control is activated
Activate preselected coolant
The coolants to be available for selection in the Instrument program can
be set in the sub-screen of each individual instrument, see below.

Sub-screen
Used to access additional subordinate functions; see the following
function keys:
Preselecting spray coolant
Used to cool the treatment area with spray

Preselecting air coolant

For cooling the treatment area with air

Preselect NaCl coolant

For cooling the treatment area with sterile saline solution

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 279
10 Overview of all function keys Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Setting the automatic motor stop of the ApexLocator

Switching the motor stop function of the ApexLocator on or off. When
the Apex Stop key is pressed, the Auto-Reverse key is displayed. If the
motor stop function is activated, the motor stops automatically when the
physiological apex is reached.
AutoReverse
Switching the ApexLocator Auto-Reverse function on or off. When the
physiological apex is reached, the bur drive automatically switches to
counterclockwise rotation when reactivated by the foot control. When
the file is withdrawn, the bur drive automatically switches back to
clockwise rotation.
Instrument light
Activates and sets the instrument light

Direct starter / speed foot control

Direct starter (highlighted gray): Switches the instrument on at the set
speed or intensity
Regulating foot switch (highlighted orange): Controls instrument up to
the maximum set speed or intensity depending on the position of the the
foot switch pedal.
Apex acoustic signals
Switching the apex acoustic signals on/off. If the signal tones are
switched on, a beep is issued when the apex or a set motor stop
position is reached. If the Auto-reverse function is activated, three
acoustic signals are issued when the motor switches to
counterclockwise rotation.
Apex distance acoustic signals
Switching the apex distance signal tones on or off. The intervals
between the signal tones vary according to the measured distance to
the apex.

63 22 726 D3561
280 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 10 Overview of all function keys
Operating Instructions Sinius

10.4 Treatment program

10.4.1 Treatment selection
Assigning the bur drive
A bur drive must be assigned to each treatment type, i.e. endodontics
and implantology.

Display of assigned bur drive

The assigned bur drive is marked with an orange circle. Any position
marked with a gray circle also can be assigned.
Open endodontics administration
Used to access additional subordinate functions for endodontic
treatments; see "Endodontic administration" [→ 282].

10.4.2 Endodontics
Calibrating the bur drive
A calibration must be performed each time you change or lubricate the
contra-angle handpiece.
The contra-angle handpiece is automatically checked during calibration.
This includes a measurement of motor current at different speeds to
assess the properties of the system.
Direction of rotation
Switches counterclockwise rotation ON/OFF

Opening the sub-screen

Used to access additional subordinate functions; see the following
function keys:
Setting the automatic motor stop of the ApexLocator
When the Apex Stop key is pressed, the – and + keys are displayed.
The automatic motor stop can be switched off or set to four different
levels. If the distance is 0, the motor does not stop until it reaches the
physiological apex. Please note that the distance values are not a
metric length measurement!
The preset motor stop position is displayed as a black triangle to the
right of the distance display under the text "Stop".
AutoReverse function
When the set torque value is reached, the bur drive automatically
switches to counterclockwise.
If your treatment center is equipped with the ApexLocator option, the
bur drive stops automatically when the set motor stop position is
reached. If the auto-reverse function is switched on, the next time the
foot pedal is activated following a motor stop, the motor is switched to
counterclockwise rotation. When the root canal file is withdrawn, the bur
drive automatically switches back to clockwise rotation.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 281
10 Overview of all function keys Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Remove file from sequence

Deletes the selected files from the sequence.

Memory key
Stores the settings of an endodontic treatment

10.4.3 Endodontics administration

Opening the sub-screen
Access from the Treatment selection program. See the following
function keys:
Copy endodontic treatment
A treatment can be copied and saved in the treatment list under a
different name. Then the settings can be changed.
Rename endodontic treatment
Endodontic treatments can be renamed to facilitate corrections and
editing.
Delete endodontic treatment
Removes individual endodontic treatments from the treatment list.

Adding a file system

For importing stored file systems to the endodontic treatment list.

63 22 726 D3561
282 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 10 Overview of all function keys
Operating Instructions Sinius

10.5 Other dialogs

10.5.1 Timer screen
Timer keys
Up to four timers can be set. The maximum time setting is 9 minutes
and 30 seconds.
Time loop
If the key is highlighted orange, the countdown will automatically be
restarted when the set time has expired.
Acoustic signal
If the key is highlighted orange, an acoustic signal will sound when the
set time has expired.

10.5.2 Sprayvit M setup

Activating/deactivating and setting the water tempering

10.5.3 Tumbler filling settings screen

Link tumbler filling to mouth rinsing position
If the key is highlighted orange, the tumbler filling function will
automatically be switched on for the duration of the preset filling time
when the mouth rinsing position chair program (S) is activated.
Water tempering on/off

Set filling time

10.5.4 Flushing settings screen

Linking flushing to mouth rinsing position S
Following movement to mouth rinsing position S, the flushing function
automatically switches on for the duration of the set flushing time.

10.5.5 Operating light setting program

Sensor control for switching the operating light on/off
If the key is highlighted orange, the operating light can be switched on/
off or changed to the Composite function by a hand movement.
Setting the brightness of the operating light

Setting the color temperature of the operating light

only for LEDview Plus

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 283
10 Overview of all function keys Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Setting the operating distance of the sensor control

Defines the distance at which the contactless switch will react to
movements.

10.6 Sivision program

10.6.1 Media Player
Start Media Player
Media Player is started on the external PC. The keys corresponding to
the Media Player PC application are displayed on the right side of the
touchscreen after a file is selected:
Previous/next title

Stop playback

Start/interrupt playback

Mute

Adjust volume

®
10.6.2 Microsoft PowerPoint®
Start PowerPoint
PowerPoint is started on the PC. The keys corresponding to the
PowerPoint PC application are displayed on the right side of the
touchscreen after a file is selected:
Previous/next slide

10.6.3 SI Video
Start SI Video
SI Video is started on the external PC if Sidexis is not installed on it. Or:
SI Video is started on the internal PC if the treatment center is operated
as a standalone unit. The keys for the SI Video PC application are
displayed on the right side of the touchscreen:
Selecting the next quadrant
In single image mode, the still image in the next quadrant is displayed.
In quad image mode, the next quadrant is highlighted.

63 22 726 D3561
284 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 10 Overview of all function keys
Operating Instructions Sinius

Quad image
Display quad image or single image. Up to four single images are
simultaneously displayed on the Sivision monitor in quad image mode.
Deleting images
All generated still images are deleted.

10.6.4 Sidexis
Starting Sidexis
Sidexis is started on the PC. The keys for the Sidexis PC application
are displayed on the right side of the touchscreen:
Next image
The next image window is activated.

Tiled layout
All open image windows are scaled to a uniform size in the display area
and arranged without overlapping.
Cascaded layout
The opened windows are "cascaded", i.e. arranged slightly displaced
behind one another. All image window titles are thus visible.
Overview layout
The opened image windows are scaled in the display area so that no
scroll bars or as few scroll bars as possible must be displayed. The
image windows are arranged without overlapping.
Full frame
The active image window is enlarged so that it covers the entire display
area. The control elements of the Sidexis user interface are not
concealed in the process.
Zoom in/out
This magnifies and decreases the active image window and the size of
the image displayed in it on the Sivision monitor.

Rotate image
Rotates the image 90° counterclockwise or clockwise. With Sidexis 4,
the image can be rotated 180° by pressing a key.

Contrast optimization filter

This image filter analyses and optimizes the current grayscale
distribution of an image. In this way, for instance, details within a very
low-contrast, “faint” image can be made visible.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 285
10 Overview of all function keys Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Relief display filter

Image details with high contrast are displayed brighter or darker. Edges
or contours within the image are thus clearly accentuated. The result is
a relief-like image distortion.
Smooth image
To mitigate high-contrast or high-interference effects in images, the
contrast between neighboring pixels is reduced or averaged. The
overall definition of the image is reduced.
Sharpen image
Contrasts between neighboring pixels are increased. This function helps
to accentuate edges or contours. The impression of a sharper image is
created.
Invert image
This function inverts the brightness values of the image pixels, thus
enabling a positive or negative display of the image. The inversion can
be canceled by pressing the key once again.
Display image in pseudocolors
To enable better distinction of image details, an image can be displayed
in what is called pseudo color mode. The grayscale values of the image
are replaced by colors which the human eye can distinguish better from
one another than the corresponding gray levels.
Filter black dots
Single pixel errors may occur when taking digital X-rays. These pixel
errors appear as individual black dots when the optimum resolution
(100%) is selected. They are removed by Sidexis.
Reducing noise
Individual scattered pixels and minor disturbing information which lead
to a noisy image are eliminated without reducing the overall definition of
the image.
Undo
The effect of the last filter operation is undone.

Restore original image

The changes previously made, e.g. via filters, are canceled. The most
recently saved version of the image is restored.
Close current media window

Close all media windows

Cancel/confirm entry

63 22 726 D3561
286 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 10 Overview of all function keys
Operating Instructions Sinius

Accept an order
Accepts an order that was placed and is waiting in Sidexis, e.g. for
creating an intraoral image with the X-ray unit of the treatment center or
a video recording with the intraoral camera.
Readiness for intraoral X-ray exposure
Establishes readiness for an X-ray exposure. A Sidexis window then
opens where the image type can be selected and the image can be
described in detail.

10.6.5 Video plugin

Start the video plugin
Sidexis 4 and the video plugin are started on the PC. The fixed keys for
the video plugin are displayed on the right side of the touchscreen.
Scroll up / select previous still image

Scroll down / select next still image

Mark selected still image for import to Sidexis 4

Mark all still images for export to Sidexis 4

Import marked still images to Sidexis 4

Discard all still images

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 287
10 Overview of all function keys Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

10.7 Setup program

10.7.1 User interface
Configuring the user interface
Opens the User Interface setup program.

Key tone
A setting can be made to activate or deactivate an acoustic signal that
sounds when the operator touches a key on the touchscreen.
Calibrating the touchscreen
If the touchscreen is no longer able to precisely locate the position of a
contact, it must be recalibrated.
Touchscreen brightness

10.7.2 Date and time

Date and time
Opens the Date and Time setup program.

Date

Time

12/24 hour display

10.7.3 Control options

Configuring control options
Opens the Control Options setup dialog.

Number of user profiles

If fewer user profiles are required, their number can be limited so that
only the specified users can be selected after the treatment center is
switched on.
Cursor control
The cursor control can be set as follows:
● Field 1: Cursor control switched off
● Field 2: Cursor control switched on, without screen change
● Field 3: Cursor control switched on, with screen change

63 22 726 D3561
288 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 10 Overview of all function keys
Operating Instructions Sinius

Start program operating modes

The Start program can run in two operating modes. In the Standard
Start program operating mode, the functions of the patient chair and
instruments are each shown on separate screens. In the EasyMode
Start program operating mode, the patient chair and instrument
functions that are most important for the treatment are shown together
on the same screen.
Open next dialog page

Focusing the intraoral camera using the foot control

It is possible to enable the foot control to focus the SiroCam AF / AF+
intraoral camera.
● Field 1: The display switches between a still or live image when the
foot pedal is pressed. The knob on the camera can be used to focus
the image.
● Field 2: The camera is focused by pressing the foot pedal. The
display switches between a still or live image only when the foot
pedal is pressed down fully. The knob on the camera can still be
used to focus the image.
● Field 3: When the foot pedal is pressed, the camera image is
focused and switched automatically from still to live image. The
knob on the camera has no function.
Spray aspirator
Enables interruption and/or activation of the suction flow of the spray
aspirator via the 4-way foot control on the base of the chair in any
direction.
Headrest inclination
If a motor-driven headrest is used, operation of the tilt patient couch
function using the 4-way foot control can be replaced by the headrest tilt
function.
Open next dialog page

Hash key on the assistant element

The Hash key on the assistant element can be assigned the X-ray
viewer function or, if the X-ray viewer function is set to the white screen
on the Sivision monitor, it can be assigned the white screen function.
Alternatively, the Hash key on the assistant element can also be used to
activate the bell or hash key, e.g. if neither an X-ray viewer or a Sivision
monitor is available.
Bell/hash (#) relay
The relay of the bell and hash (#) key can be actuated as a push button
or as a switch.
● Field 1: Push button
● Field 2: Switch

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 289
10 Overview of all function keys Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

White screen
If the treatment center has no X-ray viewer but is equipped with a
Sivision monitor, the X-ray viewer key can change the Sivision monitor
to the white screen mode.
Open next dialog page

Cleaning agent mixture for chemical suction hose cleaning

The vacuum system can be cleaned by pumping water into the
receptacle of the suction hoses and extracting it from there. A cleaning
agent is automatically added to the water if the dental treatment center
is equipped with the chemical suction hose cleaning option. It is
possible to set how much cleaning agent should be mixed with water for
chemical suction hose cleaning.
Central supply for chemical suction hose cleaning
For clinical use, Sinius treatment centers can be equipped with a central
cleaning agent supply for chemical suction hose cleaning. The function
can be switched on and off.
Tumbler heater
A setting can be made so that the tumbler heater automatically switches
off when the entry/exit position (0) chair program is activated. The
tumbler heater switches back on as soon as the patient chair leaves the
entry/exit position.
Tumbler heater temperature adjustment
The temperature of the water heated by the tumbler heater can be set.

10.7.4 Instruments
Configure instruments
Opens the Instruments setup program.

Quick setting keys/Function levels

Settings can be made in the Instrument programs using either the quick
setting keys (1...100) or two freely programmable function levels (E1,
E2).
When using the quick setting keys, you can choose one of two options
for saving the settings you made in the instrument program:
● SaveMode – The Memory key is displayed in the instrument
programs:
The settings made in the Instrument program will be saved after the
instrument is placed in its holder only if the Memory key was
pressed and held beforehand (> 2 s).
● DropMode – Memory key hidden in Instrument programs:
When the instrument is deposited, the settings made in the
Instrument program are automatically saved.

63 22 726 D3561
290 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona 10 Overview of all function keys
Operating Instructions Sinius

One of the following presettings can be selected:

● Field 1: Quick setting keys with SaveMode
● Field 2: Quick setting keys with DropMode
● Field 3: Function levels

Afterblow
After an instrument is put in its holder, the cooling spray remaining in
the instrument head or in the tip of the instrument is automatically blown
out by briefly activating the chip blower.
External HF surgical device key
External HF surgical devices may interfere with the treatment center
and Sivision monitor. Therefore, the External HF surgical devices key
may be displayed on the Start sub-screen. If the key on the sub-screen
is highlighted in orange, the treatment center is protected from
interference by HF fields.
Open next dialog page

Spray temperature
The spray temperature of the instruments on the dentist element can be
set.
The spray temperature of the Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe can be
adjusted separately, see "Switching the instrument light on/off and
setting the water temperature." [→ 122]

10.7.5 Network connection

Configure IP address setup program
Opens the IP Address setup program.

Entry of the IP Address, subnet mask and the Gateways

To configure a static network connection

DHCP
Activating the dynamic network configuration with DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol)

10.7.6 Service domain

Opening the service function
The Service domain is intended to be used only by service engineers.
Please contact your service technician or your dental depot.

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 291
Index Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Index
Numerical Assistant element

4-way foot control plate, 61, 63 Instrument positions, 45

4-way foot switch, 194 Maximum load capacity, 148

Mini LED, 154, 225
A Overview, 44
Accessories, 19, 270 Sprayvit M, 121, 226
Acoustic signals, 108 Suction handpieces, 151, 233
Adapter, 231, 252 Use of blasting devices, 18
Additional devices, 49 ATS, 24
AFNOR mark, 23 Automatic separator, 47
Afterblow, 198 AutoPurge function, 218
Air blast, short, 61, 63 AutoReverse function, 142
Air connection external device, 49
Air intake on the spray aspirator, 151 B
Amalgam separator Backrest, 76

Changing the rotor, 241 Ball for instrument holder, 94, 213

Dispose rotor, 241 Ball stopper, 94, 213

Message system, 244 Bars, orange and blue, 63

Operation log, 243 Battery change for wireless foot control, 262

Amalgam separator operation log, 243 Battery disposal, 273

Amalgam separators Beeps, 108

Standards/Approvals, 23 BELGAQUA, 24

Anti-glare films for X-ray viewer, 168 Bell key, 88, 195

ApexLocator, 102 Biofilm removal, 261

Acoustic signals, 108 Blasting device, 18

Distance display, 105 Boost function, 126

File clamp, 103 Bottle holder for saline solution, 98

in the Endodontics program, 139 Brake in support arm of dentist element, 81, 82

In the Motor program, 116

C
Instrument hose, 103
Cal key, 131, 138
Manual measurement with the file clamp, 109, 140
Calibrating the burr drive, 131
Motor, 103
Calibrating the motor, 131
Motor stop, 106, 143
Calibration of the burr drive, 131
Mucosal electrode, 103
Calibration of the burr drive Calibrating the burr
Standardization, 109, 118, 139 drive, 138
Approvals, 23 Calibration of the touchscreen, 191
Armrest, 68 Call key, 88, 195
Articulating headrest, 33, 71

63 22 726 D3561
292 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona Index
Operating Instructions Sinius

Camera, 20, 173, 175, 226 Declaration of conformity, 23

Use with SI video, 178 Default settings, 190
Use with Sidexis, 180 Dental unit plugins
Canadian Standard Association (CSA), 23 ApexLocator distance display, 107
Capacitive sensor, 81, 82 Video plugin, 188
Care, cleaning, and disinfecting agents, 203 Dentist element
CDS 60, 196 Covering with surgical drape, 136
CE marking, 23 Fixed keys, 84
Cellular phones , 20 Handles, 208
Chair height, 76 Height adjustment, 80
Chair programs, 72, 77, 149 Instrument holder, 93, 212
Chemical suction hose cleaning, 196, 229 Instrument positions, 39
Chip blower, 61, 63 Main switch, 52
Clean key, 88 Move, 80
Cleaning adapter, 231, 252 Deutscher Verein für Gas und Wasser (DVGW) =
Cleaning agent for hose cleaning, 230 German Gas and Water Association, 24

Collapse position, 77, 86 DHCP, 200

Collect amalgam residues, 236, 242, 245, 248 Direct starter, 96

Collecting amalgam residues, 234 Disinfectant for the water lines, 239

Composite function, 86, 149, 171 Disinfectant residues, 206

Configuration of the treatment center, 190 Disinfection system, 47, 160, 239

Conformity mark, 23 Disposal of old electrical and electronic devices, 272

Consumables, 270 Distance display, 105

Contra-angle handpiece inertia, 131, 138 Distance display in Sidexis 4, 107

Control options, 193 Double articulating headrest, 33, 71

Coolant, 96 Drape, 136

Counterclockwise/clockwise rotation, 142 Drinking water supply, 160

Couplings, 110 Driving air proportional valve, 119

Cup holder, 166, 210 DropMode and SaveMode, 91

Cursor control, 61, 62

E
Cursor control , 193
E1, E2, 89, 198
Cursor return, 63
EasyMode Start program, 56
Cuspidor, 158, 237
EasyTouch user interface, 19, 41, 191
Cuspidor flushing, 87, 149, 159
EasyTouch user interface , 54, 207
Customer service center, 11
Electric motor, 110
CW/CC rotation, 114
Electromagnetic compatibility, 20
CW/CCW rotation, 132, 138
Electronic torque limitation, 131, 132, 141

D Electrosurgery, external unit, 199

Data transfer, 53 Endodontic management, 145

Date and time, 192 Endodontics, 116

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 293
Index Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Endodontics (treatment), 128 Flushing cuspidor, 149, 159

Endodontics with SiroSonic TL, 127 Focusing the intraoral camera, 177, 194
enretec GmbH, 272 Foot control
Entry/exit position 0, 61, 149 Battery (wireless foot control), 60, 262
Entry/exit position 0 , 72 Cleaning, 214
Error message, 59 Cursor control, 61, 62, 193
External device connector, 49 Direct starter/speed foot control, 96
External HF surgical device, 20 Electromagnetic compatibility, 20
External HF surgical unit, 199 login (wireless foot control), 60
External PC, 183 Operation, 61
Extract residual water, 247 Overview, 34
Spray/NaCl, 61
F Standards/approvals, 24
Favorite keys, 198 Wireless interface (wireless foot control), 27
FCC, 24 Foot switch
File clamp, 103 Chip blower , 61
File selection, 137 Footer, 58, 59
Filter Function levels, 89, 198
Air and water, 240
Gold trap, 236 G
Suction hoses, 234 Gold trap, 236
Wet suction, 247 Guide roller on the SINIUS CS dentist element, 93
Firmware, 12, 190 Guide rollers, 93
Fixed key
Bell, 195 H
Chair programs, 149 Handles on dentist element, 81, 82

Clean, 88 Handles on the dentist element, 208

Composite function, 86, 149, 171 Hands-free operation, 62

Flushing cuspidor, 87, 149 Hash key, 88, 150, 195

Freely selectable function, 88 Head rest

Hash, 195 Disinfecting, 211

Hash key/bell/X-ray viewer, 150 Headrest

Main switch, 52, 84 Double articulating headrest, 33, 71

Operating light, 149, 169, 171 Motor-driven headrest, 32, 69, 195

Setup, 88, 190 Height adjustment

Shock positioning, 86 Dentist element, 80

Timer function, 85 Heliodent Plus, 172

Tumbler filling, 87, 149 Heliodent Plus X-ray tube unit, 172

Fixed key HF surgical device, external, 20

Shock positioning, 77 HF surgical unit, external, 199

Flat screen monitor, 174 High-speed handpiece, 119

63 22 726 D3561
294 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona Index
Operating Instructions Sinius

Hose coding, 110 Saving settings, 135

SiroNiTi, 116
I SiroSonic TL, 124
IEC socket, 49 Speed, 112, 131, 141
Immunosuppressed patients, 16 Spray amount, 97
Implant work steps, 133 Sprayvit M, 121, 226
Implantology, 128 Torque limitation, 116, 131, 132, 141
Industry Canada, 24 Treatment function, 128
Initial startup, 51 Instruments
Inspection and maintenance, 265 Clockwise/counterclockwise rotation , 61
Installation Book, 265 Switch on/control , 61
Instrument Intended use, 13
Light, 96 Intensity, 124
Instrument holder, 93 Intensity increase (Boost function), 126
Assistant element, 214 Intermittent operation, 18
Dentist element, 212 Internal PC, 183
Tray, 163, 164, 165, 209 Intervals for maintenance, cleaning, and
Instrument hose, 103, 227 disinfection, 201
Instrument hose sleeve, 136 Intraoral camera, 20, 173, 175, 226
Instrument light, 96, 119, 122 Use with SI video, 178
Instrument program, 89 Use with Sidexis, 180
Instruments IP address, 200
Afterblow, 198
Automatic purging (AutoPurge function), 218 K
Ball stopper, 94 Key color, 54

Care and cleaning, 224 Key tone, 191

Configuring, 198 Keys, missing, 54, 190

Coolant, 96
L
CW/CC rotation, 114
Last Position Memory function, 73
CW/CCW rotation, 138
LEDview, 169
Drive motors, 18
LEDview Plus, 169
High-speed handpiece, 119
Live image, 178, 180
Holder/positions on assistant element, 45
Load
Holder/positions on the dentist element, 39
Tray, 164
Intensity, 124
Load capacity
Light, 119, 122
Assistant element, 148
Mini LED, 154, 225
Cup holder, 166
Motor and coupling versions, 110
Dentist element, 79
Motor holder, 136
Patient chair, 18
Rinse (purge function), 215
Tray, 163, 165
Save settings, 91

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 295
Index Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Locking brake in support arm of dentist element, 81, Mouth rinsing position S, 61, 73, 149
82 Mucosal electrode, 103
Long-duration treatment, 229 Municipal water, 160
Loudspeaker, 20
Lumbar support function, 78 N
NaCl, 61, 132
M NaCl flow rate, 101, 132
Main device switch, 51 NaCl pump, 98
Main switch, 52 NaCl rinsing, 134
Maintenance Certificate, 265 Network configuration, 200
Maintenance deadline , 265
Maintenance Manual, 265, 266 O
Maintenance Service , 13 Operating conditions, 26
Maintenance, cleaning, and disinfecting intervals, 201 Operating light, 149, 169
Manual measurement with the file clamp, 109, 140 Operating voltage of instrument light, 120
Manufacturer's address, 11 OTP dentist element, 82
Maximum load Positioning, 82
Tray, 164
Maximum load capacity, 79
P
Panoramic X-ray viewer, 167
Assistant element, 148
Patient chair, 76
Dentist element, 79
Chair programs, 72, 77
Patient chair, 18
Drive motors, 18
Tray, 163, 165
External device connector, 49
Mechanical torque limitation, 116
Lumbar support function, 78
Media player, 185
Manual movement, 75
Media quality, 16
Maximum load capacity, 18
Medical Product Log, 266
Overview, 31
Memory key, 91, 135, 198
Power switch, 51
Message system of the amalgam separator, 244
Safety switch, 66
MET Labs, 23
Shock positioning, 77
Metal oxide blasting device, 18
Start program operating modes, 55
Microbiological test, 203
Stop movement, 67
Mini LED, 154, 225
PC, 20, 183
Mini LED curing light, 154
PC control, 183
Minimum PC requirements, 27
Peristaltic pump, 98
Monitor, 20, 174
Power consumption, 25, 52
Motor holder, 136
Power switch, 51
Motor hose coding, 110
PowerPoint, 185
Motor stop (ApexLocator), 143
Program change, 58, 62, 64
Motor versions, 110
Motor-driven headrest, 195

63 22 726 D3561
296 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
Dentsply Sirona Index
Operating Instructions Sinius

Programs SiroSonic TL scaler, 124

Instrument program, 89, 93 Siucom Plus, 173, 183, 184
Settings screen, 58 Sivision Connect, 173, 183, 184
Sivision program, 184 Sivision Digital, 20, 173, 226
Start program, 55 Sivision Digital video system, 20, 173, 226
Sub-screen, 58 Sivision monitor, 20, 174
Proportional valve, 119 Sivision program, 184
Protection class, 25 Sliding track, 80
Purge function, 215 Socket on external device connection, 49
Software version, 12, 190
Q Spare parts, 270
Quick setting keys, 89, 198 Speed, 112, 131, 141
Speed foot control, 96
R
Spray, 61
Reciprocating rotating files, 139
Spray amount, 97
Remote access, 269
Spray aspirator, 151, 194, 233
Remote diagnosis, 269
Spray tempering, 199
RoHS Directive, 23
Sprayvit M, 121, 226
rotation Instruments
Sprayvit M multifunctional syringe, 121, 226
CW/CCW, 132
Sprayvit M water tempering, 123
S Standard wet suction, 247
Safety checks, 265 Standardization of the ApexLocator, 104, 109, 118,
139
Safety instructions, 15
Standards, 23
Safety switch, 66
Standby mode, 51
Saliva ejector, 152, 233
Start program, 55
Salt blasting device, 18
Status line, 59
Sanitizing the water lines, 51, 249
Sterile operation, 136
SaveMode and DropMode, 91
Sterile work, 62
Screens, 41
Still image, 178, 180
Sediment container, 245
Stop movement, 67
Select endo file, 137
Storage conditions, 26
Self-sufficient water supply, 160
Sub-screen, 58
Settings screen, 58
Suction handpieces, 151, 233
Setup key, 88, 123, 190
Suction hoses, 229, 234, 235
Shock positioning, 77, 86
Suction system, 231
SI video, 178
Cleaning, 229
Sidexis, 180, 186
Cleaning agent additive, 196
Sidexis 4 plugins, 107, 188
Disinfection, 235
SiroCam, 173, 226
Filter, 234
SiroNiTi, 116
Support arm, 163, 164, 165, 209
SiroSonic TL, 124

63 22 726 D3561
D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 297
Index Dentsply Sirona
Operating Instructions Sinius

Surfaces, 206 V
Surgical drape, 136 Vacuum system, 18
Surgical light, 169 Ventilation holes on the spray aspirator , 151
Surgical procedures, 136 Ventilation slots, 19
Surgical suction, 151, 233 Video plugin, 188
Surgical suction device, 152
Swivel arm dentist element, 81 W
Instrument holder, 93, 213 Warning triangle, 267
Positioning, 81 Warranty, 265
Water and air connection, 49
T Water connection external device, 49
Technical data, 25 Water quality, 16
Tempering Water Tempering, 87
Spray, 199 Water unit
Sprayvit M, 123 Amalgam separator, 241, 244
Tumbler filling, 87 Cuspidor, 158
Thermodisinfector, 235 Flushing cuspidor, 87, 149, 159
Time and date, 192 Overview, 47
Timer function, 85 Sediment container, 245
Torque acoustic signal, 135, 143 Self-sufficient water supply, 160
Torque limitation, 116, 131, 132, 141 Standard wet suction, 247
Total Count Tester, 203 Suction hose cleaning, 229, 231
Touchscreen, 19, 41, 54, 191, 207 Tumbler filler, 87, 149
Transfer user data, 53 Tumbler filling with automatic sensor control, 158
Transport conditions, 26 Water, microbiological test, 203
Tray, 163, 164, 165, 209 White balance for intraoral camera, 182
Tray holder, 164 White screen on Sivision monitor, 150
Treatment function, 128 White screen on the Sivision monitor, 196
Treatment light, 169 Work steps for implantology, 133
Tumbler filler, 87, 149
Tumbler filling with automatic sensor control, 158 X
Tumbler heater, 197 X-ray viewer, 150, 167, 195, 196
Turbine hose, 227

U
Ultrasonic handpiece, 124
Upholstery, 211
USB interface, 189
User profile, 53
User profile , 193
Using saline solution, 98

63 22 726 D3561
298 D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017
We reserve the right to make any alterations which may be required due to technical improvements.

© Sirona Dental Systems GmbH Sprache: englisch Printed in Germany

D3561.201.01.15.02 10.2017 Ä.-Nr.: 124 528

Sirona Dental Systems GmbH

Fabrikstraße 31 Order No 63 22 726 D3561

64625 Bensheim
Germany
www.dentsplysirona.com